WO2020125595A1 - Video coder-decoder and corresponding method - Google Patents

Video coder-decoder and corresponding method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020125595A1
WO2020125595A1 PCT/CN2019/125740 CN2019125740W WO2020125595A1 WO 2020125595 A1 WO2020125595 A1 WO 2020125595A1 CN 2019125740 W CN2019125740 W CN 2019125740W WO 2020125595 A1 WO2020125595 A1 WO 2020125595A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
image block
current image
block
division
condition
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/125740
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
杨海涛
赵寅
赵日洋
李忠良
肖晶
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN201910372891.6A external-priority patent/CN111327899A/en
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to EP19898034.4A priority Critical patent/EP3890322A4/en
Publication of WO2020125595A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020125595A1/en
Priority to US17/345,286 priority patent/US11516470B2/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/169Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/17Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object
    • H04N19/176Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object the region being a block, e.g. a macroblock

Definitions

  • This application relates to the technical field of video encoding and decoding, in particular to a video decoder and corresponding method.
  • Digital video capabilities can be incorporated into a variety of devices, including digital TVs, digital live broadcast systems, wireless broadcast systems, personal digital assistants (PDAs), laptop or desktop computers, tablet computers, electronics Book readers, digital cameras, digital recording devices, digital media players, video game devices, video game consoles, cellular or satellite radiotelephones (so-called "smart phones”), video teleconferencing devices, video streaming devices And the like.
  • PDAs personal digital assistants
  • laptop or desktop computers tablet computers
  • electronics Book readers digital cameras
  • digital recording devices digital media players
  • video game devices video game consoles
  • cellular or satellite radiotelephones so-called "smart phones”
  • video teleconferencing devices video streaming devices And the like.
  • Digital video equipment implements video compression technology, for example, in MPEG-2, MPEG-4, ITU-T H.263, ITU-T H.264/MPEG-4 Part 10 Advanced Video Coding (advanced video coding, AVC)
  • AVC Advanced Video Coding
  • Video devices can more efficiently transmit, receive, encode, decode, and/or store digital video information by implementing such video compression techniques.
  • MPEG is the abbreviation of moving picture expert group (moving picture experts) group.
  • ITU-T is the abbreviation of ITU-T for ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector.
  • a video slice ie, a video frame or a portion of a video frame
  • CU coding units
  • How to divide video frames or video strips to improve video encoding and decoding performance has become an urgent technical problem to be solved.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a video decoder and corresponding methods, which help to improve the performance of video encoding and decoding.
  • encoding and decoding are collectively referred to as decoding.
  • a video decoding method which includes: first, determining a block division strategy for the current image block according to the size relationship between the width and height of the current image block. Then, the block division strategy is applied to the current image block to obtain a coding block. Next, the reconstruction of the current image block is achieved by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
  • the block division strategy of the current image block is determined conditionally to obtain the coding block. In this way, it helps to reduce the complexity of the division and thereby improve the performance of video encoding and decoding.
  • the coding block may also be called a coding unit.
  • this technical solution can be applied to the second-level coding tree in the extended quad-tree (EQT) scheme, that is, the current image block can be any of the second-level coding trees An image block.
  • the coding block may be a leaf node in a coding tree such as a second-level coding tree.
  • determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block meets the first condition.
  • the first condition includes that the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block.
  • the block division strategy is determined to be the division in the vertical direction.
  • the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located.
  • determining the block division strategy of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block satisfies the second condition.
  • the second condition includes that the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the second condition, the block division strategy is determined to be the division in the horizontal direction.
  • the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located.
  • the technical solution helps to limit the height to width ratio of leaf nodes in the coding tree within a certain range, thereby facilitating coding.
  • determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block meets the first condition.
  • the first condition includes that the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the first condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the horizontal direction.
  • the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located. Based on this, the current image block may or may not be divided subsequently.
  • whether to divide the current image block can be determined according to the block strategy of the current image block combined with other information, such as the principle of minimum CU size and the principle of minimum rate distortion optimization (RDO). If it is determined to divide the current image block, there is no need to incorporate information indicating the division direction of the current image block into the code stream, so this technical solution helps to save transmission bit overhead. In addition, the technical solution helps to limit the width-to-height ratio of leaf nodes in the coding tree to a certain range, thereby facilitating coding.
  • RDO principle of minimum CU size and the principle of minimum rate distortion optimization
  • determining the block division strategy of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block satisfies the second condition.
  • the second condition includes that the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the second condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the vertical direction.
  • the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located. Based on this, the current image block may or may not be divided subsequently.
  • this technical solution helps to save transmission bit overhead.
  • the technical solution helps to limit the height to width ratio of leaf nodes in the coding tree within a certain range, thereby facilitating coding.
  • the first threshold is the maximum value of the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the node in the allowed coding tree (such as the second-level coding tree in the EQT scheme).
  • the first threshold is a value greater than 1.
  • the first threshold may be an integer power of 2.
  • the method may further include: parsing the code stream to obtain identification information, where the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block.
  • applying the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain an encoded block includes: based on the block division strategy (specifically, the block division strategy determined when the first condition is not met), using the division type indicated by the identification information , Dividing the current image block into the vertical direction to obtain the coding block.
  • the video decoding method is specifically a video decoding method.
  • the method may further include: parsing the code stream to obtain identification information, where the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block.
  • applying the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain an encoded block includes: based on the block division strategy (specifically, the block division strategy determined when the second condition is not met), using the division type indicated by the identification information To divide the current image block into the horizontal direction.
  • the video decoding method is specifically a video decoding method.
  • determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block meets the third condition.
  • the third condition includes that the width of the current image block is smaller than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the third condition, the block division strategy is determined as an extended quadtree division with the division direction in the vertical direction.
  • the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located.
  • the technical solution helps to limit the width-to-height ratio of leaf nodes in the coding tree to a certain range, thereby facilitating coding.
  • determining the block division strategy of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block satisfies the fourth condition.
  • the fourth condition includes that the height of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the width of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the fourth condition, the block division strategy is determined to be an extended quadtree division with the division direction in the horizontal direction.
  • the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located.
  • the technical solution helps to limit the height to width ratio of leaf nodes in the coding tree within a certain range, thereby facilitating coding.
  • determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block meets the third condition.
  • the third condition includes that the width of the current image block is smaller than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the third condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the extended quadtree division in the horizontal direction, and the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located. Based on this, the current image block may or may not be divided subsequently.
  • determining the block division strategy of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block satisfies the fourth condition.
  • the fourth condition includes that the height of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the width of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the fourth condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the extended quadtree division in the vertical direction, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block lies . Based on this, the current image block may or may not be divided subsequently.
  • the second threshold is one-half the maximum value of the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the allowed coding tree (such as the second-level coding tree in the EQT scheme).
  • the second threshold is a value greater than 1.
  • the second threshold may be an integer power of 2.
  • the method may further include: parsing the code stream to obtain identification information, where the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block.
  • applying the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain the encoded block includes: based on the block division strategy (specifically the block division strategy determined when the third condition is not met), when the identification information indicates that the current image block When the extended quadtree is divided, the current image block is divided into the extended quadtree in the vertical direction.
  • the video decoding method is specifically a video decoding method.
  • the method may further include: parsing the code stream to obtain identification information, where the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block.
  • applying the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain the coding block includes: based on the block division strategy (specifically the block division strategy determined when the fourth condition is not satisfied), when the identification information indicates that the current image block When the extended quadtree is divided, the current image block is divided into horizontal quadtrees.
  • the video decoding method is specifically a video decoding method.
  • a video decoding method including: if the length of the long side of the image block to be divided in the image to be decoded is twice the length of the short side of the image block to be divided, dividing the image block to be divided Binary tree division whose direction is perpendicular to the long side of the image block to be divided to obtain the divided image block. For example, if the width of the image block to be divided in the image to be decoded is twice the height, then the image block to be divided is divided into vertical binary trees to obtain the divided image block. For another example, if the height of the image block to be divided in the image to be decoded is twice as wide, then the image block to be divided is horizontally binary tree divided to obtain the divided image block.
  • the image to be decoded is reconstructed.
  • the conditional division of the image blocks to be divided is helpful to reduce the division complexity, thereby improving the video codec performance.
  • the length of the long side of the image block to be divided is twice the length of the short side of the image block to be divided, there is no need to program the division method (including the division type and division direction) of the current image block into the code stream. ) Information, so transmission bit overhead can be saved.
  • the current image block can be divided into two square image blocks. Compared with the non-square rectangular image block, the subsequent block of the square image block The possibility of being divided is higher, therefore, the technical solution helps to improve the encoding accuracy of video pictures.
  • the long side of the image block to be divided is 128 pixels long, and the short side is 64 pixels long.
  • the image block to be divided is divided into vertical binary trees.
  • the image block to be divided is divided into horizontal binary trees.
  • the length of the short side of the image block to be divided is equal to the side size of the maximum transform unit (TU), or the length of the short side of the image block to be divided is equal to the virtual pipeline data unit (virtual pipeline data unit) , VPDU) side dimensions.
  • TU maximum transform unit
  • VPDU virtual pipeline data unit
  • the image blocks to be divided are boundary image blocks. Wherein, if one or more pixels in the current node exceed the current image boundary, the current node is said to exceed the image boundary. In this case, the current node is a boundary image block.
  • a video decoding method which includes: if the width of the image block to be divided in the image to be decoded is greater than the height, vertical binary tree division is performed on the image block to be divided to obtain the divided image block; and /Or, if the height of the image block to be divided in the image to be decoded is greater than the width, then the image block to be divided is divided into horizontal binary trees to obtain the divided image block. Then, according to the divided image blocks, the image to be decoded is reconstructed. In this way, the conditional division of the image blocks to be divided is helpful to reduce the division complexity, thereby improving the video codec performance.
  • the technical solution does not need to include information indicating the division manner (including division type and division direction) of dividing the current image block in the code stream, so transmission bit overhead can be saved.
  • the current image block is divided into two square image blocks. Compared with a non-square rectangular image block, the subsequent blocks of the square image block are more likely to be divided. Therefore, this technical solution helps Improve the encoding accuracy of video pictures.
  • the image block to be divided is divided into vertical binary trees.
  • the image block to be divided is divided into horizontal binary trees.
  • the image blocks to be divided are boundary image blocks.
  • a video decoding method which includes: according to whether the current image block satisfies the first condition, determining whether to allow the current image block to be divided in a horizontal direction by a binary tree, where the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the height of the current image block
  • the first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block satisfies the first condition, it is determined to allow the current image block Binary tree division in the horizontal direction; if it is determined that the current image block is allowed to be divided in the horizontal direction, the coding block of the current image block is obtained; the reconstruction of the current image block is achieved by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
  • the current image block is conditionally divided to obtain an encoding block, which helps to reduce the complexity of the division and thereby improve the performance of video encoding and decoding.
  • a video decoding method which includes: according to whether a current image block satisfies a second condition, determining whether to allow a binary tree division of the current image block in a vertical direction, the vertical direction being perpendicular to the width of the current image block
  • the second condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block meets the second condition, it is determined that the current image is allowed
  • the block is divided into two binary trees in the vertical direction; if it is determined that the current image block is allowed to be divided in the vertical direction, the coding block of the current image block is obtained; the current image block is realized by reconstructing the obtained coding block Refactoring.
  • the current image block is conditionally divided to obtain an encoding block, which helps to reduce the complexity of the division and thereby improve the performance of video encoding and decoding.
  • a video decoding method which includes: according to whether the current image block satisfies the first condition, determining whether to allow the current image block to be divided in a horizontal direction, the horizontal direction being perpendicular to the high side of the current image block Direction, the first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block does not meet the first condition, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed Divide the horizontal direction; if it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to be divided horizontally, obtain the coding block of the current image block; by reconstructing the obtained coding block, the current image block is re-implemented Structure.
  • the current image block is conditionally divided to obtain an encoding block, which helps to reduce the complexity of the division and thereby improve the performance of video encoding and decoding.
  • a video decoding method which includes: according to whether the current image block satisfies the second condition, determine whether to allow the current image block to be divided in the vertical direction, where the vertical direction is perpendicular to the width of the current image block
  • the second condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block does not meet the second condition, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed Perform the vertical division; when it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to be divided vertically, obtain the coding block of the current image block; by reconstructing the obtained coding block to achieve the re-weight of the current image block Structure.
  • the current image block is conditionally divided to obtain an encoding block, which helps to reduce the complexity of the division and thereby improve the performance of video encoding and decoding.
  • a video decoding apparatus including the first aspect or the second aspect or the third aspect, or any one of the first aspect or the second aspect or the third aspect
  • the module (or unit) of the method in the design is provided.
  • a video decoder in a ninth aspect, includes: a nonvolatile memory and a processor coupled to each other.
  • the processor calls the program code stored in the memory to perform any one of the first aspect to the seventh aspect, or a part of the method in any possible design of the first aspect or the seventh aspect or All steps.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores a program code, wherein the program code includes any of the first to seventh aspects, or the first Instructions for any or all steps of the method in any one of the implementation manners of the aspect to the seventh aspect.
  • a computer program product which, when run on a computer, causes the computer to perform any one of the first aspect to the seventh aspect, or any one of the first aspect to the seventh aspect Instructions for some or all steps of a method in an implementation.
  • FIG. 1A is a schematic block diagram of a video encoding and decoding system applied in an embodiment of this application;
  • 1B is a schematic block diagram of another video encoding and decoding system applied in an embodiment of this application;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of an encoder implementing an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of a decoder implementing an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a video decoding device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram of an implementation manner of a decoding device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of several division methods applicable to embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a coding tree and its corresponding division method applicable to embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a video decoding method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of an image block division method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of another image block division method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of another image block division method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of another image block division method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of a video encoding method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of a video decoding method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a video decoder provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 16 is a schematic structural diagram of another video decoder provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 17 is a schematic diagram of a video communication system applicable to embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic flowchart of another video decoding method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the corresponding device may contain one or more units such as functional units to perform the one or more method steps described (eg, one unit performs one or more steps , Or multiple units, each of which performs one or more of multiple steps), even if such one or more units are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings.
  • the corresponding method may include a step to perform the functionality of one or more units (eg, one step executes one or more units Functionality, or multiple steps, each of which performs the functionality of one or more of the multiple units), even if such one or more steps are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings.
  • the features of the exemplary embodiments and/or aspects described herein may be combined with each other.
  • Video coding generally refers to processing a sequence of pictures that form a video or video sequence.
  • the terms "picture”, “frame” or “image” may be used as synonyms.
  • Video coding as used herein refers to video encoding or video decoding.
  • Video encoding is performed on the source side, and usually includes processing (eg, by compressing) the original video picture to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture, thereby storing and/or transmitting more efficiently.
  • Video decoding is performed on the destination side and usually involves inverse processing relative to the encoder to reconstruct the video picture.
  • the “encoding” of video pictures involved in the embodiments should be understood as referring to the “encoding” or “decoding” of video sequences.
  • the combination of the encoding part and the decoding part is also called codec (encoding and decoding).
  • the video sequence includes a series of pictures, which are further divided into slices, and the slices are further divided into blocks.
  • Video coding is performed in units of blocks.
  • a macroblock can be further divided into multiple prediction blocks that can be used for predictive coding.
  • basic concepts such as coding unit (ie CU), prediction unit (prediction unit (PU) and transform unit (ie TU) are used, functionally divided into various block units, and a new tree-based structure is used for description.
  • PU can correspond to the prediction block and is the basic unit of predictive coding.
  • the CU is further divided into multiple PUs according to the division mode.
  • the TU can correspond to the transform block and is the basic unit for transforming the prediction residual.
  • the coding tree unit (in the coding tree (CTU)) is split into multiple CUs by using a quadtree structure represented as a coding tree.
  • a decision is made at the CU level whether to use inter-picture (temporal) or intra-picture (spatial) prediction to encode picture regions.
  • Each CU can be further split into one, two, or four PUs according to the PU split type.
  • the same prediction process is applied within a PU, and related information is transmitted to the decoder on the basis of the PU.
  • the CU may be divided into TUs according to other quadtree structures similar to the coding tree used for the CU.
  • quad-tree and binary-tree QTBT are used to divide frames to divide coding blocks.
  • the CU may have a square or rectangular shape.
  • the image block to be encoded in the current encoded image may be referred to as the current block (or current image block).
  • the current block or current image block
  • the decoded image block used to predict the current block in the reference image is referred to as a reference block, that is, the reference block is a block that provides a reference signal for the current block, where the reference signal represents a pixel value within the image block.
  • the block in the reference image that provides the prediction signal for the current block may be a prediction block, where the prediction signal represents a pixel value or a sample value or a sample signal within the prediction block. For example, after traversing multiple reference blocks, the best reference block is found. This best reference block will provide a prediction for the current block. This block is called a prediction block.
  • the original video picture can be reconstructed, that is, the reconstructed video picture has the same quality as the original video picture (assuming no transmission loss or other data loss during storage or transmission).
  • further compression is performed by, for example, quantization to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture, but the decoder side cannot fully reconstruct the video picture, that is, the quality of the reconstructed video picture is better than the original video picture. The quality is lower or worse.
  • Several video coding standards of H.261 belong to "lossy hybrid video codec” (ie, combining spatial and temporal prediction in the sample domain with 2D transform coding for applying quantization in the transform domain).
  • Each picture of a video sequence is usually divided into non-overlapping block sets, which are usually encoded at the block level.
  • the encoder side usually processes the encoded video at the block (video block) level.
  • the prediction block is generated by spatial (intra-picture) prediction and temporal (inter-picture) prediction.
  • the encoder duplicates the decoder processing loop so that the encoder and decoder generate the same prediction (eg, intra prediction and inter prediction) and/or reconstruction for processing, ie encoding subsequent blocks.
  • FIG. 1A exemplarily shows a schematic block diagram of a video encoding and decoding system 10 applied in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the video encoding and decoding system 10 may include a source device 12 and a destination device 14, the source device 12 generates encoded video data, and therefore, the source device 12 may be referred to as a video encoding device.
  • the destination device 14 may decode the encoded video data generated by the source device 12, and therefore, the destination device 14 may be referred to as a video decoding device.
  • Various implementations of source device 12, destination device 14, or both may include one or more processors and memory coupled to the one or more processors.
  • the memory may include, but is not limited to, RAM, ROM, EEPROM, flash memory, or any other medium that can be used to store the desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures accessible by the computer, as described herein.
  • the communication connection between the source device 12 and the destination device 14 may be via a link 13, and the destination device 14 may receive the encoded video data from the source device 12 via the link 13.
  • Link 13 may include one or more media or devices capable of moving encoded video data from source device 12 to destination device 14.
  • link 13 may include one or more communication media that enable source device 12 to transmit encoded video data directly to destination device 14 in real time.
  • the source device 12 may modulate the encoded video data according to a communication standard (eg, a wireless communication protocol), and may transmit the modulated video data to the destination device 14.
  • the one or more communication media may include wireless and/or wired communication media, such as a radio frequency (RF) spectrum or one or more physical transmission lines.
  • RF radio frequency
  • the one or more communication media may form part of a packet-based network, such as a local area network, a wide area network, or a global network (eg, the Internet).
  • the one or more communication media may include routers, switches, base stations, or other devices that facilitate communication from source device 12 to destination device 14.
  • the source device 12 includes an encoder 20.
  • the source device 12 may further include a picture source 16, a picture pre-processor 18, and a communication interface 22.
  • the encoder 20, the picture source 16, the picture pre-processor 18, and the communication interface 22 may be hardware components in the source device 12, or may be software programs in the source device 12. They are described as follows:
  • Picture source 16 which can include or can be any type of picture capture device, for example to capture real-world pictures, and/or any type of picture or comment (for screen content encoding, some text on the screen is also considered to be encoded Part of the picture or image) generation device, for example, a computer graphics processor for generating computer animation pictures, or for acquiring and/or providing real-world pictures, computer animation pictures (for example, screen content, virtual reality, VR) pictures) in any category of equipment, and/or any combination thereof (eg, augmented reality (AR) pictures).
  • the picture source 16 may be a camera for capturing pictures or a memory for storing pictures.
  • the picture source 16 may also include any type of (internal or external) interface that stores previously captured or generated pictures and/or acquires or receives pictures.
  • the picture source 16 When the picture source 16 is a camera, the picture source 16 may be, for example, a local or integrated camera integrated in the source device; when the picture source 16 is a memory, the picture source 16 may be a local or integrated, for example, integrated in the source device Memory.
  • the interface When the picture source 16 includes an interface, the interface may be, for example, an external interface that receives pictures from an external video source.
  • the external video source is, for example, an external picture capture device, such as a camera, an external memory, or an external picture generation device.
  • the external picture generation device for example It is an external computer graphics processor, computer or server.
  • the interface may be any type of interface according to any proprietary or standardized interface protocol, such as a wired or wireless interface, an optical interface.
  • the picture can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of picture elements.
  • the pixels in the array can also be called sampling points.
  • the number of sampling points in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the array or picture defines the size and/or resolution of the picture.
  • three color components are usually used, that is, a picture can be represented or contain three sampling arrays.
  • the picture includes corresponding red, green, and blue sampling arrays.
  • each pixel is usually expressed in a luminance/chrominance format or color space. For example, for a picture in YUV format, it includes the luminance component indicated by Y (sometimes also indicated by L) and the two indicated by U and V. Chroma components.
  • the luma component Y represents luminance or gray-scale horizontal intensity (for example, both are the same in gray-scale pictures), and the two chroma components U and V represent chroma or color information components.
  • the picture in the YUV format includes a luminance sampling array of luminance sampling values (Y), and two chrominance sampling arrays of chrominance values (U and V). RGB format pictures can be converted or transformed into YUV format and vice versa, this process is also called color transformation or conversion. If the picture is black and white, the picture may include only the brightness sampling array.
  • the picture transmitted from the picture source 16 to the picture processor may also be referred to as original picture data 17.
  • the picture pre-processor 18 is configured to receive the original picture data 17 and perform pre-processing on the original picture data 17 to obtain the pre-processed picture 19 or the pre-processed picture data 19.
  • the pre-processing performed by the picture pre-processor 18 may include trimming, color format conversion (eg, conversion from RGB format to YUV format), color grading, or denoising.
  • the encoder 20 (or video encoder 20) is used to receive the pre-processed picture data 19, and process the pre-processed picture data 19 in a related prediction mode (such as the prediction mode in various embodiments herein), thereby
  • the encoded picture data 21 is provided (the structural details of the encoder 20 will be further described below based on FIG. 2 or FIG. 4 or FIG. 5).
  • the encoder 20 may be used to execute various embodiments described below to implement the application of the division method described in this application on the encoding side.
  • the communication interface 22 can be used to receive the encoded picture data 21, and can transmit the encoded picture data 21 to the destination device 14 or any other device (such as a memory) via the link 13 for storage or direct reconstruction.
  • the other device may be any device used for decoding or storage.
  • the communication interface 22 may be used, for example, to encapsulate the encoded picture data 21 into a suitable format, such as a data packet, for transmission on the link 13.
  • the destination device 14 includes a decoder 30, and optionally, the destination device 14 may further include a communication interface 28, a post-picture processor 32, and a display device 34. They are described as follows:
  • the communication interface 28 may be used to receive the encoded picture data 21 from the source device 12 or any other source, such as a storage device, such as an encoded picture data storage device.
  • the communication interface 28 can be used to transmit or receive the encoded picture data 21 through the link 13 between the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or through any type of network.
  • the link 13 is, for example, a direct wired or wireless connection.
  • a network of a category is, for example, a wired or wireless network or any combination thereof, or a private network and a public network of any category, or any combination thereof.
  • the communication interface 28 may be used, for example, to decapsulate the data packet transmitted by the communication interface 22 to obtain the encoded picture data 21.
  • Both the communication interface 28 and the communication interface 22 may be configured as a one-way communication interface or a two-way communication interface, and may be used, for example, to send and receive messages to establish a connection, confirm and exchange any other communication link and/or for example encoded picture data Information about data transmission.
  • the decoder 30 (or referred to as the decoder 30) is used to receive the encoded picture data 21 and provide the decoded picture data 31 or the decoded picture 31 (hereinafter, the decoder 30 will be further described based on FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 Structural details). In some embodiments, the decoder 30 may be used to execute various embodiments described below to implement the application of the division method described in this application on the decoding side.
  • the post-picture processor 32 is configured to perform post-processing on the decoded picture data 31 (also referred to as reconstructed picture data) to obtain post-processed picture data 33.
  • the post-processing performed by the image post-processor 32 may include: color format conversion (for example, conversion from YUV format to RGB format), color adjustment, retouching or resampling, or any other processing, and may also be used to convert the post-processed image data 33transmitted to the display device 34.
  • the display device 34 is used to receive post-processed picture data 33 to display pictures to, for example, a user or a viewer.
  • the display device 34 may be or may include any type of display for presenting reconstructed pictures, for example, an integrated or external display or monitor.
  • the display may include a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, a plasma display, a projector, a micro LED display, a liquid crystal on silicon (LCoS), Digital light processor (digital light processor, DLP) or any other type of display.
  • FIG. 1A illustrates the source device 12 and the destination device 14 as separate devices
  • device embodiments may also include the functionality of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or both, ie, the source device 12 or The corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality.
  • the same hardware and/or software may be used, or separate hardware and/or software, or any combination thereof may be used to implement the source device 12 or corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality .
  • Source device 12 and destination device 14 may include any of a variety of devices, including any type of handheld or stationary devices, such as notebook or laptop computers, mobile phones, smartphones, tablets or tablet computers, cameras, desktops Computers, set-top boxes, televisions, cameras, in-vehicle devices, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, video streaming devices (such as content service servers or content distribution servers), broadcast receiver devices, broadcast transmitter devices And so on, and can not use or use any kind of operating system.
  • handheld or stationary devices such as notebook or laptop computers, mobile phones, smartphones, tablets or tablet computers, cameras, desktops Computers, set-top boxes, televisions, cameras, in-vehicle devices, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, video streaming devices (such as content service servers or content distribution servers), broadcast receiver devices, broadcast transmitter devices And so on, and can not use or use any kind of operating system.
  • Both the encoder 20 and the decoder 30 can be implemented as any of various suitable circuits, for example, one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application-specific integrated circuits (application-specific integrated circuits) circuit, ASIC), field-programmable gate array (FPGA), discrete logic, hardware, or any combination thereof.
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuits
  • FPGA field-programmable gate array
  • the device may store the instructions of the software in a suitable non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, and may use one or more processors to execute the instructions in hardware to perform the techniques of the present disclosure . Any one of the foregoing (including hardware, software, a combination of hardware and software, etc.) may be regarded as one or more processors.
  • the video encoding and decoding system 10 shown in FIG. 1A is only an example, and the technology of the present application may be applied to video encoding settings that do not necessarily include any data communication between encoding and decoding devices (eg, video encoding or video decoding).
  • data can be retrieved from local storage, streamed on the network, and so on.
  • the video encoding device may encode the data and store the data to the memory, and/or the video decoding device may retrieve the data from the memory and decode the data.
  • encoding and decoding are performed by devices that do not communicate with each other but only encode data to and/or retrieve data from memory and decode the data.
  • FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram of an example of a video coding system 40 including the encoder 20 of FIG. 2 and/or the decoder 30 of FIG. 3, according to an exemplary embodiment.
  • the video decoding system 40 can implement a combination of various technologies in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the video decoding system 40 may include an imaging device 41, an encoder 20, a decoder 30 (and/or a video encoder/decoder implemented by the logic circuit of the processing unit 46), an antenna 42, One or more processors 43, one or more memories 44, and/or display devices 45.
  • the imaging device 41, the antenna 42, the processing unit 46, the encoder 20, the decoder 30, the processor 43, the memory 44, and/or the display device 45 can communicate with each other.
  • the video coding system 40 is shown with the encoder 20 and the decoder 30, in different examples, the video coding system 40 may include only the encoder 20 or only the decoder 30.
  • antenna 42 may be used to transmit or receive an encoded bitstream of video data.
  • the display device 45 may be used to present video data.
  • the logic circuit may be implemented by the processing unit 46.
  • the processing unit 46 may include application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like.
  • the video decoding system 40 may also include an optional processor 43, which may similarly include ASIC logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like.
  • the logic circuit may be implemented by hardware, such as dedicated hardware for video encoding, etc., and the processor 43 may be implemented by general-purpose software, an operating system, or the like.
  • the memory 44 may be any type of memory, such as volatile memory (for example, static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), etc.) or nonvolatile memory Memory (for example, flash memory, etc.), etc.
  • volatile memory for example, static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), etc.
  • nonvolatile memory Memory for example, flash memory, etc.
  • the memory 44 may be implemented by cache memory.
  • the logic circuit can access the memory 44 (eg, for implementing the image buffer).
  • the logic circuit and/or processing unit 46 may include memory (eg, cache, etc.) for implementing image buffers and the like.
  • the encoder 20 implemented by logic circuits may include an image buffer (eg, implemented by the processing unit 46 or the memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (eg, implemented by the processing unit 46).
  • the graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer.
  • the graphics processing unit may include an encoder 20 implemented by logic circuits to implement the various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 2 and/or any other encoder system or subsystem described herein. Logic circuits can be used to perform the various operations discussed herein.
  • decoder 30 may be implemented by logic circuits in a similar manner to implement the various modules discussed with reference to decoder 30 of FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder systems or subsystems described herein.
  • the decoder 30 implemented by the logic circuit may include an image buffer (implemented by the processing unit or the memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (for example, implemented by the processing unit 46).
  • the graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer.
  • the graphics processing unit may include a decoder 30 implemented by logic circuits to implement the various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder systems or subsystems described herein.
  • antenna 42 may be used to receive an encoded bitstream of video data.
  • the encoded bitstream may include data related to encoded video frames, indicators, index values, mode selection data, etc. discussed herein, such as data related to encoding partitions (eg, transform coefficients or quantized transform coefficients , (As discussed) an optional indicator, and/or data defining the encoding division).
  • the video coding system 40 may also include a decoder 30 coupled to the antenna 42 and used to decode the encoded bitstream.
  • the display device 45 is used to present video frames.
  • the decoder 30 may be used to perform the reverse process.
  • the decoder 30 may be used to receive and parse such syntax elements and decode the relevant video data accordingly.
  • encoder 20 may entropy encode syntax elements into an encoded video bitstream. In such instances, decoder 30 may parse such syntax elements and decode the relevant video data accordingly.
  • the decoding method described in the embodiment of the present application is mainly used in a decoding process, and this process exists in both the encoder 20 and the decoder 30.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of an encoder 20 for implementing an embodiment of the present application.
  • the encoder 20 includes a residual calculation unit 204, a transform processing unit 206, a quantization unit 208, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transform processing unit 212, a reconstruction unit 214, a buffer 216, a loop filter Unit 220, decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230, prediction processing unit 260, and entropy encoding unit 270.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 may include an inter prediction unit 244, an intra prediction unit 254, and a mode selection unit 262.
  • the inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation unit and a motion compensation unit (not shown).
  • the encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 may also be referred to as a hybrid video encoder or a video encoder based on a hybrid video codec.
  • the residual calculation unit 204, the transform processing unit 206, the quantization unit 208, the prediction processing unit 260, and the entropy encoding unit 270 form the forward signal path of the encoder 20, while the inverse quantization unit 210, the inverse transform processing unit 212, and the The construction unit 214, the buffer 216, the loop filter 220, the DPB 230, and the prediction processing unit 260 form the backward signal path of the encoder, where the backward signal path of the encoder corresponds to the signal path of the decoder (see FIG. 3). Decoder 30).
  • the encoder 20 receives a picture 201 or an image block 203 of the picture 201 through, for example, an input 202, for example, forming a picture in a picture sequence of a video or a video sequence.
  • the image block 203 may also be called a current picture block or a picture block to be encoded
  • the picture 201 may be called a current picture or a picture to be encoded (especially when the current picture is distinguished from other pictures in video encoding, the other pictures are the same video sequence That is, the previously encoded and/or decoded pictures in the video sequence of the current picture are also included).
  • An embodiment of the encoder 20 may include a division unit (not shown in FIG. 2) for dividing the picture 201 into a plurality of blocks such as image blocks 203, usually into a plurality of non-overlapping blocks.
  • the division unit can be used to use the same block size for all pictures in the video sequence and a corresponding grid that defines the block size, or to change the block size between pictures or subsets or picture groups, and divide each picture into The corresponding block.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 of the encoder 20 may be used to perform any combination of the above division techniques.
  • image block 203 is also or can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of sampling points with sample values, although its size is smaller than picture 201.
  • the image block 203 may include, for example, one sampling array (for example, the brightness array in the case of black and white picture 201) or three sampling arrays (for example, one brightness array and two chroma arrays in the case of color picture) or An array of any other number and/or category depending on the color format applied.
  • the number of sampling points in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the image block 203 defines the size of the image block 203.
  • the encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 is used to encode the picture 201 block by block, for example, to perform encoding and prediction on each image block 203.
  • the residual calculation unit 204 is used to calculate the residual block 205 based on the picture image block 203 and the prediction block 265 (other details of the prediction block 265 are provided below), for example, by subtracting the sample value of the picture image block 203 sample by sample (pixel by pixel) The sample values of the block 265 are depredicted to obtain the residual block 205 in the sample domain.
  • the transform processing unit 206 is used to apply a transform such as discrete cosine transform (DCT) or discrete sine transform (DST) on the sample values of the residual block 205 to obtain transform coefficients 207 in the transform domain .
  • the transform coefficient 207 may also be called a transform residual coefficient, and represents a residual block 205 in the transform domain.
  • the transform processing unit 206 may be used to apply integer approximations of DCT/DST, such as the transform specified by AVS, AVS2, and AVS3. Compared with the orthogonal DCT transform, this integer approximation is usually scaled by a factor. In order to maintain the norm of the residual block processed by the forward and inverse transform, an additional scaling factor is applied as part of the transform process.
  • the scaling factor is usually selected based on certain constraints. For example, the scaling factor is a power of two used for the shift operation, the bit depth of the transform coefficient, the accuracy, and the trade-off between implementation cost, and so on.
  • a specific scaling factor can be specified for the inverse transform by the inverse transform processing unit 212 on the decoder 30 side (and corresponding inverse transform by the inverse transform processing unit 212 on the encoder 20 side), and accordingly, the encoder can be The 20 side specifies a corresponding scaling factor for the positive transform through the transform processing unit 206.
  • the quantization unit 208 is used to quantize the transform coefficient 207 by, for example, applying scalar quantization or vector quantization to obtain the quantized transform coefficient 209.
  • the quantized transform coefficient 209 may also be referred to as a quantized residual coefficient 209.
  • the quantization process can reduce the bit depth associated with some or all of the transform coefficients 207. For example, n-bit transform coefficients can be rounded down to m-bit transform coefficients during quantization, where n is greater than m.
  • the degree of quantization can be modified by adjusting quantization parameters (QP). For example, for scalar quantization, different scales can be applied to achieve thinner or coarser quantization.
  • QP quantization parameters
  • a smaller quantization step size corresponds to a finer quantization
  • a larger quantization step size corresponds to a coarser quantization.
  • the appropriate quantization step size can be indicated by QP.
  • the quantization parameter may be an index of a predefined set of suitable quantization steps.
  • smaller quantization parameters may correspond to fine quantization (smaller quantization step size)
  • larger quantization parameters may correspond to coarse quantization (larger quantization step size)
  • the quantization may include dividing by the quantization step size and the corresponding quantization or inverse quantization performed by, for example, inverse quantization 210, or may include multiplying the quantization step size.
  • quantization parameters may be used to determine the quantization step size.
  • the quantization step size can be calculated based on the quantization parameter using a fixed-point approximation including an equation of division. Additional scaling factors can be introduced for quantization and inverse quantization to restore the norm of the residual block that may be modified due to the scale used in the fixed-point approximation of the equations for quantization step size and quantization parameter.
  • the scale of inverse transform and inverse quantization may be combined.
  • a custom quantization table can be used and signaled from the encoder to the decoder in the bitstream, for example. Quantization is a lossy operation, where the larger the quantization step, the greater the loss.
  • the inverse quantization unit 210 is used to apply the inverse quantization of the quantization unit 208 on the quantized coefficients to obtain the inverse quantization coefficients 211, for example, based on or using the same quantization step size as the quantization unit 208, apply the quantization scheme applied by the quantization unit 208 Inverse quantization scheme.
  • the inverse quantized coefficient 211 may also be referred to as an inverse quantized residual coefficient 211, which corresponds to the transform coefficient 207, although the loss due to quantization is usually not the same as the transform coefficient.
  • the inverse transform processing unit 212 is used to apply the inverse transform of the transform applied by the transform processing unit 206, for example, inverse DCT or inverse DST, to obtain the inverse transform block 213 in the sample domain.
  • the inverse transform block 213 may also be referred to as an inverse transform dequantized block 213 or an inverse transform residual block 213.
  • the reconstruction unit 214 (eg, summer 214) is used to add the inverse transform block 213 (ie, the reconstructed residual block 213) to the prediction block 265 to obtain the reconstructed block 215 in the sample domain, for example, The sample values of the reconstructed residual block 213 and the sample values of the prediction block 265 are added.
  • a buffer unit 216 (or simply "buffer" 216), such as a line buffer 216, is used to buffer or store the reconstructed block 215 and corresponding sample values for, for example, intra prediction.
  • the encoder may be used to use the unfiltered reconstructed blocks and/or corresponding sample values stored in the buffer unit 216 for any type of estimation and/or prediction, such as intra prediction.
  • an embodiment of the encoder 20 may be configured such that the buffer unit 216 is used not only to store the reconstructed block 215 for intra prediction 254, but also for the loop filter unit 220 (not shown in FIG. 2) Out), and/or, for example, causing the buffer unit 216 and the decoded picture buffer unit 230 to form a buffer.
  • Other embodiments may be used to use the filtered block 221 and/or blocks or samples from the decoded picture buffer 230 (neither shown in FIG. 2) as an input or basis for intra prediction 254.
  • the loop filter unit 220 (or simply "loop filter” 220) is used to filter the reconstructed block 215 to obtain the filtered block 221, so as to smoothly perform pixel conversion or improve video quality.
  • the loop filter unit 220 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as deblocking filters, sample-adaptive offset (SAO) filters, or other filters, such as bilateral filters, Adaptive loop filter (adaptive loop filter, ALF), or sharpening or smoothing filter, or collaborative filter.
  • the loop filter unit 220 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 2, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 220 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.
  • the filtered block 221 may also be referred to as the filtered reconstructed block 221.
  • the decoded picture buffer 230 may store the reconstructed encoding block after the loop filter unit 220 performs a filtering operation on the reconstructed encoding block.
  • Embodiments of the encoder 20 may be used to output loop filter parameters (eg, sample adaptive offset information), for example, directly output or by the entropy encoding unit 270 or any other
  • the entropy encoding unit outputs after entropy encoding, for example, so that the decoder 30 can receive and apply the same loop filter parameters for decoding.
  • the decoded picture buffer (decoded picture buffer, DPB) 230 may be a reference picture memory for storing reference picture data for the encoder 20 to encode video data.
  • DPB 230 can be formed by any of a variety of memory devices, such as dynamic random access memory (dynamic random access memory (DRAM) (including synchronous DRAM (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), magnetoresistive RAM (magnetoresistive RAM, MRAM), resistive RAM (resistive RAM, RRAM)) or other types of memory devices.
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • the DPB 230 and the buffer 216 may be provided by the same memory device or separate memory devices.
  • a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 is used to store the filtered block 221.
  • the decoded picture buffer 230 may be further used to store other previous filtered blocks of the same current picture or different pictures such as previous reconstructed pictures, such as the previously reconstructed and filtered block 221, and may provide the complete previous The reconstructed ie decoded pictures (and corresponding reference blocks and samples) and/or partially reconstructed current pictures (and corresponding reference blocks and samples), for example for inter prediction.
  • a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 is used to store the reconstructed block 215.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 also known as the block prediction processing unit 260, is used to receive or acquire the image block 203 (current image block 203 of the current picture 201) and reconstructed picture data, such as the same (current) picture from the buffer 216 Reference samples and/or reference picture data 231 of one or more previously decoded pictures from the decoded picture buffer 230, and used to process such data for prediction, that is, to provide an inter prediction block 245 or The prediction block 265 of the intra prediction block 255.
  • the mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (eg, intra or inter prediction mode) and/or the corresponding prediction block 245 or 255 used as the prediction block 265 to calculate the residual block 205 and reconstruct the reconstructed block 215.
  • a prediction mode eg, intra or inter prediction mode
  • the corresponding prediction block 245 or 255 used as the prediction block 265 to calculate the residual block 205 and reconstruct the reconstructed block 215.
  • An embodiment of the mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (for example, from those prediction modes supported by the prediction processing unit 260), which provides the best match or the minimum residual (the minimum residual means Better compression in transmission or storage), or provide minimum signaling overhead (minimum signaling overhead means better compression in transmission or storage), or consider or balance both at the same time.
  • the mode selection unit 262 may be used to determine a prediction mode based on rate distortion optimization (RDO), that is, to select a prediction mode that provides minimum bit rate distortion optimization, or to select a prediction mode in which the related bit rate distortion at least meets the prediction mode selection criteria .
  • RDO rate distortion optimization
  • the encoder 20 is used to determine or select the best or optimal prediction mode from the (predetermined) prediction mode set.
  • the set of prediction modes may include, for example, intra prediction modes and/or inter prediction modes.
  • the intra prediction mode set may include 35 different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in H.265, or may include 67 Different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in the developing H.266.
  • non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode
  • directional modes as defined in the developing H.266.
  • the set of inter prediction modes depends on the available reference pictures (ie, for example, the aforementioned at least partially decoded pictures stored in DBP 230) and other inter prediction parameters, for example, depending on whether the entire reference picture is used or only Use a part of the reference picture, for example the search window area surrounding the area of the current block, to search for the best matching reference block, and/or for example depending on whether pixel interpolation such as half-pixel and/or quarter-pixel interpolation is applied
  • the set of inter prediction modes may include advanced motion vector (advanced motion vector prediction, AMVP) mode and merge mode.
  • AMVP advanced motion vector
  • the set of inter prediction modes may include an improved control point-based AMVP mode according to an embodiment of the present application, and an improved control point-based merge mode.
  • the intra prediction unit 254 may be used to perform any combination of inter prediction techniques described below.
  • the embodiments of the present application may also apply skip mode and/or direct mode.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 may be further used to divide the image block 203 into smaller block partitions or sub-blocks, for example, by iteratively using quad-tree (QT) division, binary-tree (BT) division Or triple-tree (TT) or extended quad-tree (ie EQT) partitioning, or any combination thereof, and for performing predictions for each of block partitions or sub-blocks, for example, where mode selection includes selection of partitioned
  • QT quad-tree
  • BT binary-tree
  • TT triple-tree
  • ie EQT extended quad-tree partitioning
  • the inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation (ME) unit (not shown in FIG. 2) and a motion compensation (MC) unit (not shown in FIG. 2).
  • the motion estimation unit is used to receive or acquire a picture image block 203 (current picture image block 203 of the current picture 201) and a decoded picture 231, or at least one or more previously reconstructed blocks, for example, one or more other/different
  • the reconstructed block of the previously decoded picture 231 is used for motion estimation.
  • the video sequence may include the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31, or in other words, the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31 may be part of the picture sequence forming the video sequence, or form the picture sequence.
  • the encoder 20 may be used to select a reference block from multiple reference blocks of the same or different pictures in multiple other pictures, and provide a reference picture and/or provide a reference to a motion estimation unit (not shown in FIG. 2)
  • the offset (spatial offset) between the position of the block (X, Y coordinates) and the position of the current block is used as an inter prediction parameter.
  • This offset is also called a motion vector (MV).
  • the motion compensation unit is used to acquire inter prediction parameters, and perform inter prediction based on or using inter prediction parameters to obtain inter prediction blocks 245.
  • the motion compensation performed by the motion compensation unit may include extracting or generating a prediction block based on a motion/block vector determined by motion estimation (possibly performing interpolation of sub-pixel accuracy). Interpolation filtering can generate additional pixel samples from known pixel samples, potentially increasing the number of candidate prediction blocks that can be used to encode picture blocks.
  • the motion compensation unit 246 may locate the prediction block pointed to by the motion vector in a reference picture list. Motion compensation unit 246 may also generate syntax elements associated with blocks and video slices for use by decoder 30 when decoding picture blocks of video slices.
  • the above inter prediction unit 244 may transmit a syntax element to the entropy encoding unit 270, where the syntax element includes inter prediction parameters (such as an inter prediction mode selected for the current block prediction after traversing multiple inter prediction modes Instructions).
  • inter prediction parameters such as an inter prediction mode selected for the current block prediction after traversing multiple inter prediction modes Instructions.
  • the decoding terminal 30 may directly use the default prediction mode for decoding. It can be understood that the inter prediction unit 244 may be used to perform any combination of inter prediction techniques.
  • the intra prediction unit 254 is used to acquire, for example, a picture block 203 (current picture block) that receives the same picture and one or more previously reconstructed blocks, such as reconstructed neighboring blocks, for intra estimation.
  • the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra prediction mode from a plurality of (predetermined) intra prediction modes.
  • Embodiments of the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra prediction mode based on optimization criteria, for example, based on a minimum residual (eg, an intra prediction mode that provides the prediction block 255 most similar to the current picture block 203) or minimum rate distortion.
  • a minimum residual eg, an intra prediction mode that provides the prediction block 255 most similar to the current picture block 203
  • minimum rate distortion e.g., a minimum rate distortion
  • the intra prediction unit 254 is further used to determine the intra prediction block 255 based on the intra prediction parameters of the intra prediction mode as selected. In any case, after selecting the intra-prediction mode for the block, the intra-prediction unit 254 is also used to provide the intra-prediction parameters to the entropy encoding unit 270, that is, to provide an indication of the selected intra-prediction mode for the block Information. In one example, the intra prediction unit 254 may be used to perform any combination of intra prediction techniques.
  • the above-mentioned intra-prediction unit 254 may transmit a syntax element to the entropy encoding unit 270, where the syntax element includes intra-prediction parameters (such as an intra-prediction mode selected for the current block prediction after traversing multiple intra-prediction modes) Instructions).
  • the intra prediction parameters may not be carried in the syntax element.
  • the decoding terminal 30 may directly use the default prediction mode for decoding.
  • the entropy coding unit 270 is used to entropy coding algorithms or schemes (for example, variable length coding (VLC) scheme, context adaptive VLC (context adaptive VLC, CAVLC) scheme, arithmetic coding scheme, context adaptive binary arithmetic Coding (context adaptive) binary arithmetic coding (CABAC), syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding (SBAC), probability interval entropy (probability interval interpartitioning entropy, PIPE) coding or other entropy Coding method or technique) applied to a single or all of the quantized residual coefficients 209, inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters, and/or loop filter parameters (or not applied) to obtain the output 272 to For example, the encoded picture data 21 output in the form of an encoded bit stream 21.
  • VLC variable length coding
  • CABAC context adaptive binary arithmetic Coding
  • SBAC syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding
  • the encoded bitstream may be transmitted to the video decoder 30 or archived for later transmission or retrieval by the video decoder 30.
  • the entropy encoding unit 270 may also be used to entropy encode other syntax elements of the current video slice being encoded.
  • video encoder 20 may be used to encode video streams.
  • the non-transform based encoder 20 may directly quantize the residual signal without the transform processing unit 206 for certain blocks or frames.
  • the encoder 20 may have a quantization unit 208 and an inverse quantization unit 210 combined into a single unit.
  • the encoder 20 may be used to implement the encoding method described in the following embodiments.
  • the video encoder 20 can directly quantize the residual signal without processing by the transform processing unit 206, and accordingly, without processing by the inverse transform processing unit 212; or, for some For image blocks or image frames, the video encoder 20 does not generate residual data, and accordingly does not need to be processed by the transform processing unit 206, quantization unit 208, inverse quantization unit 210, and inverse transform processing unit 212; or, the video encoder 20 may convert The reconstructed image block is directly stored as a reference block without being processed by the filter 220; alternatively, the quantization unit 208 and the inverse quantization unit 210 in the video encoder 20 may be merged together.
  • the loop filter 220 is optional, and in the case of lossless compression coding, the transform processing unit 206, quantization unit 208, inverse quantization unit 210, and inverse transform processing unit 212 are optional. It should be understood that the inter prediction unit 244 and the intra prediction unit 254 may be selectively enabled according to different application scenarios.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of a decoder 30 for implementing an embodiment of the present application.
  • the video decoder 30 is used to receive encoded picture data (eg, encoded bitstream) 21, for example, encoded by the encoder 20, to obtain the decoded picture 231.
  • encoded picture data eg, encoded bitstream
  • video decoder 30 receives video data from video encoder 20, such as an encoded video bitstream and associated syntax elements representing picture blocks of the encoded video slice.
  • the decoder 30 includes an entropy decoding unit 304, an inverse quantization unit 310, an inverse transform processing unit 312, a reconstruction unit 314 (such as a summer 314), a buffer 316, a loop filter 320, a The decoded picture buffer 330 and the prediction processing unit 360.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344, an intra prediction unit 354, and a mode selection unit 362.
  • video decoder 30 may perform a decoding pass that is generally inverse to the encoding pass described with reference to video encoder 20 of FIG. 2.
  • the entropy decoding unit 304 is used to perform entropy decoding on the encoded picture data 21 to obtain, for example, quantized coefficients 309 and/or decoded encoding parameters (not shown in FIG. 3), for example, inter prediction, intra prediction parameters , Any or all of the loop filter parameters and/or other syntax elements (decoded).
  • the entropy decoding unit 304 is further used to forward inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters, and/or other syntax elements to the prediction processing unit 360.
  • Video decoder 30 may receive syntax elements at the video slice level and/or the video block level.
  • the inverse quantization unit 310 may be functionally the same as the inverse quantization unit 110
  • the inverse transform processing unit 312 may be functionally the same as the inverse transform processing unit 212
  • the reconstruction unit 314 may be functionally the same as the reconstruction unit 214
  • the buffer 316 may be functionally
  • the loop filter 320 may be functionally the same as the loop filter 220
  • the decoded picture buffer 330 may be functionally the same as the decoded picture buffer 230.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344 and an intra prediction unit 354, wherein the inter prediction unit 344 may be similar in function to the inter prediction unit 244, and the intra prediction unit 354 may be similar in function to the intra prediction unit 254 .
  • the prediction processing unit 360 is generally used to perform block prediction and/or obtain the prediction block 365 from the encoded data 21, and receive or obtain prediction-related parameters and/or information about the entropy decoding unit 304 (explicitly or implicitly). Information about the selected prediction mode.
  • the intra prediction unit 354 of the prediction processing unit 360 is used to signal-based the intra prediction mode and the previous decoded block from the current frame or picture. Data to generate a prediction block 365 for the picture block of the current video slice.
  • the inter prediction unit 344 eg, motion compensation unit
  • Other syntax elements generate a prediction block 365 for the video block of the current video slice.
  • a prediction block may be generated from a reference picture in a reference picture list.
  • the video decoder 30 may construct the reference frame lists: list 0 and list 1 based on the reference pictures stored in the DPB 330 using default construction techniques.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 is used to determine the prediction information for the video block of the current video slice by parsing the motion vector and other syntax elements, and use the prediction information to generate the prediction block for the current video block being decoded.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 uses some received syntax elements to determine the prediction mode (eg, intra or inter prediction) of the video block used to encode the video slice, and the inter prediction slice type ( For example, B slice, P slice, or GPB slice), construction information for one or more of the reference picture lists for slices, motion vectors for each inter-coded video block for slices, The inter prediction status and other information of each inter-coded video block of the slice to decode the video block of the current video slice.
  • the prediction mode eg, intra or inter prediction
  • the inter prediction slice type For example, B slice, P slice, or GPB slice
  • the syntax elements received by the video decoder 30 from the bitstream include an adaptive parameter set (adaptive parameter set, APS), a sequence parameter set (SPS), and a picture parameter set (picture parameter (set, PPS) or the syntax element in one or more of the stripe headers.
  • an adaptive parameter set adaptive parameter set
  • SPS sequence parameter set
  • PPS picture parameter set
  • the inverse quantization unit 310 may be used to inverse quantize (ie, inverse quantize) the quantized transform coefficients provided in the bitstream and decoded by the entropy decoding unit 304.
  • the inverse quantization process may include using the quantization parameters calculated by the video encoder 20 for each video block in the video slice to determine the degree of quantization that should be applied and also determine the degree of inverse quantization that should be applied.
  • the inverse transform processing unit 312 is used to apply an inverse transform (eg, inverse DCT, inverse integer transform, or conceptually similar inverse transform process) to the transform coefficients, so as to generate a residual block in the pixel domain.
  • an inverse transform eg, inverse DCT, inverse integer transform, or conceptually similar inverse transform process
  • the reconstruction unit 314 (eg, summer 314) is used to add the inverse transform block 313 (ie, the reconstructed residual block 313) to the prediction block 365 to obtain the reconstructed block 315 in the sample domain, for example by The sample values of the reconstructed residual block 313 are added to the sample values of the prediction block 365.
  • the loop filter unit 320 (during the encoding loop or after the encoding loop) is used to filter the reconstructed block 315 to obtain the filtered block 321 to smoothly perform pixel conversion or improve video quality.
  • the loop filter unit 320 may be used to perform any combination of filtering techniques described below.
  • the loop filter unit 320 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as deblocking filters, SAO filters, or other filters, such as bilateral filters, ALF, or sharpening or smoothing filters, or collaborative filtering Device.
  • the loop filter unit 320 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 3, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 320 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.
  • the decoded video block 321 in a given frame or picture is then stored in a decoded picture buffer 330 that stores reference pictures for subsequent motion compensation.
  • the decoder 30 is used, for example, to output the decoded picture 31 through the output 332 for presentation to the user or for the user to view.
  • video decoder 30 may be used to decode the compressed bitstream.
  • the decoder 30 may generate the output video stream without the loop filter unit 320.
  • the non-transform based decoder 30 may directly inversely quantize the residual signal without the inverse transform processing unit 312 for certain blocks or frames.
  • the video decoder 30 may have an inverse quantization unit 310 and an inverse transform processing unit 312 combined into a single unit.
  • the decoder 30 is used to implement the decoding method described in the embodiment below.
  • video decoder 30 may be used to decode the encoded video bitstream.
  • the video decoder 30 may generate an output video stream without processing by the filter 320; or, for certain image blocks or image frames, the entropy decoding unit 304 of the video decoder 30 does not decode the quantized coefficients, and accordingly does not It needs to be processed by the inverse quantization unit 310 and the inverse transform processing unit 312.
  • the loop filter 320 is optional; and in the case of lossless compression, the inverse quantization unit 310 and the inverse transform processing unit 312 are optional.
  • the inter prediction unit and the intra prediction unit may be selectively enabled.
  • the processing results for a certain link can be further processed and output to the next link, for example, in interpolation filtering, motion vector derivation or loop filtering, etc. After the link, the results of the corresponding link are further clipped or shift shifted.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a video decoding device 400 (for example, a video encoding device 400 or a video decoding device 400) provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the video coding apparatus 400 is suitable for implementing the embodiments described herein.
  • the video coding device 400 may be a video decoder (eg, decoder 30 of FIG. 1A) or a video encoder (eg, encoder 20 of FIG. 1A).
  • the video decoding device 400 may be one or more components in the decoder 30 of FIG. 1A or the encoder 20 of FIG. 1A described above.
  • the video decoding device 400 includes: an inlet port 410 for receiving data and a receiver unit (Rx) 420, a processor for processing data, a logic unit or a central processing unit (CPU) 430, and a transmitter for transmitting data A unit (Tx) 440 and an exit port 450, and a memory 460 for storing data.
  • the video decoding device 400 may further include a photoelectric conversion component and an electro-optical (EO) component coupled to the inlet port 410, the receiver unit 420, the transmitter unit 440, and the outlet port 450 for the outlet or inlet of the optical signal or the electrical signal.
  • EO electro-optical
  • the processor 430 is implemented by hardware and software.
  • the processor 430 may be implemented as one or more CPU chips, cores (eg, multi-core processors), FPGA, ASIC, and DSP.
  • the processor 430 communicates with the inlet port 410, the receiver unit 420, the transmitter unit 440, the outlet port 450, and the memory 460.
  • the processor 430 includes a decoding module 470 (for example, an encoding module 470 or a decoding module 470).
  • the encoding/decoding module 470 implements the embodiments disclosed herein to implement the division method provided by the embodiments of the present application. For example, the encoding/decoding module 470 implements, processes, or provides various encoding operations.
  • the encoding/decoding module 470 provides a substantial improvement to the function of the video decoding device 400 and affects the conversion of the video decoding device 400 to different states.
  • the encoding/decoding module 470 is implemented with instructions stored in the memory 460 and executed by the processor 430.
  • the memory 460 includes one or more magnetic disks, tape drives, and solid-state hard disks, and can be used as an overflow data storage device for storing programs when these programs are selectively executed, as well as instructions and data read during program execution.
  • the memory 460 may be volatile and/or non-volatile, and may be read only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), random access memory (ternary content-addressable memory (TCAM), and/or static Random Access Memory (SRAM).
  • FIG. 5 is a simplified block diagram of an apparatus 500 that can be used as either or both of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 in FIG. 1A according to an exemplary embodiment.
  • the device 500 can implement the technology of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram of an implementation manner of an encoding device or a decoding device (referred to simply as a decoding device 500) according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the decoding device 500 may include a processor 510, a memory 530, and a bus system 550.
  • the processor and the memory are connected through a bus system, the memory is used to store instructions, and the processor is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory.
  • the memory of the decoding device stores the program code, and the processor can call the program code stored in the memory to perform various video encoding or decoding methods described in this application, especially various new decoding methods. In order to avoid repetition, they are not described in detail here.
  • the processor 510 may be a central processing unit (CPU), and the processor 510 may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), or off-the-shelf.
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • FPGA Programmable gate array
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory 530 may include a ROM device or a RAM device. Any other suitable type of storage device may also be used as the memory 530.
  • the memory 530 may include code and data 531 accessed by the processor 510 using the bus 550.
  • the memory 530 may further include an operating system 533 and an application program 535 including at least one program that allows the processor 510 to perform the video encoding or decoding method described in the present application (in particular, the decoding method described in the present application).
  • the application program 535 may include applications 1 to N, which further include a video encoding or decoding application (referred to as a video coding application for short) that performs the video encoding or decoding method described in this application.
  • the bus system 550 may also include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus. However, for clarity, various buses are marked as the bus system 550 in the figure.
  • the decoding device 500 may also include one or more output devices, such as a display 570.
  • the display 570 may be a tactile display that merges the display with a tactile unit that operably senses touch input.
  • the display 570 may be connected to the processor 510 via the bus 550.
  • CTU An image consists of multiple CTUs.
  • a CTU usually corresponds to a square image area.
  • a CTU contains the luminance pixels and chrominance pixels in this image area, or only the luminance pixels or only the chrominance pixels.
  • the size of the CTU can be set to 64 ⁇ 64, of course, it can also be set to other values, such as 128 ⁇ 128 or 256 ⁇ 256.
  • the 64 ⁇ 64 CTU is a rectangular pixel lattice containing 64 columns, and each column contains 64 pixels. The explanation of CTUs of other sizes is similar to this and will not be repeated here.
  • the CTU may correspond to some syntax elements, which are used to indicate how to divide the CTU into at least one CU, and information used to decode each CU to obtain a reconstructed image.
  • CU usually corresponds to an A ⁇ B rectangular area, containing A ⁇ B luma pixels and its corresponding chroma pixels. Among them, A is the width of the rectangle, B is the height of the rectangle, A and B may be the same or different. The value of A and B is usually an integer power of 2, for example, 128, 64, 32, 16, 8, 4, etc.
  • a CU can obtain a reconstructed image of an A ⁇ B rectangular area through the decoding process.
  • the decoding process usually includes prediction, inverse quantization, and inverse transform.
  • the division method can be characterized by the division type and division direction.
  • the division type may be a binary tree division type or an extended quadtree division type.
  • the dividing direction may be a vertical direction or a horizontal direction.
  • the horizontal direction is the direction perpendicular to the side where the height of the current image block is located.
  • the vertical direction is the direction perpendicular to the side where the width of the current image block is located.
  • the division mode may be a horizontal binary tree division mode, a vertical binary tree division mode, a horizontally expanded quadtree division mode, or a vertically extended quadtree division mode.
  • the division mode may also be characterized by only the division type, for example, the quadtree division mode has the same meaning as the quadtree division type.
  • BT Binary Tree
  • the method of dividing a node into two nodes includes a horizontal binary tree division method and a vertical binary tree division method.
  • the horizontal binary tree division method is specifically: the area corresponding to the node is divided into upper and lower areas of the same size, and each area corresponds to a node, as shown in (a) in FIG. 6.
  • the vertical binary tree division method is specifically as follows: the area corresponding to the node is divided into left and right areas of the same size, and each area corresponds to a node, as shown in (b) in FIG. 6.
  • QT Quad Tree
  • the AVS video standard uses the CTU division method based on the quadtree. Specifically, the CTU is used as the root node, and each node corresponds to a square area; a node can no longer be divided (in this case, the corresponding area is a CU), Or it can be divided into four nodes at the next level, that is, the square area is divided into four square areas of the same size, and the height and width of each square area after division are half of the height and width of the area before division , Each zone corresponds to a node. As shown in (c) in Figure 6.
  • EQT Extended Quadtree
  • a node on an extended quadtree structure may not be divided, or may be divided into four nodes at the next level.
  • the method of dividing one node into four nodes includes: horizontally expanding quadtree division method and vertically expanding quadtree division method.
  • the horizontal quadtree division method is as follows: first horizontal three points, the area corresponding to the node is divided into upper, middle, and lower areas, each area corresponds to a node, of which the upper, middle, and lower areas The heights are 1/4, 1/2, and 1/4 of the node height, respectively, and then the nodes in the middle area are divided into left and right areas of the same size, as shown in (d) in FIG. 6.
  • the vertical expansion quadtree is divided into three parts: first, vertically divide the area corresponding to the node into three areas of left, center, and right, each area corresponds to a node, and the three areas of left, center, and right
  • the widths are 1/4, 1/2, and 1/4 of the node height, respectively, and the nodes in the middle area are divided into upper and lower areas of the same size, as shown in (e) in FIG. 6.
  • the QTBT scheme is a cascade of QT division and BT division. Specifically, the CTU is first divided according to QT, and the leaf nodes of QT are allowed to continue to be divided using BT, as shown in FIG. 7, that is, the first-level coding tree is QT and the second-level coding tree is BT. Among them, each endpoint in the right figure of FIG.
  • a node connected with 4 solid lines represents a quadtree division
  • a node connected with 2 dotted lines represents a binary tree division
  • a to m are 13 leaf nodes, each leaf The node corresponds to 1 CU; "1" on the binary tree node indicates vertical division, and "0" indicates horizontal division; a CTU is divided according to the right figure of FIG. 7, and 13 CUs from a to m can be obtained, as shown in FIG. 7 Shown on the left.
  • the advantage of the QTBT scheme is that the shape of the CU is more diverse, so as to better adapt to the content of the local image.
  • the QT division in the AVS2 video coding standard makes all CUs only be square, that is, the width of the CU is equal to the height of the CU.
  • the width of the CU is the number of columns of pixels included in the CU, and the height of the CU is the number of rows of pixels included in the CU.
  • the width and height of the CU may be different, for example, the ratio of width to height is 2, 4, 8, 16, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, or 1/16.
  • the width and height of all CUs cannot be smaller than the side length of the smallest CU.
  • the smallest CU size can be included in the SPS, for example, the smallest CU can be set to 4 ⁇ 4.
  • the AVS3 video coding standard proposes the EQT scheme, that is, the first-level coding tree can be divided by QT, and the second-level coding tree can be divided by BT and EQT. More specifically, the CTU is used as the root node of the first-level coding tree.
  • the first-level coding tree uses QT division to divide the CTU into the first-level coding tree leaf nodes; the first-level coding tree leaf nodes are used as The root node of the second-level coding tree.
  • the second-level coding tree can adopt the above-mentioned horizontal BT division, vertical BT division, horizontal EQT division, and vertical EQT division.
  • the leaf nodes of the tree continue to be divided into the leaf nodes of the second-level coding tree.
  • the encoder it is usually determined whether to divide the current image block (that is, the current node) based on the minimum CU size principle and the minimum rate distortion optimization (RDO) principle, and if The division method used for division. Specifically: first, based on the principle of minimum CU size, determine the possible division method of the current image block, that is, according to the size of each image block obtained after division must be greater than or equal to the minimum CU size, determine the division method applicable to the current image block. If all candidate division methods (ie, horizontal BT division method, vertical BT division method, horizontal EQT division method, and vertical EQT division method) are not applicable, it is determined that the current image block cannot be divided.
  • RDO minimum rate distortion optimization
  • the RDO calculates and compare the RDO when the current image block is not divided with the RDO when using every possible division method. If the RDO is the smallest when it is not divided, it is determined that the current image block is not divided; if a certain division method is used If the RDO is the smallest, it is determined that the current image block will be divided in the following manner. This method needs to traverse all possible division methods that are determined for the current image block based on the principle of minimum CU size, so as to determine the division method for dividing the current image block, and therefore, the coding complexity is high. In addition, if it is determined that a certain division method is used to divide the current image block, the code stream carries information indicating the division type and division direction of the division method, and therefore, the transmission overhead of the code stream is large.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a video encoding method and a corresponding decoding method.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are explained in detail below with reference to the drawings.
  • FIG. 8 it is a schematic flowchart of a video decoding method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method shown in Figure 8 includes the following steps:
  • the decoder determines the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block.
  • the decoder is specifically an encoder.
  • the decoder is specifically a decoder.
  • the current image block may be any image block in the process of dividing the image to be decoded.
  • any image block in the second-level coding tree may be any image block in the second-level coding tree.
  • the block division strategy refers to a strategy for obtaining coded blocks based on the current image block.
  • the block division strategy of the current image block may include: for the current image block, which division method is illegal.
  • the block division strategy of the current image block may include: a target division manner adopted when dividing the current image block, and the like.
  • the decoder may determine the division method applicable to the current image block based on the minimum CU size principle. Therefore, in a possible implementation, the "minimum CU size principle" can be used as part of the block division strategy. In another possible implementation, the "minimum CU size principle" and the block division strategy can be considered as two independent strategies. For convenience of description, the latter is used as an example in the following description.
  • S002 The decoder applies the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain an encoded block.
  • the coding block can be regarded as a leaf node in the coding tree (such as the second-level coding tree in the EQT scheme).
  • the relevant explanation about the coding block can refer to the above, or can refer to the prior art.
  • the decoder is based on a block division strategy (optionally, it can also be based on other strategies such as the minimum CU size principle and the minimum RDO principle, etc.) and determines not to divide the current image block
  • the current image block can be used as the coding tree In the leaf node. In this case, the current image block can be used as a coding block.
  • the decoder is based on the block division strategy (optional, it can also be based on other strategies such as the minimum CU size principle and the minimum RDO principle, etc.) and determines that the current image block needs to be divided, the divided image blocks can be used as The current image block, and then execute S001 to S002, and so on, until the current image block is no longer divided, the current image block is used as a leaf node in the coding tree. In this case, the current image block can be used as a coding block.
  • S003 The decoder reconstructs the obtained coding block to reconstruct the current image block.
  • the specific implementation of this step can refer to the description above, or can refer to the prior art.
  • the block division strategy of the current image block is determined conditionally to obtain the coding block. In this way, it helps to reduce the complexity of the division and thereby improve the performance of video encoding and decoding.
  • the above S001 to S002 can be considered as the image block division method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the image block division method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described below with reference to FIGS. 9-12.
  • FIG. 9 it is a schematic flowchart of an image block division method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method shown in Figure 9 includes the following steps:
  • S101 The encoder determines whether the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block.
  • the first threshold is the maximum value of the ratio of the long side length to the short side length of the nodes in the allowed coding tree (such as the second-level coding tree described above).
  • the first threshold is a value greater than 1, such as an integer greater than 1.
  • the first threshold is an integer power of 2, for example, the first threshold is 4, 8, or 16, etc. It should be noted that, if no description is given, the specific examples in the embodiments of the present application are described by taking the value of the first threshold greater than 1 as an example.
  • the encoder determines the first candidate set.
  • the first candidate set is a set composed of legal division methods for the current image block. Among them, the first candidate set does not include a division manner in which the division direction is the horizontal direction. In other words, the horizontal division method is illegal. Then, it is determined whether to divide the current image block according to the first candidate set, and the target division manner adopted when dividing.
  • the encoder may first determine the block division strategy of the current image block.
  • the block division strategy includes the division that does not include the division direction in the horizontal direction. That is, when the current image block does not satisfy the first condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the horizontal direction.
  • the first condition includes that the width of the current image block is smaller than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block.
  • the first candidate set is determined. For example, the encoder may determine the first candidate set based on the "minimum CU size principle" and the block division strategy.
  • the determined division methods applicable to the current image block include a vertical binary tree division method, a vertically extended quadtree division method, a horizontal binary tree division method, and a horizontally extended quadtree division method
  • the first candidate set may include a vertical binary tree division mode and a vertically extended quadtree division mode, but does not include a horizontal binary tree division mode and a horizontally expanded quadtree division mode.
  • the legal division method for the current image block is the vertical division method.
  • determining whether to divide the current image block according to the candidate set, and the target division method used when dividing may include: calculating and comparing the RDO when the current image block is not divided and using each of the candidate sets RDO when dividing by a possible division method; if RDO is minimum when not dividing, it is determined that the current image block is not divided; if RDO is minimum when using a certain division method in the candidate set, the division method is determined as the target division the way. In another example, if the candidate set is empty, it is determined not to divide the current image block.
  • the candidate set in these two examples may be the first candidate set, or the second candidate set or the third candidate set below.
  • the determination result of S101 is "No"
  • the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block.
  • the current image The width of the block is the long side and the height is the short side.
  • the encoder and decoder may predefine that when the judgment result of S101 is “No”, the division method perpendicular to the short side (specifically high) of the current image block is illegal.
  • S103 The encoder determines whether the height of the current image block in the image to be encoded is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block.
  • the encoder determines the second candidate set.
  • the second candidate set is a set composed of legal division methods for the current image block. Among them, the second candidate set does not include a division manner in which the division direction is the vertical direction. In other words, the vertical division method is illegal. Then, it is determined whether to divide the current image block according to the second candidate set, and the target division manner adopted when dividing.
  • the encoder first determines the block division strategy of the current image block.
  • the block division strategy includes the division that does not include the division direction in the vertical direction. That is, when the current image block does not satisfy the second condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the vertical direction.
  • the second condition includes that the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block.
  • a second candidate set is determined. For example, the encoder may determine the second candidate set based on the "minimum CU size principle" and the block division strategy.
  • the determined division methods applicable to the current image block include a vertical binary tree division method, a vertically extended quadtree division method, a horizontal binary tree division method, and a horizontally extended quadtree division method
  • the second candidate set may include a horizontal binary tree division mode and a horizontally expanded quadtree division mode, but does not include a vertical binary tree division mode and a vertically extended quadtree division mode.
  • the legal division method for the current image block is the horizontal direction.
  • the judgment result of S103 is "No", that is, the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block.
  • the current image The height of the block is the long side and the width is the short side.
  • the encoder's default division method perpendicular to the short side (specifically the width) of the current image block is illegal.
  • the encoder and decoder may predefine that when the judgment result of S103 is “No”, the division method perpendicular to the short side (specifically the width) of the current image block is illegal.
  • the encoder divides the current image block according to the target division mode. And, the first identification information and the second identification information are encoded into the code stream.
  • the first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block (specifically, division).
  • the second identification information is used to indicate the division type of the target division manner (for example, binary tree division type or extended quadtree division type).
  • the encoder determines a third candidate set.
  • the third candidate set is a set composed of legal division methods for the current image block. Then, it is determined whether to divide the current image block according to the third candidate set, and the target division manner adopted when dividing.
  • the encoder may determine the third candidate set based on the "minimum CU size principle".
  • the third candidate set may include a horizontal binary tree division manner, a horizontally expanded quadtree division manner, a vertical binary tree division manner, and a vertically expanded quadtree division manner.
  • the execution order of the foregoing S101 to S102 and S103 to S104 may be in no particular order.
  • the encoder may first execute S103, and execute the above S101 when the judgment result of S103 is "Yes”, and execute the above S104 when the judgment result of S103 is "No”.
  • the judgment result of S101 is "Yes”
  • the above S106 is executed
  • the judgment result of S101 is "No”
  • the above S102 is executed.
  • the encoder may not perform the above-mentioned S101 to S102, or may not perform the above-mentioned S103 to S104. For example, when the above S103 to S104 are not executed, the encoder may directly execute the above S106 when the judgment result of S101 is "YES".
  • the encoder divides the current image block according to the target division mode. And, the first identification information, the second identification information, and the third identification information are all encoded into the code stream.
  • the first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block (specifically, division).
  • the second identification information is used to indicate the division type of the target division mode (such as the binary tree division type or the extended quadtree division type), and the third identification information is used to indicate the division direction of the target division mode (such as the horizontal direction or the vertical direction).
  • the encoder encodes the first identification information into the code stream.
  • the first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block (specifically, not to divide).
  • the encoder may use it as the current image block, and thus return to execution of S101 to S109.
  • the video coding method provided in this embodiment conditionally determines the block division strategy of the current image block. Compared with the existing EQT scheme for the nodes in the second-level coding tree, the division complexity can be reduced, thereby Improve coding efficiency. Moreover, when the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the height, and/or the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the width, the default division direction is the short perpendicular to the current image block The division of edges is illegal. Therefore, there is no need to compile information indicating the division direction of the current image block into the code stream, which can save transmission bit overhead.
  • this technical solution helps to limit the width-to-height ratio (or height-to-width ratio) of leaf nodes in the coding tree to a certain range, and helps to avoid “slenderness" in the coding process as much as possible Node, which facilitates coding.
  • FIG. 10 it is a schematic flowchart of an image block division method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the video decoding method shown in FIG. 10 corresponds to the video encoding method shown in FIG. 9, therefore, for the explanation of related content in this embodiment, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 described above.
  • the method shown in Figure 10 includes the following steps:
  • the decoder receives the code stream from the encoder.
  • the decoder parses the code stream to obtain first identification information, where the first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block.
  • the division process for the current image block ends.
  • the current image block can be used as a coding block.
  • the following S203 is performed.
  • S203 The decoder judges whether the width of the current image block is smaller than the product of the first threshold and the height.
  • the decoder continues to parse the code stream to obtain second identification information, and the second identification information is used to indicate the type of division for dividing the current image block; and the type of division indicated by the second identification information is used for the current image block.
  • the division direction is vertical division.
  • the decoder may determine that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the horizontal direction based on the judgment result. Then, based on the block division strategy, the division type indicated by the second identification information is used to divide the current image block into the vertical direction.
  • the division type indicated by the second identification information may include a binary tree division type or an extended quadtree division type, and so on. If the division type indicated by the second identification information is a binary tree division type, the current image block is divided into vertical binary trees; if the division type indicated by the second identification information is an extended quadtree division type, the current image block is divided into Vertically expand the quadtree division.
  • the judgment result of S203 is "No", that is, the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the height, indicating that the width of the current image block is the long side and the height is short side.
  • S205 The decoder determines whether the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width.
  • the decoder continues to parse the code stream to obtain second identification information, and the second identification information is used to indicate the type of division for dividing the current image block; and the type of division indicated by the second identification information is used for the current image block.
  • the division direction is the division in the horizontal direction.
  • the decoder may determine that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the vertical direction based on the judgment result. Then, based on the block division strategy, the division type indicated by the second identification information is used to divide the current image block into the horizontal direction.
  • the division type indicated by the second identification information may include a binary tree division type or an extended quadtree division type, and so on. If the division type indicated by the second identification information is a binary tree division type, horizontal binary tree division is performed on the current image block; if the division type indicated by the second identification information is an extended quadtree division type, horizontal level is performed on the current image block Extended quadtree division.
  • the judgment result of S205 is "No", that is, the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the width, indicating that the height of the current image block is the long side and the width is short side.
  • the decoder continues to parse the code stream to obtain second identification information and third identification information.
  • the second identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block
  • the third identification information is used to indicate the current image block.
  • the division direction of the division and, using the division type indicated by the second identification information, divide the current image block into the division direction indicated by the third identification information.
  • the division type indicated by the second identification information is a binary tree division type
  • the division direction indicated by the third identification information is a horizontal division
  • horizontal binary tree division is performed on the current image block.
  • Other examples are not listed one by one.
  • the decoder may perform the operation of parsing the code stream once to obtain the second identification information and the third identification information.
  • the decoder may perform the operation of parsing the code stream once to obtain second identification information, and perform another operation of parsing the code stream to obtain third identification information, and the two parsing steps may be in no particular order.
  • the execution order of the foregoing S203 to S204 and S205 to S206 may be in no particular order.
  • the decoder may first execute S205, and execute the above S203 when the judgment result of S205 is "Yes”, and execute the above S206 when the judgment result of S205 is "No”.
  • the judgment result of S203 is "Yes”
  • the above S207 is executed
  • the judgment result of S203 is "No”
  • the above S204 is executed.
  • the decoder may not perform the above S203 to S204, or may not perform the above S205 to S206.
  • the decoder can directly execute the above S207 when the judgment result of S203 is "YES". It can be understood that, in a specific implementation, if the encoder executes the above S101 to S102, the decoder executes the above S203 to S204; if the encoder performs the above S103 to S104, the decoder executes the above S205 to S206.
  • the decoder may use it as the current image block, so as to execute S202-S207.
  • the decoder when the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the height, and/or the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the width, the decoder defaults to dividing The direction is perpendicular to the short side of the current image block, which is illegal. In this way, the encoder does not need to incorporate information indicating the division direction of the current image block into the code stream, so transmission bit overhead can be saved.
  • this technical solution helps to limit the width-to-height ratio (or height-to-width ratio) of leaf nodes in the coding tree to a certain range, and helps to avoid “slenderness" in the coding process as much as possible Node, which facilitates coding.
  • FIG. 11 it is a schematic flowchart of a method for dividing an image block according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the relevant descriptions of the current image block, the first identification information, the second identification information and the third identification information in this embodiment can all refer to the above.
  • the method shown in Figure 11 includes the following steps:
  • S301 The encoder determines whether the width of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block.
  • the second threshold is one-half the maximum value of the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the node in the allowed coding tree.
  • the second threshold is a value greater than 1, such as an integer greater than 1.
  • the second threshold is an integer power of 2, for example, the second threshold is 2, 4, or 8, and so on. It should be noted that, if no description is given, the specific examples in the embodiments of the present application are described by taking the value of the second threshold greater than 1 as an example.
  • the encoder determines the first candidate set.
  • the first candidate set is a set composed of legal division methods for the current image block.
  • the first candidate set does not include an expanded quadtree division manner in which the division direction is the horizontal direction. In other words, it is illegal to divide the quadtree in the horizontal direction. Then, it is determined whether to divide the current image block according to the first candidate set, and the target division manner adopted when dividing.
  • the encoder may first determine the block division strategy of the current image block.
  • the block division strategy includes the division of the extended quadtree that does not include the horizontal division direction. That is, when the current image block does not satisfy the third condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the extended quadtree division in which the division direction is the horizontal direction.
  • the third condition includes that the width of the current image block is smaller than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block.
  • the first candidate set is determined. For example, the encoder may determine the first candidate set based on the "minimum CU size principle" and the block division strategy.
  • the determined division methods applicable to the current image block include a vertical binary tree division method, a vertically extended quadtree division method, a horizontal binary tree division method, and a horizontally extended quadtree division method, then:
  • the first candidate set may include a horizontal binary tree division manner, a vertical binary tree division manner, and a vertical expansion quadtree division manner, but does not include a horizontal expansion quadtree division manner.
  • S303 The encoder determines whether the height of the current image block in the image to be encoded is less than the product of the second threshold and the width of the current image block.
  • the encoder determines the second candidate set.
  • the second candidate set is a set composed of legal division methods for the current image block.
  • the second candidate set does not include the extended quadtree division manner in which the division direction is the vertical direction. In other words, it is illegal to divide the quadtree in the vertical direction. Then, it is determined whether to divide the current image block according to the second candidate set, and the target division manner adopted when dividing.
  • the encoder may first determine the block division strategy of the current image block.
  • the block division strategy includes the division of the extended quadtree that does not include the vertical division direction. That is, when the current image block does not satisfy the fourth condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the extended quadtree division with the vertical division direction.
  • the fourth condition includes that the height of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the width of the current image block.
  • a second candidate set is determined. For example, the encoder may determine the second candidate set based on the "minimum CU size principle" and the block division strategy.
  • the second candidate set may include a horizontal binary tree division manner, a vertical binary tree division manner, and a horizontally expanded quadtree division manner, but does not include a vertically extended quadtree division manner.
  • S305 The encoder divides the current image block according to the target division mode.
  • the division type of the target division mode is a binary tree division type
  • the first identification information, the second identification information, and the third identification information are all encoded into the code stream, where the first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block (Specifically, division), the second identification information is used to indicate the division type of the target division mode (specifically, binary tree division type), and the third identification information is used to indicate the division direction of the target division mode (specifically, horizontal direction or vertical direction) .
  • the first identification information and the second identification information are encoded into the code stream, where the first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block (specifically Division), the second identification information is used to indicate the division type of the target division mode (specifically, the division type of the extended quadtree).
  • the encoder may use it as the current image block, and thus return to execute S301 to S309.
  • the encoder determines whether to divide the current image block, and the specific implementation manner of the target division mode adopted when dividing, can refer to the above, and will not be described here.
  • the execution order of the above S301 to S302 and S303 to S304 may be in no particular order.
  • the encoder may execute S303 first, and execute the above S301 when the judgment result of S303 is “Yes”, and execute the above S304 when the judgment result of S303 is “No”.
  • the judgment result of S301 is “Yes”
  • the above S306 is executed, and when the judgment result of S301 is “No”, the above S302 is executed.
  • the encoder may not perform the above S301 to S302, or may not perform the above S303 to S304. For example, when the above S303 to S304 are not executed, the encoder may directly execute the above S306 when the judgment result of S301 is "Yes".
  • the block division strategy of the current image block is determined conditionally, which can reduce the division complexity compared with the existing EQT scheme for the nodes in the second-level coding tree. Thereby improving coding efficiency.
  • the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the second threshold and the height, and/or the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the second threshold and the width, the default division direction is the short perpendicular to the current image block
  • the method of dividing the extended quadtree is illegal. Therefore, when the division type is extended quadtree division, it is not necessary to compile information indicating the division direction of the current image block into the code stream, which can save transmission bit overhead.
  • this technical solution helps to limit the width-to-height ratio (or height-to-width ratio) of leaf nodes in the coding tree to a certain range, and helps to avoid “slenderness" in the coding process as much as possible Node, which facilitates coding.
  • FIG. 12 it is a schematic flowchart of an image block division method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the video decoding method shown in FIG. 12 corresponds to the video encoding method shown in FIG. 11.
  • the method shown in Figure 12 includes the following steps:
  • the decoder receives the code stream from the encoder.
  • the decoder parses the code stream to obtain first identification information, where the first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block.
  • the division process for the current image block ends.
  • S403 The decoder determines whether the width of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block.
  • S404 The decoder continues to parse the code stream to obtain second identification information, where the second identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block.
  • the decoder continues to parse the code stream to obtain third identification information, and the third identification information is used to indicate the division direction of the current image block.
  • the third identification information is used to indicate that the current image block is divided horizontally, the current image block is divided into horizontal binary trees.
  • the third identification information is used to indicate that the current image block is vertically divided, the current image block is vertically divided into binary trees.
  • the current image block is vertically divided into quadtrees.
  • S405 The decoder determines whether the height of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the width of the current image block.
  • the decoder continues to parse the code stream to obtain second identification information, where the second identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block.
  • the decoder continues to parse the code stream to obtain third identification information, and the third identification information is used to indicate the division direction of the current image block.
  • the third identification information is used to indicate that the current image block is divided horizontally, the current image block is divided into horizontal binary trees.
  • the third identification information is used to indicate that the current image block is vertically divided, the current image block is vertically divided into binary trees.
  • the current image block is horizontally extended quadtree division.
  • the decoder may use it as the current image block, so as to execute S402 to S407.
  • the execution order of the above S403 to S404 and S405 to S406 may be in no particular order.
  • the decoder may execute S405 first, and execute the above S403 when the judgment result of S405 is "Yes”, and execute the above S406 when the judgment result of S405 is "No”.
  • the judgment result of S403 is "Yes”
  • the above S407 is executed
  • the judgment result of S403 is "No
  • the above S404 is executed.
  • the decoder may not perform the above-mentioned S403 to S404, or may not perform the above-mentioned S405 to S406.
  • the decoder may directly execute the above S407 when the judgment result of S403 is "Yes". It can be understood that, in a specific implementation, if the encoder performs the above S301 to S302, the decoder performs the above S403 to S404; if the encoder performs the above S303 to S304, the decoder performs the above S405 to S406.
  • the decoder when the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the second threshold and the height, and/or the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the second threshold and the width, the decoder defaults The division direction is perpendicular to the short side of the current image block, which is illegal. In this way, when the division type is extended quad-tree division, the encoder does not need to encode information indicating the division direction of the current image block into the code stream, so transmission bit overhead can be saved.
  • this technical solution helps to limit the width-to-height ratio (or height-to-width ratio) of leaf nodes in the coding tree to a certain range, and helps to avoid “slenderness" in the coding process as much as possible Node, which facilitates coding.
  • FIG. 13 it is a schematic flowchart of a video encoding method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method shown in Figure 13 includes the following steps:
  • S501 The encoder determines whether the length of the long side of the current image block in the image to be encoded is twice the length of the short side of the current image block.
  • the encoder determines the first candidate set.
  • the first candidate set includes performing a binary tree division on the current image block in a direction perpendicular to the long side of the current image block. And determine whether to divide the current image block according to the first candidate set. Wherein, if it is determined to divide the current image block, the current image block may be referred to as an image block to be divided.
  • the first candidate set when the width of the current image block is the long side and the height is the short side, the first candidate set includes a vertical binary tree division manner.
  • the first candidate set when the width of the current image block is the short side and the height is the long side, the first candidate set includes a horizontal binary tree division manner.
  • S503 The encoder divides the current image block into a binary tree perpendicular to the long side of the current image block. And, the first identification information is encoded into the code stream. The first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block (specifically, division).
  • S504-S507 refer to the above-mentioned S104-S107.
  • the encoder may use it as the current image block, and thus return to execute S501 to S507.
  • the encoder when the length of the long side of the current image block is twice the length of the short side of the current image block, if the current image block is divided, the encoder defaults to dividing the direction perpendicular to the current image Binary tree division on the long side of the block. In this way, on the one hand, compared with the method for dividing nodes in the second-level coding tree in the existing EQT scheme, the technical solution provided by the embodiments of the present application can reduce the division complexity, thereby improving coding efficiency. On the other hand, if the current image block is divided, there is no need to incorporate information indicating the division method (including the division type and division direction) of the current image block into the code stream, so transmission bit overhead can be saved.
  • the current image block can be divided into two square image blocks.
  • the subsequent blocks of the square image block are The possibility of division is higher, so it helps to improve the encoding accuracy of video pictures.
  • FIG. 14 it is a schematic flowchart of a video decoding method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the video decoding method shown in FIG. 14 corresponds to the video encoding method shown in FIG. 13.
  • the method shown in Figure 14 includes the following steps:
  • the decoder receives the code stream from the encoder.
  • the decoder parses the code stream to obtain first identification information, where the first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block in the image to be decoded.
  • the division process for the current image block ends.
  • S603 The decoder determines whether the length of the long side of the current image block is equal to twice the length of the short side of the current image block.
  • the decoder divides the current image block into a binary tree perpendicular to the long side of the current image block.
  • the decoder may use it as the current image block, so as to execute S602 to S605.
  • the decoder when the length of the long side of the current image block is twice the length of the short side of the current image block, if the current image block is divided, the decoder defaults to dividing the direction perpendicular to the current image Binary tree division on the long side of the block. In this way, the encoder does not need to incorporate information indicating the division method (including the division type and division direction) of the current image block into the code stream, so transmission bit overhead can be saved.
  • the length of the long side of the current image block is 2a pixels long, and the length of the short side is a pixel length.
  • a is an integer, a is usually an integer power of 2.
  • the long side of the current image block is 128 pixels long, and the short side is 64 pixels long.
  • the short side length of the current image block is equal to the side size of the largest transformation unit (ie, TU), or the short side length of the current image block is equal to the side size of the virtual pipeline data unit (ie, VPDU).
  • VPDU which can also be called a hardware pipeline unit
  • the size can be a*a
  • the side size is a pixel length.
  • consecutive VPDUs are processed in parallel by multiple pipelines simultaneously.
  • the size of the VPDU is roughly proportional to the buffer size in most pipeline stages, so it is important to keep the VPDU size small.
  • the size of the VPDU can be set to the size of the largest transformation unit.
  • expanding the quadtree (EQT) and binary tree (BT) partitions may result in an increase in the size of the VPDU.
  • EQT quadtree
  • BT binary tree
  • the current image block is a boundary image block.
  • the current node is said to exceed the image boundary.
  • the current node is a boundary image block.
  • the decoder may recode the image block to be decoded based on the divided image block If the current image block is not divided, the decoder can perform operations such as reconstruction of the image block to be decoded based on the current image block, and the specific implementation process can refer to the prior art.
  • the video encoding method after combining FIG. 9 and FIG. 11 may include:
  • the legal division method for the current image block does not include the division of the current image block perpendicular to the short side of the image block to be divided the way;
  • the legal division method for the current image block does not include dividing the current image block perpendicular to the image to be divided The extended quadtree partition of the short side of the block. It can be understood that since the width and height of the current image block are usually integer powers of 2, when both the second threshold and the first threshold are integer powers of 2, "the length and length of the long side of the current image block The ratio of side lengths is less than the first threshold and greater than or equal to the second threshold" is equivalent to "the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the current image block is equal to the second threshold".
  • the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side is less than 8 and greater than or equal to 4.
  • the length of the long side and the length of the short side The ratio is equal to 4.
  • the legal division method for the current image block may include a horizontal binary tree division method, a vertical binary tree division method, a horizontally extended quadtree division method, and a vertical Direct expansion of quadtree division.
  • the following describes specific implementation manners of the first identification information, the second identification information, and the third identification information.
  • the first identification information may be a binary number "0". If the current image block is divided, the first identification information may be a binary number "1".
  • the second identification information may be a binary number "0". If the determined division type is an extended quadtree division type, the second identification information may be a binary number "1".
  • the third identification information may be a binary number "0". If the determined division direction is the vertical direction, the third identification information may be a binary number "1".
  • the first identification information may be information contained in the "split_flag" field in the code stream.
  • the second identification information may be information contained in the "SplitMode" field in the code stream.
  • SplitMode When SplitMode is 1, it indicates the binary tree division type; when SplitMode is 0, it indicates the extended quadtree division type. Of course not limited to this.
  • the third identification information may be information contained in the "SplitDir" field in the code stream.
  • SplitMode When SplitMode is 1, it means vertical division, and SplitDir is 0, which means horizontal division. Of course not limited to this.
  • the above mainly introduces the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application from the perspective of a method.
  • it includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to performing each function.
  • the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driven hardware depends on the specific application of the technical solution and design constraints. Professional technicians can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • the embodiments of the present application may divide the encoder/decoder function modules according to the above method examples, for example, each function module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be noted that the division of the modules in the embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a division of logical functions. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner.
  • FIG. 15 it is a schematic block diagram of a video decoder 140 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the video decoder 140 may specifically be an encoder or a decoder.
  • the video decoder 140 may be used to execute any video encoding method provided by the embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG. 9, FIG. 11, or FIG. 13.
  • the video decoder 140 is a decoder, the video decoder 140 may be used to execute any one of the video decoding methods provided in the embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 12, or FIG. 14.
  • the video decoder 140 may include a division unit 1401 and a reconstruction unit 1402.
  • the video decoder may further include an entropy decoding unit 1403.
  • the video decoder 140 may be the encoder 20 in FIG. 2.
  • the dividing unit 1401 may be a sub-unit in the prediction processing unit 260, or may be in conjunction with the prediction processing unit 260, the reconstruction unit 214, and
  • the entropy encoding units 270 are all connected to one unit;
  • the reconstruction unit 1402 may be the reconstruction unit 214.
  • the video decoder 140 may be the decoder 30 in FIG. 3.
  • the division unit 1401 may be a subunit in the prediction processing unit 360, or may be the prediction processing unit 360 and the reconstruction unit 314.
  • One unit connected to the entropy decoding unit 304; the reconstruction unit 1402 may be the reconstruction unit 314.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is configured to determine the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block; and apply the block division strategy to the current image block To get the coded block.
  • the reconstruction unit 1402 is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to: determine whether the current image block satisfies the first condition.
  • the first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block; the current image block does not satisfy In the first condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is division in the vertical direction, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to determine whether the current image block satisfies the second condition.
  • the second condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block; In the second condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is a division in a horizontal direction, and the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to: determine whether the current image block satisfies the first condition.
  • the first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block; the current image block does not satisfy In the first condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the horizontal direction, and the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located.
  • the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform S102 and S105.
  • the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform S203 and S204.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to determine whether the current image block satisfies the second condition.
  • the second condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block; In the second condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the vertical direction, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located.
  • the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform S103 and S104.
  • the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform S205 and S207.
  • the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to parse the code stream to obtain identification information, and the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is specifically used to divide the current image block based on the block division strategy (specifically, the block division strategy determined when the first condition is not met), using the division type indicated by the identification information, Vertical division to obtain coded blocks.
  • the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to perform the parsing step in S204.
  • the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the dividing step in S204.
  • the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to parse the code stream to obtain identification information, and the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is specifically used to divide the current image block based on the block division strategy (specifically, the block division strategy determined when the second condition is not met), using the division type indicated by the identification information, Horizontal division.
  • the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to perform the parsing step in S207.
  • the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the dividing step in S207.
  • the first threshold is the maximum value of the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the allowed nodes in the coding tree.
  • the first threshold is a value greater than 1.
  • the first threshold is an integer power of 2.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to: determine whether the current image block satisfies the third condition, the third condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block; In the third condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is an extended quadtree division with a vertical division direction, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to determine whether the current image block satisfies the fourth condition.
  • the fourth condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the width of the current image block; In the fourth condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is an extended quadtree division with a horizontal division direction, and the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to: determine whether the current image block satisfies the third condition, the third condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block; In the third condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the expanded quadtree division in the horizontal direction, and the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located.
  • the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the steps of determining the first candidate set in S301 and S302.
  • the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the dividing step in S404 when the second identification information is used to instruct to perform an extended quadtree division on the current image block.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to: determine whether the current image block satisfies the fourth condition.
  • the fourth condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the width of the current image block; In the fourth condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the extended quadtree division in the vertical direction, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located.
  • the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the steps of determining the second candidate set in S303 and S304.
  • the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the dividing step in S406 when the second identification information is used to instruct to perform an extended quadtree division on the current image block.
  • the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to parse the code stream to obtain identification information, and the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is specifically used to: based on the block division strategy (specifically, the block division strategy determined when the third condition is not satisfied), when the identification information indicates that the current image block is expanded by quadtree division, the current The image block is divided into extended quadtrees with the vertical division direction. For example, with reference to FIG.
  • the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to perform the parsing step in S404 when the second identification information is used to indicate the extended quadtree division of the current image block, and the division unit 1401 may be used to perform the When the second identification information is used to indicate the step of dividing the current image block into an extended quadtree.
  • the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to parse the code stream to obtain identification information, and the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is specifically used for: based on the block division strategy (specifically, the block division strategy determined when the fourth condition is not satisfied), when the identification information indicates that the current image block is expanded by quadtree division, the current The image block is divided into horizontal quadtrees in the horizontal direction.
  • the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to perform the parsing step in S406 when the second identification information is used to indicate the extended quadtree division of the current image block.
  • the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the dividing step in S406 when the second identification information is used to instruct to perform an extended quadtree division on the current image block.
  • the second threshold is one-half the maximum value of the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the node in the allowed coding tree.
  • the second threshold is a value greater than 1.
  • the second threshold is an integer power of 2.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is configured to divide the image block to be divided vertically if the length of the long side of the image block to be divided in the image to be decoded is twice the length of the short side of the image block to be divided Based on the binary tree division on the long side of the image block to be divided, the divided image block is obtained.
  • the reconstruction unit 1402 is configured to reconstruct the image to be decoded according to the divided image blocks. For example, with reference to FIG. 13, the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the dividing operation in S503. For another example, in conjunction with FIG. 14, the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform S604.
  • the long side of the image block to be divided is 128 pixels long, and the short side is 64 pixels long.
  • the short side length of the image block to be divided is equal to the side size of the maximum transformation unit TU, or the short side length of the image block to be divided is equal to the side size of the virtual pipeline data unit VPDU.
  • the image block to be divided is a boundary image block.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is configured to determine whether to allow a binary tree division of the current image block in the horizontal direction according to whether the current image block satisfies the first condition, the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side of the current image block where the height is located ,
  • the first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block satisfies the first condition, it is determined that the current image block is allowed to be divided in a horizontal direction by a binary tree And, in the case where it is determined that the current image block is allowed to be divided in a binary tree in the horizontal direction, the coding block of the current image block is acquired.
  • the reconstruction unit 1402 is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is configured to determine whether to allow the current image block to be divided into a binary tree in the vertical direction according to whether the current image block satisfies the second condition, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the side of the width of the current image block Direction, the second condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block satisfies the second condition, it is determined that vertical direction of the current image block is allowed The binary tree partition of; and, in the case where it is determined that the current image block is allowed to be vertically binary tree partitioned, the coding block of the current image block is obtained.
  • the reconstruction unit 1402 is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is configured to determine whether to allow the current image block to be divided in a horizontal direction according to whether the current image block satisfies the first condition, the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the current image block is high,
  • the first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block does not satisfy the first condition, it is determined that horizontal division of the current image block is not allowed ; In the case where it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to be divided in the horizontal direction, the coding block of the current image block is obtained.
  • the reconstruction unit 1402 is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
  • the dividing unit 1401 is configured to determine whether to allow the current image block to be divided in the vertical direction according to whether the current image block satisfies the second condition, the vertical direction is perpendicular to the side of the width of the current image block Direction, the second condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block does not meet the second condition, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to be vertical.
  • the division of the direction if it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to be divided in the vertical direction, the coding block of the current image block is obtained.
  • the reconstruction unit 1402 is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
  • each module in the video decoder 140 provided by the embodiment of the present application is a functional body that implements various execution steps included in the corresponding method provided above, that is, it has the capability to implement the complete implementation of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the various steps of these steps and the functional body of the expansion and deformation of these steps please refer to the introduction of the corresponding methods above for details. For the sake of brevity, this article will not repeat them.
  • the present invention provides a new CU division method and device to reduce the complexity of system division of CUs.
  • the invention is applied to a video codec.
  • the video communication system is shown in Figure 17.
  • the communication system includes a source device 12 and a sink device 14, and a connection line 15 therebetween.
  • the source device includes a video memory 16, a video encoder 18, a transmitter 20, and a video capture device 23.
  • the receiving device 14 includes a receiver 22, a video decoder 24 and a display device 26.
  • the present invention is applicable to the video encoder 18 and the video decoder 24.
  • Embodiment 1 relates to a video decoding method.
  • step 2 is the key of the present invention, and steps 1 and 3 are prior art.
  • the flowchart is shown in Figure 18.
  • the size of the CTU can be 64 ⁇ 64, 128 ⁇ 128, 256 ⁇ 256, etc.
  • a CTU is divided into a group of non-overlapping CUs. This group of CUs covers the entire CTU; a group of CUs includes one or more CUs.
  • a CU contains luma pixels in N rows and M columns, or chroma pixels in N rows and M columns, or luma pixels in N rows and M columns, and chroma pixels in N/2 rows and M/2 columns (such as the YUV420 format), Either include luminance pixels in N rows and M columns and chrominance pixels in N rows and M columns (such as YUV444 format), or RGB pixels including N rows and M columns (such as RGB format).
  • N and M are integer powers of 2.
  • Step 1 Using the CTU as the root node of the first-level coding tree, analyze the division information of the first-level coding tree to obtain the first-level coding leaf node.
  • the division method of the first-level coding tree is QT division or no division.
  • This step is the prior art, for example, the process of dividing the CTU into QT leaf nodes in the AVS scheme. More specifically, including: using the CTU as the root node, parsing the code stream to obtain the syntax element SplitFlag, if SplitFlag is 0, the node is a first-level coding leaf node, otherwise the node is divided into four first-level nodes according to the quadtree division method For child nodes in the coding tree, the width and height of each child node is half of that node.
  • each child node parse the code stream to obtain the syntax element SplitFlag to determine whether this node is a first-level coding leaf node; if not, continue to divide according to the quadtree; and so on, until the width of the node is equal to the threshold MinQTSize (for example, 4 ), this node defaults to the first-level coding leaf node, and SplitFlag defaults to 0.
  • MinQTSize for example, 4
  • Step 2 Taking the leaf node of the first-level coding tree as the root node of the second-level coding tree, parse the second-level coding tree information, obtain the second-level coding leaf node, and parse the coding unit corresponding to the second-level coding leaf node CU.
  • the division method of the second-level coding tree includes 2 binary tree divisions (horizontal bisection, vertical bisection) and 2 extended quadtree divisions (horizontal, vertical); in the resolution of the resolution node, if the size of a node If it is 64 ⁇ 128 or 128 ⁇ 64, the node is divided into two 64 ⁇ 64 sub-blocks or not divided by default.
  • the second-level coding tree is divided differently from the first-level coding tree.
  • the second-level coding tree includes 4 divisions, and the first-level coding tree includes 1 division.
  • the above “analyzing the coding unit CU corresponding to the second-level coding leaf node” is the prior art, and reference may be made to the coding unit analysis in the AVS standard, which is not limited in the present invention.
  • the node is a second-level coding leaf node
  • STSplitMode and its value are only used to indicate different division modes, and other distinguishable expressions (such as different codewords) are also within the protection scope of the present invention.
  • the division method of the node is determined, that is, whether the node is not divided or continues to be divided, and which division method is used if the division is continued.
  • a division limitation for nodes of an extended quadtree is added, that is, "if any of the nodes has a side length greater than 32, the node does not divide the extended quadtree by default.”
  • the leaf node of the second-level coding tree corresponds to a coding unit CU, and the coding unit syntax structure in the code stream (for example, coding_unit() syntax structure in H.265) is parsed to obtain the coding information of the CU, including the prediction mode of the CU , Transform coefficients and other information.
  • the coding unit syntax structure in the code stream for example, coding_unit() syntax structure in H.265
  • the determination of the second-level coded leaf node and the analysis of the coding unit may be performed alternately, more specifically: after obtaining a second-level coded leaf node, the information of the coding unit corresponding to this node is analyzed; After coding unit information, continue to obtain the next second-level coding leaf node and parse the coding unit information of this leaf node; and so on, until the last second-level coding leaf node among the first-level coding leaf nodes.
  • Step 3 Decode and reconstruct each CU according to the coding information of each CU determined in step 2, to obtain the reconstructed pixels of each CU, thereby obtaining the reconstructed image of the CTU.
  • CU decoding includes entropy decoding, inverse quantization, inverse transform, prediction, loop filtering and other processing.
  • the process mainly includes:
  • Entropy decoding to obtain CU prediction information, quantization parameters, transform coefficients, transform mode and other coding information
  • the prediction mode select intra prediction or inter prediction to obtain the predicted pixels of the CU;
  • the transform coefficient is subjected to inverse quantization and inverse transform processing according to the quantization parameter and the transform mode to obtain the reconstruction residual of the CU. If there is no transform coefficient in the CU, the reconstruction residual of the CU is 0, that is, the reconstruction residual value of each pixel in the CU is 0.
  • the predicted pixels and the reconstruction residuals are added together to perform loop filter processing to obtain CU reconstruction pixels.
  • the decoding device corresponding to the present invention may include 2 modules:
  • the coding tree node analysis module which completes the processing of steps 1 and 2, that is, parses the code stream, determines the division method of each node on the coding tree, and obtains the manner in which the CTU is divided into CUs and the coding information of each CU. Wherein, if the size of the node is 64 ⁇ 32 or 32 ⁇ 64, the node is divided into two 32 ⁇ 32 sub-blocks or not divided by default.
  • the CU decoding module which completes the processing of step 3, that is, decodes each CU to obtain the reconstructed image of the CTU.
  • the second embodiment is an extension of the first embodiment.
  • the division method of the node is considered illegal (that is, the division method of this node is actually not allowed in use).
  • the node defaults to illegal.
  • the threshold may be an integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 4.
  • minCUSize is called the minimum CU side length, for example equal to 4.
  • the thresholds in each of the above conditions can be specified in high-level syntax, or preset as default values.
  • the threshold minRatio may correspond to the first threshold above.
  • the width-to-height ratio of the parent node is equal to the threshold 4
  • horizontal division cannot be continued, because if horizontal division is performed: then in the case of horizontal BT division, the width-to-height ratio of the child node will be equal to 8, exceeding the threshold 4. It is illegal; in the case of horizontal EQT division, the width-to-height ratio of the child nodes will be equal to 16, which exceeds the threshold of 4, which is illegal.
  • the length of the short side of a parent node is equal to the threshold minCUSize, then it can only divide BT on the long side; that is, when it is determined that the length of the short side of the current node is equal to the threshold minCUSize, only the value of BTSplitMode can be analyzed to obtain the current The division of nodes.
  • the ratio of the long side to the short side of a parent node is equal to twice the threshold minRatio, then it cannot divide EQT on the short side; that is, when it is judged that the ratio of the long side to the short side of the current node is equal to twice the threshold minRatio
  • EQTSplitMode As long as the value of EQTSplitMode is 1, it can be obtained that the current node is divided into EQT along the long side (that is, it is not EqtSplitDir).
  • the length of the short side of a parent node is twice the threshold minCUSize, then it cannot divide EQT on the short side; that is, when it is determined that the length of the short side of the current node is equal to twice the threshold minCUSize, as long as the value of EQTSplitMode is resolved Is 1, you can get the current node division method is the EQT along the long side (that is, it is EqtSplitDir if not used).
  • width and height of a parent node are twice the threshold minCUSize, then it cannot be divided by EQT; that is, when it is determined that the width and height of the current node are twice the threshold minCUSize, only BTSplitMode and BtSpliDir are used to resolve, not Analyze EQTSplitMode.
  • the impossible division mode of the current node (the invention point of the second embodiment) is eliminated, thereby reducing the complexity of the entire analysis process, Improve the efficiency of the system.
  • the third embodiment is an extension of the first embodiment. This embodiment modifies the following steps in step two of the first embodiment:
  • step two "parse the second-level coding tree information to obtain the second-level coding leaf node" may also include:
  • the method and method of positioning division can be positioned more quickly, the parallel processing capacity is improved, and the efficiency of the system is improved.
  • the embodiment of the present invention defines a specific division mode (divided into 32 ⁇ 32) for a specific block (64 ⁇ 32 or 32 ⁇ 64 block);
  • the embodiment of the present invention limits the division of the nodes of the extended quadtree, that is, "if any of the nodes has a side length greater than 32, the node does not divide the extended quadtree by default";
  • the embodiment of the present invention compares the relationship between the size of the current node and the threshold minCUSize and/or the threshold minRatio to exclude the impossible division mode of the current node (Embodiment 2), thereby reducing the complexity of the entire parsing process.
  • the beneficial effect is to reduce the complexity of CTU division (multiple divisions become one division or no division), thereby improving the efficiency of the entire system.
  • Computer-readable media may include computer-readable storage media, which corresponds to tangible media, such as data storage media, or communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one place to another (eg, according to a communication protocol).
  • computer-readable media may generally correspond to (1) non-transitory tangible computer-readable storage media, or (2) communication media, such as signals or carrier waves.
  • Data storage media may be any available media that can be accessed by one or more computers or one or more processors to retrieve instructions, code and/or data structures for implementation of the techniques described in this application.
  • the computer program product may include a computer-readable medium.
  • Such computer-readable storage media may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM, or other optical disk storage devices, magnetic disk storage devices, or other magnetic storage devices, flash memory, or may be used to store instructions or data structures
  • the desired program code in the form of and any other medium that can be accessed by the computer. And, any connection is properly called a computer-readable medium.
  • coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technology such as infrared, radio, and microwave is used to transmit instructions from a website, server, or other remote source
  • coaxial cable Wire, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of media.
  • the computer-readable storage media and data storage media do not include connections, carrier waves, signals, or other temporary media, but are actually directed to non-transitory tangible storage media.
  • magnetic disks and optical discs include compact discs (CDs), laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs (DVDs), and Blu-ray discs, where magnetic discs typically reproduce data magnetically, while optical discs reproduce optically using lasers data. Combinations of the above should also be included in the scope of computer-readable media.
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • FPGAs field programmable logic arrays
  • processors may refer to any of the foregoing structure or any other structure suitable for implementation of the techniques described herein.
  • the functions described in the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and steps described herein may be provided within dedicated hardware and/or software modules configured for encoding and decoding, or in combination Into the combined codec.
  • the techniques can be fully implemented in one or more circuits or logic elements.
  • the technology of the present application may be implemented in a variety of devices or equipment, including wireless handsets, integrated circuits (ICs), or a set of ICs (eg, chipsets).
  • ICs integrated circuits
  • a set of ICs eg, chipsets
  • Various components, modules or units are described in this application to emphasize the functional aspects of the device for performing the disclosed technology, but do not necessarily need to be implemented by different hardware units.
  • various units may be combined in a codec hardware unit in combination with suitable software and/or firmware, or by interoperating hardware units (including one or more processors as described above) provide.

Abstract

Disclosed in the present application are a video coder-decoder and a corresponding method, relating to the technical field of video encoding and decoding, and helping to improve video encoding and decoding performance. In the present application, encoding and decoding are referred to together as coding-decoding. The video coding-decoding method comprises: on the basis of a size relationship between the width and the height of a current image block, a block division strategy is determined for the current image block; said block division strategy is applied to the current image block to obtain an encoded block; and by means of performing reconstruction on the obtained encoded block, reconstruction of the current image block is achieved.

Description

视频译码器及相应方法Video decoder and corresponding method
本申请要求于2018年12月16日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为201811546224.7、申请名称为“视频编码器、视频解码器及相应方法”的中国专利申请,以及2019年05月06日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为201910372891.6、申请名称为“视频译码器及相应方法”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application requires a Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on December 16, 2018, with the application number 201811546224.7, and the application name is "video encoder, video decoder, and corresponding method", and the country filed on May 6, 2019 Intellectual Property Office, the application number is 201910372891.6, the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application name "video decoder and corresponding method", the entire content of which is incorporated by reference in this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及视频编解码技术领域,尤其涉及视频译码器及相应方法。This application relates to the technical field of video encoding and decoding, in particular to a video decoder and corresponding method.
背景技术Background technique
数字视频能力可并入到多种多样的装置中,包含数字电视、数字直播系统、无线广播系统、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、膝上型或桌上型计算机、平板计算机、电子图书阅读器、数码相机、数字记录装置、数字媒体播放器、视频游戏装置、视频游戏控制台、蜂窝式或卫星无线电电话(所谓的“智能电话”)、视频电话会议装置、视频流式传输装置及其类似者。数字视频装置实施视频压缩技术,例如,在由MPEG-2、MPEG-4、ITU-T H.263、ITU-T H.264/MPEG-4第10部分高级视频编码(advanced video coding,AVC)定义的标准、视频编码标准H.265/高效视频编码(high efficiency video coding,HEVC)标准以及此类标准的扩展中所描述的视频压缩技术。视频装置可通过实施此类视频压缩技术来更有效率地发射、接收、编码、解码和/或存储数字视频信息。其中,MPEG是动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group)的英文缩写。ITU-T是国际电信联盟电信标准分局(ITU-T for ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector)的英文缩写。Digital video capabilities can be incorporated into a variety of devices, including digital TVs, digital live broadcast systems, wireless broadcast systems, personal digital assistants (PDAs), laptop or desktop computers, tablet computers, electronics Book readers, digital cameras, digital recording devices, digital media players, video game devices, video game consoles, cellular or satellite radiotelephones (so-called "smart phones"), video teleconferencing devices, video streaming devices And the like. Digital video equipment implements video compression technology, for example, in MPEG-2, MPEG-4, ITU-T H.263, ITU-T H.264/MPEG-4 Part 10 Advanced Video Coding (advanced video coding, AVC) The video compression techniques described in the defined standards, the video coding standard H.265/high efficiency video coding (HEVC) standard, and extensions to such standards. Video devices can more efficiently transmit, receive, encode, decode, and/or store digital video information by implementing such video compression techniques. Among them, MPEG is the abbreviation of moving picture expert group (moving picture experts) group. ITU-T is the abbreviation of ITU-T for ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector.
对于基于块的视频编码,视频条带(即,视频帧或视频帧的一部分)可划分成若干图像块,所述图像块也可被称作树块、编码单元(coding unit,CU)和/或编码节点。如何对视频帧或视频条带进行划分,从而提高视频编解码性能,成为亟待解决的技术问题。For block-based video coding, a video slice (ie, a video frame or a portion of a video frame) may be divided into several image blocks, which may also be called tree blocks, coding units (CU), and/or Or coding node. How to divide video frames or video strips to improve video encoding and decoding performance has become an urgent technical problem to be solved.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供了视频译码器及相应方法,有助于提高视频编解码性能。本申请实施例中,将编码和解码统称为译码。The embodiments of the present application provide a video decoder and corresponding methods, which help to improve the performance of video encoding and decoding. In the embodiments of the present application, encoding and decoding are collectively referred to as decoding.
第一方面,提供了一种视频译码方法,包括:首先,根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略。然后,将该块划分策略应用于当前图像块以得到编码块(coding block)。接着,通过对得到的编码块进行重构以实现对当前图像块的重构。本技术方案中,有条件地确定当前图像块的块划分策略,从而得到编码块,这样,有助于降低划分复杂度,从而提高视频编解码性能。In a first aspect, a video decoding method is provided, which includes: first, determining a block division strategy for the current image block according to the size relationship between the width and height of the current image block. Then, the block division strategy is applied to the current image block to obtain a coding block. Next, the reconstruction of the current image block is achieved by reconstructing the obtained coding block. In this technical solution, the block division strategy of the current image block is determined conditionally to obtain the coding block. In this way, it helps to reduce the complexity of the division and thereby improve the performance of video encoding and decoding.
其中,编码块也可以被称作编码单元。在一个示例中,该技术方案可以应用于扩展四叉树(extended quad-Tree,EQT)方案中的第二级编码树中,也就是说,当前图像块可以是第二级编码树中的任意一个图像块。编码块可以是编码树如第二级编码树 中的叶节点。Among them, the coding block may also be called a coding unit. In one example, this technical solution can be applied to the second-level coding tree in the extended quad-tree (EQT) scheme, that is, the current image block can be any of the second-level coding trees An image block. The coding block may be a leaf node in a coding tree such as a second-level coding tree.
在一种可能的设计中,根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:确定当前图像块是否满足第一条件。第一条件包括:当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积。然后,在当前图像块不满足第一条件时,确定块划分策略为划分方向为竖直方向的划分。竖直方向垂直于当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。这样,当当前图像块的宽大于或等于第一阈值与高的乘积时,不需要在码流中编入表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方向的信息,因此可以节省传输比特开销。另外,该技术方案有助于将编码树中的叶节点的宽与高之比限制在一定范围之内,从而方便编码。In a possible design, determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block meets the first condition. The first condition includes that the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the first condition, the block division strategy is determined to be the division in the vertical direction. The vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located. In this way, when the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the height, it is not necessary to program information indicating the division direction of the current image block into the code stream, so transmission bit overhead can be saved. In addition, the technical solution helps to limit the width-to-height ratio of leaf nodes in the coding tree to a certain range, thereby facilitating coding.
在一种可能的设计中,根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:确定当前图像块是否满足第二条件。第二条件包括:当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积。然后,在当前图像块不满足第二条件时,确定块划分策略为划分方向为水平方向的划分。水平方向垂直于当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。这样,当当前图像块的高大于或等于第一阈值与宽的乘积时,不需要在码流中编入表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方向的信息,因此可以节省传输比特开销。另外,该技术方案有助于将编码树中的叶节点的高与宽之比限制在一定范围之内,从而方便编码。In a possible design, according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block, determining the block division strategy of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block satisfies the second condition. The second condition includes that the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the second condition, the block division strategy is determined to be the division in the horizontal direction. The horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located. In this way, when the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the width, it is not necessary to program information indicating the division direction of the current image block into the code stream, so transmission bit overhead can be saved. In addition, the technical solution helps to limit the height to width ratio of leaf nodes in the coding tree within a certain range, thereby facilitating coding.
在一种可能的设计中,根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:确定当前图像块是否满足第一条件。第一条件包括:当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积。然后,在当前图像块不满足第一条件时,确定当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为水平方向的划分。水平方向垂直于当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。基于此,后续可以对当前图像块进行划分,也可以不对当前图像块进行划分。例如,可以根据当前图像块的块策略并结合其他信息,如最小CU尺寸原则和最小码率失真优化(rate distortion optimization,RDO)原则等,确定是否对当前图像块进行划分。如果确定对当前图像块进行划分,则不需要在码流中编入表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方向的信息,因此该技术方案有助于节省传输比特开销。另外,该技术方案有助于将编码树中的叶节点的宽与高之比限制在一定范围之内,从而方便编码。In a possible design, determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block meets the first condition. The first condition includes that the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the first condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the horizontal direction. The horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located. Based on this, the current image block may or may not be divided subsequently. For example, whether to divide the current image block can be determined according to the block strategy of the current image block combined with other information, such as the principle of minimum CU size and the principle of minimum rate distortion optimization (RDO). If it is determined to divide the current image block, there is no need to incorporate information indicating the division direction of the current image block into the code stream, so this technical solution helps to save transmission bit overhead. In addition, the technical solution helps to limit the width-to-height ratio of leaf nodes in the coding tree to a certain range, thereby facilitating coding.
在一种可能的设计中,根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:确定当前图像块是否满足第二条件。第二条件包括:当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积。然后,在当前图像块不满足第二条件时,确定当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为竖直方向的划分。竖直方向垂直于当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。基于此,后续可以对当前图像块进行划分,也可以不对当前图像块进行划分。如果确定对当前图像块进行划分,则不需要在码流中编入表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方向的信息,因此该技术方案有助于节省传输比特开销。另外,该技术方案有助于将编码树中的叶节点的高与宽之比限制在一定范围之内,从而方便编码。In a possible design, according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block, determining the block division strategy of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block satisfies the second condition. The second condition includes that the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the second condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the vertical direction. The vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located. Based on this, the current image block may or may not be divided subsequently. If it is determined to divide the current image block, there is no need to incorporate information indicating the division direction of the current image block into the code stream, so this technical solution helps to save transmission bit overhead. In addition, the technical solution helps to limit the height to width ratio of leaf nodes in the coding tree within a certain range, thereby facilitating coding.
在一种可能的设计中,第一阈值是允许的编码树(如EQT方案中的第二级编码树等)中节点的长边长度与短边长度之比的最大值。In a possible design, the first threshold is the maximum value of the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the node in the allowed coding tree (such as the second-level coding tree in the EQT scheme).
在一种可能的设计中,第一阈值是大于1的值。可选的,第一阈值可以是2的整数次幂。In one possible design, the first threshold is a value greater than 1. Optionally, the first threshold may be an integer power of 2.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还可以包括:解析码流,以得到标识信息,该标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分类型。相应的,将该块划分策略应用于当前图像块以得到编码块,包括:基于块划分策略(具体是不满足第一条件时所确定的块划分策略),采用该标识信息所表示的划分类型,对当前图像块进行划分方向为竖直方向的划分,以得到编码块。在该可能的设计中,视频译码方法具体是视频解码方法。In a possible design, the method may further include: parsing the code stream to obtain identification information, where the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block. Correspondingly, applying the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain an encoded block includes: based on the block division strategy (specifically, the block division strategy determined when the first condition is not met), using the division type indicated by the identification information , Dividing the current image block into the vertical direction to obtain the coding block. In this possible design, the video decoding method is specifically a video decoding method.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还可以包括:解析码流,以得到标识信息,该标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分类型。相应的,将该块划分策略应用于当前图像块以得到编码块,包括:基于块划分策略(具体是不满足第二条件时所确定的块划分策略),采用该标识信息所表示的划分类型,对当前图像块进行划分方向为水平方向的划分。在该可能的设计中,视频译码方法具体是视频解码方法。In a possible design, the method may further include: parsing the code stream to obtain identification information, where the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block. Correspondingly, applying the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain an encoded block includes: based on the block division strategy (specifically, the block division strategy determined when the second condition is not met), using the division type indicated by the identification information To divide the current image block into the horizontal direction. In this possible design, the video decoding method is specifically a video decoding method.
在一种可能的设计中,根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:确定当前图像块是否满足第三条件。第三条件包括:当前图像块的宽小于第二阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积。然后,在当前图像块不满足第三条件时,确定块划分策略为划分方向为竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分。竖直方向垂直于当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。这样,当当前图像块的宽大于或等于第二阈值与高的乘积,且对当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时,不需要在码流中编入表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方向的信息,因此可以节省传输比特开销。另外,该技术方案有助于将编码树中的叶节点的宽与高之比限制在一定范围之内,从而方便编码。In a possible design, determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block meets the third condition. The third condition includes that the width of the current image block is smaller than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the third condition, the block division strategy is determined as an extended quadtree division with the division direction in the vertical direction. The vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located. In this way, when the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the second threshold and the height, and the current image block is expanded by quadtree division, there is no need to program the code stream to indicate the division direction of the current image block Information, so it can save the transmission bit overhead. In addition, the technical solution helps to limit the width-to-height ratio of leaf nodes in the coding tree to a certain range, thereby facilitating coding.
在一种可能的设计中,根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:确定当前图像块是否满足第四条件。第四条件包括:当前图像块的高小于第二阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积。然后,在当前图像块不满足第四条件时,确定块划分策略为划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分。水平方向垂直于当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。这样,当当前图像块的高大于或等于第二阈值与宽的乘积,且对当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时,不需要在码流中编入表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方向的信息,因此可以节省传输比特开销。另外,该技术方案有助于将编码树中的叶节点的高与宽之比限制在一定范围之内,从而方便编码。In a possible design, according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block, determining the block division strategy of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block satisfies the fourth condition. The fourth condition includes that the height of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the width of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the fourth condition, the block division strategy is determined to be an extended quadtree division with the division direction in the horizontal direction. The horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located. In this way, when the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the second threshold and the width, and the current image block is expanded by quadtree division, there is no need to program the code stream to indicate the division direction of the current image block Information, so it can save the transmission bit overhead. In addition, the technical solution helps to limit the height to width ratio of leaf nodes in the coding tree within a certain range, thereby facilitating coding.
在一种可能的设计中,根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:确定当前图像块是否满足第三条件。第三条件包括:当前图像块的宽小于第二阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积。然后在当前图像块不满足第三条件时,确定当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分,水平方向垂直于当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。基于此,后续可以对当前图像块进行划分,也可以不对当前图像块进行划分。In a possible design, determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block meets the third condition. The third condition includes that the width of the current image block is smaller than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the third condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the extended quadtree division in the horizontal direction, and the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located. Based on this, the current image block may or may not be divided subsequently.
在一种可能的设计中,根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:确定当前图像块是否满足第四条件。第四条件包括:当前图像块的高小于第二阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积。然后在当前图像块不满足第四条件时,确定当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分,竖直方 向垂直于当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。基于此,后续可以对当前图像块进行划分,也可以不对当前图像块进行划分。In a possible design, according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block, determining the block division strategy of the current image block includes: determining whether the current image block satisfies the fourth condition. The fourth condition includes that the height of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the width of the current image block. Then, when the current image block does not satisfy the fourth condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the extended quadtree division in the vertical direction, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block lies . Based on this, the current image block may or may not be divided subsequently.
在一种可能的设计中,第二阈值是允许的编码树(如EQT方案中的第二级编码树等)中节点的长边长度与短边长度之比的最大值的二分之一。In a possible design, the second threshold is one-half the maximum value of the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the allowed coding tree (such as the second-level coding tree in the EQT scheme).
在一种可能的设计中,第二阈值是大于1的值。可选的,第二阈值可以是2的整数次幂。In one possible design, the second threshold is a value greater than 1. Optionally, the second threshold may be an integer power of 2.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还可以包括:解析码流,以得到标识信息,该标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分类型。相应的,将块划分策略应用于当前图像块以得到编码块,包括:基于块划分策略(具体是不满足第三条件时所确定的块划分策略),当该标识信息表示对当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时,对当前图像块进行划分方向为竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分。在该可能的设计中,视频译码方法具体是视频解码方法。In a possible design, the method may further include: parsing the code stream to obtain identification information, where the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block. Correspondingly, applying the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain the encoded block includes: based on the block division strategy (specifically the block division strategy determined when the third condition is not met), when the identification information indicates that the current image block When the extended quadtree is divided, the current image block is divided into the extended quadtree in the vertical direction. In this possible design, the video decoding method is specifically a video decoding method.
在一种可能的设计中,该方法还可以包括:解析码流,以得到标识信息,该标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分类型。相应的,将该块划分策略应用于当前图像块以得到编码块,包括:基于块划分策略(具体是不满足第四条件时所确定的块划分策略),当该标识信息表示对当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时,对当前图像块进行划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分。在该可能的设计中,视频译码方法具体是视频解码方法。In a possible design, the method may further include: parsing the code stream to obtain identification information, where the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block. Correspondingly, applying the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain the coding block includes: based on the block division strategy (specifically the block division strategy determined when the fourth condition is not satisfied), when the identification information indicates that the current image block When the extended quadtree is divided, the current image block is divided into horizontal quadtrees. In this possible design, the video decoding method is specifically a video decoding method.
第二方面,提供了一种视频译码方法,包括:如果待译码图像中的待划分图像块的长边长度是待划分图像块的短边长度的二倍,则对待划分图像块进行划分方向垂直于待划分图像块的长边的二叉树划分,得到划分后的图像块。例如,如果待译码图像中的待划分图像块的宽是高的二倍,则对待划分图像块进行竖直二叉树划分,得到划分后的图像块。又如,如果待译码图像中的待划分图像块的高是宽的二倍,则对待划分图像块进行水平二叉树划分,得到划分后的图像块。然后,根据划分后的图像块,对待译码图像进行重构。这样,对待划分图像块进行有条件的划分,有助于降低划分复杂度,从而提高视频编解码性能。另外,如果待划分图像块的长边长度是待划分图像块的短边长度的二倍,则不需要在码流中编入表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方式(包括划分类型和划分方向)的信息,因此可以节省传输比特开销。另外,对当前图像块进行划分方向垂直于当前图像块的长边的二叉树划分,可以将当前图像块划分成两个正方形图像块,相比非正方形的矩形图像块来说,正方形图像块后续块被划分的可能性更高,因此,本技术方案有助于提高对视频图片的编码精确度。In a second aspect, a video decoding method is provided, including: if the length of the long side of the image block to be divided in the image to be decoded is twice the length of the short side of the image block to be divided, dividing the image block to be divided Binary tree division whose direction is perpendicular to the long side of the image block to be divided to obtain the divided image block. For example, if the width of the image block to be divided in the image to be decoded is twice the height, then the image block to be divided is divided into vertical binary trees to obtain the divided image block. For another example, if the height of the image block to be divided in the image to be decoded is twice as wide, then the image block to be divided is horizontally binary tree divided to obtain the divided image block. Then, according to the divided image blocks, the image to be decoded is reconstructed. In this way, the conditional division of the image blocks to be divided is helpful to reduce the division complexity, thereby improving the video codec performance. In addition, if the length of the long side of the image block to be divided is twice the length of the short side of the image block to be divided, there is no need to program the division method (including the division type and division direction) of the current image block into the code stream. ) Information, so transmission bit overhead can be saved. In addition, by dividing the current image block into a binary tree perpendicular to the long side of the current image block, the current image block can be divided into two square image blocks. Compared with the non-square rectangular image block, the subsequent block of the square image block The possibility of being divided is higher, therefore, the technical solution helps to improve the encoding accuracy of video pictures.
在一种可能的设计中,待划分图像块的长边长度为128个像素长度,短边长度为64个像素长度。例如,当待划分图像块的尺寸是128*64(即宽是128个像素长度,高是64个像素长度)时,对待划分图像块进行竖直二叉树划分。又如,当待划分图像块的尺寸是64*128(即宽是64个像素长度,高是128个像素长度)时,对待划分图像块进行水平二叉树划分。In a possible design, the long side of the image block to be divided is 128 pixels long, and the short side is 64 pixels long. For example, when the size of the image block to be divided is 128*64 (that is, the width is 128 pixels in length and the height is 64 pixels in length), the image block to be divided is divided into vertical binary trees. As another example, when the size of the image block to be divided is 64*128 (that is, the width is 64 pixel lengths and the height is 128 pixel lengths), the image block to be divided is divided into horizontal binary trees.
在一种可能的设计中,待划分图像块的短边长度等于最大变换单元(transform unit,TU)的边尺寸,或者,待划分图像块的短边长度等于虚拟流水数据单元(virtual pipeline data unit,VPDU)的边尺寸。In a possible design, the length of the short side of the image block to be divided is equal to the side size of the maximum transform unit (TU), or the length of the short side of the image block to be divided is equal to the virtual pipeline data unit (virtual pipeline data unit) , VPDU) side dimensions.
在一种可能的设计中,待划分图像块是边界图像块。其中,如果当前节点中存在一个或者一个以上的像素超出了当前图像边界,则称当前节点超出图像边界,该情况下,当前节点为边界图像块。In a possible design, the image blocks to be divided are boundary image blocks. Wherein, if one or more pixels in the current node exceed the current image boundary, the current node is said to exceed the image boundary. In this case, the current node is a boundary image block.
第三方面,提供了一种视频译码方法,包括:如果待译码图像中的待划分图像块的宽大于高,则对待划分图像块进行竖直二叉树划分,得到划分后的图像块;和/或,如果待译码图像中的待划分图像块的高大于宽,则对待划分图像块进行水平二叉树划分,得到划分后的图像块。然后,根据划分后的图像块,对待译码图像进行重构。这样,对待划分图像块进行有条件的划分,有助于降低划分复杂度,从而提高视频编解码性能。另外,本技术方案不需要在码流中编入表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方式(包括划分类型和划分方向)的信息,因此可以节省传输比特开销。另外,本技术方案中将当前图像块划分成两个正方形图像块,相比非正方形的矩形图像块来说,正方形图像块后续块被划分的可能性更高,因此,本技术方案有助于提高对视频图片的编码精确度。In a third aspect, a video decoding method is provided, which includes: if the width of the image block to be divided in the image to be decoded is greater than the height, vertical binary tree division is performed on the image block to be divided to obtain the divided image block; and /Or, if the height of the image block to be divided in the image to be decoded is greater than the width, then the image block to be divided is divided into horizontal binary trees to obtain the divided image block. Then, according to the divided image blocks, the image to be decoded is reconstructed. In this way, the conditional division of the image blocks to be divided is helpful to reduce the division complexity, thereby improving the video codec performance. In addition, the technical solution does not need to include information indicating the division manner (including division type and division direction) of dividing the current image block in the code stream, so transmission bit overhead can be saved. In addition, in this technical solution, the current image block is divided into two square image blocks. Compared with a non-square rectangular image block, the subsequent blocks of the square image block are more likely to be divided. Therefore, this technical solution helps Improve the encoding accuracy of video pictures.
在一种可能的设计中,当待划分图像块的尺寸是128*64(即宽是128个像素长度,高是64个像素长度)时,对待划分图像块进行竖直二叉树划分。In a possible design, when the size of the image block to be divided is 128*64 (that is, the width is 128 pixels in length and the height is 64 pixels in length), the image block to be divided is divided into vertical binary trees.
在一种可能的设计中,当待划分图像块的尺寸是64*128(即宽是64个像素长度,高是128个像素长度)时,对待划分图像块进行水平二叉树划分。In a possible design, when the size of the image block to be divided is 64*128 (that is, the width is 64 pixels in length and the height is 128 pixels in length), the image block to be divided is divided into horizontal binary trees.
在一种可能的设计中,待划分图像块是边界图像块。In a possible design, the image blocks to be divided are boundary image blocks.
第四方面,提供了一种视频译码方法,包括:根据当前图像块是否满足第一条件,确定是否允许对当前图像块进行水平方向的二叉树划分,水平方向垂直于当前图像块的高所在的边的方向,第一条件包括:当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积,其中,在当前图像块满足所述第一条件的情况下,确定允许对当前图像块进行水平方向的二叉树划分;在确定允许对当前图像块进行水平方向的二叉树划分的情况下,获取当前图像块的编码块;通过对得到的编码块进行重构以实现对当前图像块的重构。这样,有条件地对当前图像块进行划分,从而得到编码块,这样,有助于降低划分复杂度,从而提高视频编解码性能。According to a fourth aspect, a video decoding method is provided, which includes: according to whether the current image block satisfies the first condition, determining whether to allow the current image block to be divided in a horizontal direction by a binary tree, where the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the height of the current image block For the direction of the edge, the first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block satisfies the first condition, it is determined to allow the current image block Binary tree division in the horizontal direction; if it is determined that the current image block is allowed to be divided in the horizontal direction, the coding block of the current image block is obtained; the reconstruction of the current image block is achieved by reconstructing the obtained coding block. In this way, the current image block is conditionally divided to obtain an encoding block, which helps to reduce the complexity of the division and thereby improve the performance of video encoding and decoding.
第五方面,提供了一种视频译码方法,包括:根据当前图像块是否满足第二条件,确定是否允许对当前图像块进行竖直方向的二叉树划分,竖直方向垂直于当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向,第二条件包括:当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积,其中,在当前图像块满足所述第二条件的情况下,确定允许对当前图像块进行竖直方向的二叉树划分;在确定允许对当前图像块进行竖直方向的二叉树划分的情况下,获取当前图像块的编码块;通过对得到的编码块进行重构以实现对当前图像块的重构。这样,有条件地对当前图像块进行划分,从而得到编码块,这样,有助于降低划分复杂度,从而提高视频编解码性能。According to a fifth aspect, a video decoding method is provided, which includes: according to whether a current image block satisfies a second condition, determining whether to allow a binary tree division of the current image block in a vertical direction, the vertical direction being perpendicular to the width of the current image block In the direction of the edge, the second condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block meets the second condition, it is determined that the current image is allowed The block is divided into two binary trees in the vertical direction; if it is determined that the current image block is allowed to be divided in the vertical direction, the coding block of the current image block is obtained; the current image block is realized by reconstructing the obtained coding block Refactoring. In this way, the current image block is conditionally divided to obtain an encoding block, which helps to reduce the complexity of the division and thereby improve the performance of video encoding and decoding.
第六方面,提供了一种视频译码方法,包括:根据当前图像块是否满足第一条件,确定是否允许对当前图像块进行水平方向的划分,水平方向垂直于当前图像块的高所在的边的方向,第一条件包括:当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积,其中,在当前图像块不满足所述第一条件的情况下,确定不允许对当前图像块进行水平方向的划分;在确定不允许对当前图像块进行水平方向的划分的情况下,获取 当前图像块的编码块;通过对得到的所述编码块进行重构以实现对当前图像块的重构。这样,有条件地对当前图像块进行划分,从而得到编码块,这样,有助于降低划分复杂度,从而提高视频编解码性能。According to a sixth aspect, a video decoding method is provided, which includes: according to whether the current image block satisfies the first condition, determining whether to allow the current image block to be divided in a horizontal direction, the horizontal direction being perpendicular to the high side of the current image block Direction, the first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block does not meet the first condition, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed Divide the horizontal direction; if it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to be divided horizontally, obtain the coding block of the current image block; by reconstructing the obtained coding block, the current image block is re-implemented Structure. In this way, the current image block is conditionally divided to obtain an encoding block, which helps to reduce the complexity of the division and thereby improve the performance of video encoding and decoding.
第七方面,提供了一种视频译码方法,包括:根据当前图像块是否满足第二条件,确定是否允许对当前图像块进行竖直方向的划分,竖直方向垂直于当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向,第二条件包括:当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积,其中,在当前图像块不满足第二条件的情况下,确定不允许对当前图像块进行竖直方向的划分;在确定不允许对当前图像块进行竖直方向的划分的情况下,获取当前图像块的编码块;通过对得到的编码块进行重构以实现对当前图像块的重构。这样,有条件地对当前图像块进行划分,从而得到编码块,这样,有助于降低划分复杂度,从而提高视频编解码性能。According to a seventh aspect, a video decoding method is provided, which includes: according to whether the current image block satisfies the second condition, determine whether to allow the current image block to be divided in the vertical direction, where the vertical direction is perpendicular to the width of the current image block The direction of the edge, the second condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block does not meet the second condition, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed Perform the vertical division; when it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to be divided vertically, obtain the coding block of the current image block; by reconstructing the obtained coding block to achieve the re-weight of the current image block Structure. In this way, the current image block is conditionally divided to obtain an encoding block, which helps to reduce the complexity of the division and thereby improve the performance of video encoding and decoding.
第八方面,提供了一种视频译码装置,该装置包括用于执行上述第一方面或第二方面或第三方面,或者第一方面或第二方面或第三方面中的任意一种可能的设计中的方法的模块(或单元)。According to an eighth aspect, a video decoding apparatus is provided, the apparatus including the first aspect or the second aspect or the third aspect, or any one of the first aspect or the second aspect or the third aspect The module (or unit) of the method in the design.
第九方面,提供了一种视频译码器,该视频译码器包括:相互耦合的非易失性存储器和处理器。该处理器调用存储在该存储器中的程序代码以执行第一方面至第七方面中的任一方面,或者第一方面或至第七方面中的任意一种可能的设计中的方法的部分或全部步骤。In a ninth aspect, a video decoder is provided. The video decoder includes: a nonvolatile memory and a processor coupled to each other. The processor calls the program code stored in the memory to perform any one of the first aspect to the seventh aspect, or a part of the method in any possible design of the first aspect or the seventh aspect or All steps.
第十方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储了程序代码,其中,该程序代码包括用于执行第一方面至第七方面中的任一方面,或者第一方面至第七方面中的任意一种实现方式中的方法的部分或全部步骤的指令。According to a tenth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided. The computer-readable storage medium stores a program code, wherein the program code includes any of the first to seventh aspects, or the first Instructions for any or all steps of the method in any one of the implementation manners of the aspect to the seventh aspect.
第十一方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面至第七方面中的任一方面,或者第一方面至第七方面中的任意一种实现方式中的方法的部分或全部步骤的指令。According to an eleventh aspect, there is provided a computer program product which, when run on a computer, causes the computer to perform any one of the first aspect to the seventh aspect, or any one of the first aspect to the seventh aspect Instructions for some or all steps of a method in an implementation.
应当理解的是,上述提供的任一种视频译码装置、视频译码器、计算机可读存储介质和计算机程序产品的有益效果均可以对应参考上文对应方面提供的方法实施例的有益效果,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that the beneficial effects of any of the video decoding apparatus, video decoder, computer readable storage medium, and computer program product provided above can correspond to the beneficial effects of the method embodiments provided in the corresponding aspects above, I won't repeat them here.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION
图1A为本申请实施例所应用的一种视频编码及解码系统的示意性框图;1A is a schematic block diagram of a video encoding and decoding system applied in an embodiment of this application;
图1B为本申请实施例所应用的另一种视频编码及解码系统的示意性框图;1B is a schematic block diagram of another video encoding and decoding system applied in an embodiment of this application;
图2为实现本申请实施例的一种编码器的实例的示意性/概念性框图;2 is a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of an encoder implementing an embodiment of the present application;
图3为实现本申请实施例的一种解码器的实例的示意性/概念性框图;3 is a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of a decoder implementing an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种视频译码设备的结构示意图;4 is a schematic structural diagram of a video decoding device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例的译码设备的一种实现方式的示意性框图;5 is a schematic block diagram of an implementation manner of a decoding device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图6为可适用于本申请实施例的几种划分方式的示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of several division methods applicable to embodiments of the present application;
图7为可适用于本申请实施例的一种编码树及其对应的划分方式的示意图;7 is a schematic diagram of a coding tree and its corresponding division method applicable to embodiments of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种视频译码方法的流程示意图;8 is a schematic flowchart of a video decoding method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种图像块划分方法的流程示意图;9 is a schematic flowchart of an image block division method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的另一种图像块划分方法的流程示意图;10 is a schematic flowchart of another image block division method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的另一种图像块划分方法的流程示意图;11 is a schematic flowchart of another image block division method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的另一种图像块划分方法的流程示意图;12 is a schematic flowchart of another image block division method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种视频编码方法的流程示意图;13 is a schematic flowchart of a video encoding method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的一种视频解码方法的流程示意图;14 is a schematic flowchart of a video decoding method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图15为本申请实施例提供的一种视频译码器的结构示意图;15 is a schematic structural diagram of a video decoder provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的另一种视频译码器的结构示意图;16 is a schematic structural diagram of another video decoder provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图17为可适用于本申请实施例的一种视频通信系统的示意图;17 is a schematic diagram of a video communication system applicable to embodiments of the present application;
图18为本申请实施例提供的另一种视频解码方法的流程示意图;18 is a schematic flowchart of another video decoding method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图19为本申请实施例提供的另一种视频解码方法的流程示意图。FIG. 19 is a schematic flowchart of another video decoding method according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面结合本申请实施例中的附图对本申请实施例进行描述。以下描述中,参考形成本公开一部分并以说明之方式示出本申请实施例的具体方面或可使用本申请实施例的具体方面的附图。应理解,本申请实施例可在其它方面中使用,并可包括附图中未描绘的结构或逻辑变化。因此,以下详细描述不应以限制性的意义来理解,且本申请的范围由所附权利要求书界定。例如,应理解,结合所描述方法的揭示内容可以同样适用于用于执行所述方法的对应设备或系统,且反之亦然。例如,如果描述一个或多个具体方法步骤,则对应的设备可以包含如功能单元等一个或多个单元,来执行所描述的一个或多个方法步骤(例如,一个单元执行一个或多个步骤,或多个单元,其中每个都执行多个步骤中的一个或多个),即使附图中未明确描述或说明这种一个或多个单元。另一方面,例如,如果基于如功能单元等一个或多个单元描述具体装置,则对应的方法可以包含一个步骤来执行一个或多个单元的功能性(例如,一个步骤执行一个或多个单元的功能性,或多个步骤,其中每个执行多个单元中一个或多个单元的功能性),即使附图中未明确描述或说明这种一个或多个步骤。进一步,应理解的是,除非另外明确提出,本文中所描述的各示例性实施例和/或方面的特征可以相互组合。The following describes the embodiments of the present application with reference to the drawings in the embodiments of the present application. In the following description, reference is made to the accompanying drawings that form a part of the present disclosure and illustrate specific aspects of the embodiments of the present application by way of illustration or may use specific aspects of the embodiments of the present application. It should be understood that the embodiments of the present application may be used in other aspects, and may include structural or logical changes not depicted in the drawings. Therefore, the following detailed description should not be interpreted in a restrictive sense, and the scope of the present application is defined by the appended claims. For example, it should be understood that the disclosure in conjunction with the described method may be equally applicable to the corresponding device or system for performing the method, and vice versa. For example, if one or more specific method steps are described, the corresponding device may contain one or more units such as functional units to perform the one or more method steps described (eg, one unit performs one or more steps , Or multiple units, each of which performs one or more of multiple steps), even if such one or more units are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings. On the other hand, for example, if a specific device is described based on one or more units such as a functional unit, the corresponding method may include a step to perform the functionality of one or more units (eg, one step executes one or more units Functionality, or multiple steps, each of which performs the functionality of one or more of the multiple units), even if such one or more steps are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings. Further, it should be understood that, unless expressly stated otherwise, the features of the exemplary embodiments and/or aspects described herein may be combined with each other.
视频编码通常是指处理形成视频或视频序列的图片序列。在视频编码领域,术语“图片(picture)”、“帧(frame)”或“图像(image)”可以用作同义词。本文中使用的视频译码表示视频编码或视频解码。视频编码在源侧执行,通常包括处理(例如,通过压缩)原始视频图片以减少表示该视频图片所需的数据量,从而更高效地存储和/或传输。视频解码在目的地侧执行,通常包括相对于编码器作逆处理,以重构视频图片。实施例涉及的视频图片“编码”应理解为涉及视频序列的“编码”或“解码”。编码部分和解码部分的组合也称为编解码(编码和解码)。Video coding generally refers to processing a sequence of pictures that form a video or video sequence. In the field of video coding, the terms "picture", "frame" or "image" may be used as synonyms. Video coding as used herein refers to video encoding or video decoding. Video encoding is performed on the source side, and usually includes processing (eg, by compressing) the original video picture to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture, thereby storing and/or transmitting more efficiently. Video decoding is performed on the destination side and usually involves inverse processing relative to the encoder to reconstruct the video picture. The “encoding” of video pictures involved in the embodiments should be understood as referring to the “encoding” or “decoding” of video sequences. The combination of the encoding part and the decoding part is also called codec (encoding and decoding).
视频序列包括一系列图像(picture),图像被进一步划分为切片(slice),切片再被划分为块(block)。视频编码以块为单位进行编码处理,在一些新的视频编码标准中,块的概念被进一步扩展。比如,宏块可进一步划分成多个可用于预测编码的预测块(partition)。或者,采用编码单元(即CU),预测单元(prediction unit,PU)和变换单元(即TU)等基本概念,从功能上划分了多种块单元,并采用全新的基于树结构进行描述。对于PU和TU也有类似的树结构,PU可以对应预测块,是预测编码的基本单元。对CU按照划分模式进一步划分成多个PU。TU可以对应变换块,是对预测残差进行变换的基本单元。然而,无论CU,PU还是TU,本质上都属于块(或 称图像块)的概念。The video sequence includes a series of pictures, which are further divided into slices, and the slices are further divided into blocks. Video coding is performed in units of blocks. In some new video coding standards, the concept of blocks is further expanded. For example, a macroblock can be further divided into multiple prediction blocks that can be used for predictive coding. Or, basic concepts such as coding unit (ie CU), prediction unit (prediction unit (PU) and transform unit (ie TU) are used, functionally divided into various block units, and a new tree-based structure is used for description. There is a similar tree structure for PU and TU. PU can correspond to the prediction block and is the basic unit of predictive coding. The CU is further divided into multiple PUs according to the division mode. The TU can correspond to the transform block and is the basic unit for transforming the prediction residual. However, regardless of CU, PU or TU, they all belong to the concept of block (or image block) in essence.
通过使用表示为编码树的四叉树结构将编码树单元(编码树(coding tree unit,CTU)中的)拆分为多个CU。在CU层级处作出是否使用图片间(时间)或图片内(空间)预测对图片区域进行编码的决策。每个CU可以根据PU拆分类型进一步拆分为一个、两个或四个PU。一个PU内应用相同的预测过程,并在PU基础上将相关信息传输到解码器。在通过基于PU拆分类型应用预测过程获取残差块之后,可以根据类似于用于CU的编码树的其它四叉树结构将CU划分成TU。在视频压缩技术最新的发展中,使用四叉树和二叉树(quad-tree and binary tree,QTBT)划分帧来划分编码块。在QTBT块结构中,CU可以为正方形或矩形形状。The coding tree unit (in the coding tree (CTU)) is split into multiple CUs by using a quadtree structure represented as a coding tree. A decision is made at the CU level whether to use inter-picture (temporal) or intra-picture (spatial) prediction to encode picture regions. Each CU can be further split into one, two, or four PUs according to the PU split type. The same prediction process is applied within a PU, and related information is transmitted to the decoder on the basis of the PU. After obtaining the residual block by applying a prediction process based on the PU split type, the CU may be divided into TUs according to other quadtree structures similar to the coding tree used for the CU. In the latest development of video compression technology, quad-tree and binary-tree (QTBT) are used to divide frames to divide coding blocks. In the QTBT block structure, the CU may have a square or rectangular shape.
本文中,为了便于描述和理解,可将当前编码图像中待编码的图像块称为当前块(或当前图像块),例如在编码中,指当前正在编码的块;在解码中,指当前正在解码的块。将参考图像中用于对当前块进行预测的已解码的图像块称为参考块,即参考块是为当前块提供参考信号的块,其中,参考信号表示图像块内的像素值。可将参考图像中为当前块提供预测信号的块为预测块,其中,预测信号表示预测块内的像素值或者采样值或者采样信号。例如,在遍历多个参考块以后,找到了最佳参考块,此最佳参考块将为当前块提供预测,此块称为预测块。In this article, for ease of description and understanding, the image block to be encoded in the current encoded image may be referred to as the current block (or current image block). For example, in encoding, it refers to the block currently being encoded; in decoding, it refers to the current Decoded block. The decoded image block used to predict the current block in the reference image is referred to as a reference block, that is, the reference block is a block that provides a reference signal for the current block, where the reference signal represents a pixel value within the image block. The block in the reference image that provides the prediction signal for the current block may be a prediction block, where the prediction signal represents a pixel value or a sample value or a sample signal within the prediction block. For example, after traversing multiple reference blocks, the best reference block is found. This best reference block will provide a prediction for the current block. This block is called a prediction block.
无损视频编码情况下,可以重构原始视频图片,即经重构视频图片具有与原始视频图片相同的质量(假设存储或传输期间没有传输损耗或其它数据丢失)。在有损视频编码情况下,通过例如量化执行进一步压缩,来减少表示视频图片所需的数据量,而解码器侧无法完全重构视频图片,即经重构视频图片的质量相比原始视频图片的质量较低或较差。In the case of lossless video coding, the original video picture can be reconstructed, that is, the reconstructed video picture has the same quality as the original video picture (assuming no transmission loss or other data loss during storage or transmission). In the case of lossy video encoding, further compression is performed by, for example, quantization to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture, but the decoder side cannot fully reconstruct the video picture, that is, the quality of the reconstructed video picture is better than the original video picture. The quality is lower or worse.
H.261的几个视频编码标准属于“有损混合型视频编解码”(即,将样本域中的空间和时间预测与变换域中用于应用量化的2D变换编码结合)。视频序列的每个图片通常划分成不重叠的块集合,通常在块层级上进行编码。换句话说,编码器侧通常在块(视频块)层级处理亦即编码视频,例如,通过空间(图片内)预测和时间(图片间)预测来产生预测块,从当前块(当前处理或待处理的块)减去预测块以获取残差块,在变换域变换残差块并量化残差块,以减少待传输(压缩)的数据量,而解码器侧将相对于编码器的逆处理部分应用于经编码或经压缩块,以重构用于表示的当前块。另外,编码器复制解码器处理循环,使得编码器和解码器生成相同的预测(例如帧内预测和帧间预测)和/或重构,用于处理亦即编码后续块。Several video coding standards of H.261 belong to "lossy hybrid video codec" (ie, combining spatial and temporal prediction in the sample domain with 2D transform coding for applying quantization in the transform domain). Each picture of a video sequence is usually divided into non-overlapping block sets, which are usually encoded at the block level. In other words, the encoder side usually processes the encoded video at the block (video block) level. For example, the prediction block is generated by spatial (intra-picture) prediction and temporal (inter-picture) prediction. From the current block (current processing or pending) Processed block) subtract the prediction block to obtain the residual block, transform the residual block in the transform domain and quantize the residual block to reduce the amount of data to be transmitted (compressed), and the decoder side will perform inverse processing relative to the encoder Partially applied to coded or compressed blocks to reconstruct the current block for representation. In addition, the encoder duplicates the decoder processing loop so that the encoder and decoder generate the same prediction (eg, intra prediction and inter prediction) and/or reconstruction for processing, ie encoding subsequent blocks.
下面描述本申请实施例所应用的系统架构。参见图1A,图1A示例性地给出了本申请实施例所应用的视频编码及解码系统10的示意性框图。如图1A所示,视频编码及解码系统10可包括源设备12和目的地设备14,源设备12产生经编码视频数据,因此,源设备12可被称为视频编码装置。目的地设备14可对由源设备12所产生的经编码的视频数据进行解码,因此,目的地设备14可被称为视频解码装置。源设备12、目的地设备14或两个的各种实施方案可包含一或多个处理器以及耦合到所述一或多个处理器的存储器。所述存储器可包含但不限于RAM、ROM、EEPROM、快闪存储器或可用于以可由计算机存取的指令或数据结构的形式存储所要的程序代码的任何其它媒体,如本文所描述。The system architecture applied in the embodiments of the present application is described below. Referring to FIG. 1A, FIG. 1A exemplarily shows a schematic block diagram of a video encoding and decoding system 10 applied in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1A, the video encoding and decoding system 10 may include a source device 12 and a destination device 14, the source device 12 generates encoded video data, and therefore, the source device 12 may be referred to as a video encoding device. The destination device 14 may decode the encoded video data generated by the source device 12, and therefore, the destination device 14 may be referred to as a video decoding device. Various implementations of source device 12, destination device 14, or both may include one or more processors and memory coupled to the one or more processors. The memory may include, but is not limited to, RAM, ROM, EEPROM, flash memory, or any other medium that can be used to store the desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures accessible by the computer, as described herein.
源设备12和目的地设备14之间可通过链路13进行通信连接,目的地设备14可经由链路13从源设备12接收经编码视频数据。链路13可包括能够将经编码视频数据从源设备12移动到目的地设备14的一或多个媒体或装置。在一个实例中,链路13可包括使得源设备12能够实时将经编码视频数据直接发射到目的地设备14的一或多个通信媒体。在此实例中,源设备12可根据通信标准(例如无线通信协议)来调制经编码视频数据,且可将经调制的视频数据发射到目的地设备14。所述一或多个通信媒体可包含无线和/或有线通信媒体,例如射频(RF)频谱或一或多个物理传输线。所述一或多个通信媒体可形成基于分组的网络的一部分,基于分组的网络例如为局域网、广域网或全球网络(例如,因特网)。所述一或多个通信媒体可包含路由器、交换器、基站或促进从源设备12到目的地设备14的通信的其它设备。The communication connection between the source device 12 and the destination device 14 may be via a link 13, and the destination device 14 may receive the encoded video data from the source device 12 via the link 13. Link 13 may include one or more media or devices capable of moving encoded video data from source device 12 to destination device 14. In one example, link 13 may include one or more communication media that enable source device 12 to transmit encoded video data directly to destination device 14 in real time. In this example, the source device 12 may modulate the encoded video data according to a communication standard (eg, a wireless communication protocol), and may transmit the modulated video data to the destination device 14. The one or more communication media may include wireless and/or wired communication media, such as a radio frequency (RF) spectrum or one or more physical transmission lines. The one or more communication media may form part of a packet-based network, such as a local area network, a wide area network, or a global network (eg, the Internet). The one or more communication media may include routers, switches, base stations, or other devices that facilitate communication from source device 12 to destination device 14.
源设备12包括编码器20,另外可选地,源设备12还可以包括图片源16、图片预处理器18、以及通信接口22。具体实现形态中,编码器20、图片源16、图片预处理器18、以及通信接口22可能是源设备12中的硬件部件,也可能是源设备12中的软件程序。分别描述如下:The source device 12 includes an encoder 20. Alternatively, the source device 12 may further include a picture source 16, a picture pre-processor 18, and a communication interface 22. In a specific implementation form, the encoder 20, the picture source 16, the picture pre-processor 18, and the communication interface 22 may be hardware components in the source device 12, or may be software programs in the source device 12. They are described as follows:
图片源16,可以包括或可以为任何类别的图片捕获设备,用于例如捕获现实世界图片,和/或任何类别的图片或评论(对于屏幕内容编码,屏幕上的一些文字也认为是待编码的图片或图像的一部分)生成设备,例如,用于生成计算机动画图片的计算机图形处理器,或用于获取和/或提供现实世界图片、计算机动画图片(例如,屏幕内容、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)图片)的任何类别设备,和/或其任何组合(例如,实景(augmented reality,AR)图片)。图片源16可以为用于捕获图片的相机或者用于存储图片的存储器,图片源16还可以包括存储先前捕获或产生的图片和/或获取或接收图片的任何类别的(内部或外部)接口。当图片源16为相机时,图片源16可例如为本地的或集成在源设备中的集成相机;当图片源16为存储器时,图片源16可为本地的或例如集成在源设备中的集成存储器。当所述图片源16包括接口时,接口可例如为从外部视频源接收图片的外部接口,外部视频源例如为外部图片捕获设备,比如相机、外部存储器或外部图片生成设备,外部图片生成设备例如为外部计算机图形处理器、计算机或服务器。接口可以为根据任何专有或标准化接口协议的任何类别的接口,例如有线或无线接口、光接口。 Picture source 16, which can include or can be any type of picture capture device, for example to capture real-world pictures, and/or any type of picture or comment (for screen content encoding, some text on the screen is also considered to be encoded Part of the picture or image) generation device, for example, a computer graphics processor for generating computer animation pictures, or for acquiring and/or providing real-world pictures, computer animation pictures (for example, screen content, virtual reality, VR) pictures) in any category of equipment, and/or any combination thereof (eg, augmented reality (AR) pictures). The picture source 16 may be a camera for capturing pictures or a memory for storing pictures. The picture source 16 may also include any type of (internal or external) interface that stores previously captured or generated pictures and/or acquires or receives pictures. When the picture source 16 is a camera, the picture source 16 may be, for example, a local or integrated camera integrated in the source device; when the picture source 16 is a memory, the picture source 16 may be a local or integrated, for example, integrated in the source device Memory. When the picture source 16 includes an interface, the interface may be, for example, an external interface that receives pictures from an external video source. The external video source is, for example, an external picture capture device, such as a camera, an external memory, or an external picture generation device. The external picture generation device, for example It is an external computer graphics processor, computer or server. The interface may be any type of interface according to any proprietary or standardized interface protocol, such as a wired or wireless interface, an optical interface.
其中,图片可以视为像素点(picture element)的二维阵列或矩阵。阵列中的像素点也可以称为采样点。阵列或图片在水平和垂直方向(或轴线)上的采样点数目定义图片的尺寸和/或分辨率。为了表示颜色,通常采用三个颜色分量,即图片可以表示为或包含三个采样阵列。例如在RBG格式或颜色空间中,图片包括对应的红色、绿色及蓝色采样阵列。但是,在视频编码中,每个像素通常以亮度/色度格式或颜色空间表示,例如对于YUV格式的图片,包括Y指示的亮度分量(有时也可以用L指示)以及U和V指示的两个色度分量。亮度(luma)分量Y表示亮度或灰度水平强度(例如,在灰度等级图片中两者相同),而两个色度(chroma)分量U和V表示色度或颜色信息分量。相应地,YUV格式的图片包括亮度采样值(Y)的亮度采样阵列,和色度值(U和V)的两个色度采样阵列。RGB格式的图片可以转换或变换为YUV格式,反之亦然,该过程也称为色彩变换或转换。如果图片是黑白的,该图片可以只包括亮度采样 阵列。本申请实施例中,由图片源16传输至图片处理器的图片也可称为原始图片数据17。The picture can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of picture elements. The pixels in the array can also be called sampling points. The number of sampling points in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the array or picture defines the size and/or resolution of the picture. In order to represent colors, three color components are usually used, that is, a picture can be represented or contain three sampling arrays. For example, in the RBG format or color space, the picture includes corresponding red, green, and blue sampling arrays. However, in video coding, each pixel is usually expressed in a luminance/chrominance format or color space. For example, for a picture in YUV format, it includes the luminance component indicated by Y (sometimes also indicated by L) and the two indicated by U and V. Chroma components. The luma component Y represents luminance or gray-scale horizontal intensity (for example, both are the same in gray-scale pictures), and the two chroma components U and V represent chroma or color information components. Accordingly, the picture in the YUV format includes a luminance sampling array of luminance sampling values (Y), and two chrominance sampling arrays of chrominance values (U and V). RGB format pictures can be converted or transformed into YUV format and vice versa, this process is also called color transformation or conversion. If the picture is black and white, the picture may include only the brightness sampling array. In the embodiment of the present application, the picture transmitted from the picture source 16 to the picture processor may also be referred to as original picture data 17.
图片预处理器18,用于接收原始图片数据17并对原始图片数据17执行预处理,以获取经预处理的图片19或经预处理的图片数据19。例如,图片预处理器18执行的预处理可以包括整修、色彩格式转换(例如,从RGB格式转换为YUV格式)、调色或去噪。The picture pre-processor 18 is configured to receive the original picture data 17 and perform pre-processing on the original picture data 17 to obtain the pre-processed picture 19 or the pre-processed picture data 19. For example, the pre-processing performed by the picture pre-processor 18 may include trimming, color format conversion (eg, conversion from RGB format to YUV format), color grading, or denoising.
编码器20(或称视频编码器20),用于接收经预处理的图片数据19,采用相关预测模式(如本文各个实施例中的预测模式)对经预处理的图片数据19进行处理,从而提供经编码图片数据21(下文将进一步基于图2或图4或图5描述编码器20的结构细节)。在一些实施例中,编码器20可以用于执行后文所描述的各个实施例,以实现本申请所描述的划分方法在编码侧的应用。The encoder 20 (or video encoder 20) is used to receive the pre-processed picture data 19, and process the pre-processed picture data 19 in a related prediction mode (such as the prediction mode in various embodiments herein), thereby The encoded picture data 21 is provided (the structural details of the encoder 20 will be further described below based on FIG. 2 or FIG. 4 or FIG. 5). In some embodiments, the encoder 20 may be used to execute various embodiments described below to implement the application of the division method described in this application on the encoding side.
通信接口22,可用于接收经编码图片数据21,并可通过链路13将经编码图片数据21传输至目的地设备14或任何其它设备(如存储器),以用于存储或直接重构,所述其它设备可为任何用于解码或存储的设备。通信接口22可例如用于将经编码图片数据21封装成合适的格式,例如数据包,以在链路13上传输。The communication interface 22 can be used to receive the encoded picture data 21, and can transmit the encoded picture data 21 to the destination device 14 or any other device (such as a memory) via the link 13 for storage or direct reconstruction. The other device may be any device used for decoding or storage. The communication interface 22 may be used, for example, to encapsulate the encoded picture data 21 into a suitable format, such as a data packet, for transmission on the link 13.
目的地设备14包括解码器30,另外可选地,目的地设备14还可以包括通信接口28、图片后处理器32和显示设备34。分别描述如下:The destination device 14 includes a decoder 30, and optionally, the destination device 14 may further include a communication interface 28, a post-picture processor 32, and a display device 34. They are described as follows:
通信接口28,可用于从源设备12或任何其它源接收经编码图片数据21,所述任何其它源例如为存储设备,存储设备例如为经编码图片数据存储设备。通信接口28可以用于藉由源设备12和目的地设备14之间的链路13或藉由任何类别的网络传输或接收经编码图片数据21,链路13例如为直接有线或无线连接,任何类别的网络例如为有线或无线网络或其任何组合,或任何类别的私网和公网,或其任何组合。通信接口28可以例如用于解封装通信接口22所传输的数据包以获取经编码图片数据21。The communication interface 28 may be used to receive the encoded picture data 21 from the source device 12 or any other source, such as a storage device, such as an encoded picture data storage device. The communication interface 28 can be used to transmit or receive the encoded picture data 21 through the link 13 between the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or through any type of network. The link 13 is, for example, a direct wired or wireless connection. A network of a category is, for example, a wired or wireless network or any combination thereof, or a private network and a public network of any category, or any combination thereof. The communication interface 28 may be used, for example, to decapsulate the data packet transmitted by the communication interface 22 to obtain the encoded picture data 21.
通信接口28和通信接口22都可以配置为单向通信接口或者双向通信接口,以及可以用于例如发送和接收消息来建立连接、确认和交换任何其它与通信链路和/或例如经编码图片数据传输的数据传输有关的信息。Both the communication interface 28 and the communication interface 22 may be configured as a one-way communication interface or a two-way communication interface, and may be used, for example, to send and receive messages to establish a connection, confirm and exchange any other communication link and/or for example encoded picture data Information about data transmission.
解码器30(或称为解码器30),用于接收经编码图片数据21并提供经解码图片数据31或经解码图片31(下文将进一步基于图3或图4或图5描述解码器30的结构细节)。在一些实施例中,解码器30可以用于执行后文所描述的各个实施例,以实现本申请所描述的划分方法在解码侧的应用。The decoder 30 (or referred to as the decoder 30) is used to receive the encoded picture data 21 and provide the decoded picture data 31 or the decoded picture 31 (hereinafter, the decoder 30 will be further described based on FIG. 3 or FIG. 4 or FIG. 5 Structural details). In some embodiments, the decoder 30 may be used to execute various embodiments described below to implement the application of the division method described in this application on the decoding side.
图片后处理器32,用于对经解码图片数据31(也称为经重构图片数据)执行后处理,以获得经后处理图片数据33。图片后处理器32执行的后处理可以包括:色彩格式转换(例如,从YUV格式转换为RGB格式)、调色、整修或重采样,或任何其它处理,还可用于将将经后处理图片数据33传输至显示设备34。The post-picture processor 32 is configured to perform post-processing on the decoded picture data 31 (also referred to as reconstructed picture data) to obtain post-processed picture data 33. The post-processing performed by the image post-processor 32 may include: color format conversion (for example, conversion from YUV format to RGB format), color adjustment, retouching or resampling, or any other processing, and may also be used to convert the post-processed image data 33transmitted to the display device 34.
显示设备34,用于接收经后处理图片数据33以向例如用户或观看者显示图片。显示设备34可以为或可以包括任何类别的用于呈现经重构图片的显示器,例如,集成的或外部的显示器或监视器。例如,显示器可以包括液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD)、有机发光二极管(organic light emitting diode,OLED)显示器、等离子显示器、投影仪、微LED显示器、硅基液晶(liquid crystal on silicon,LCoS)、数字光处 理器(digital light processor,DLP)或任何类别的其它显示器。The display device 34 is used to receive post-processed picture data 33 to display pictures to, for example, a user or a viewer. The display device 34 may be or may include any type of display for presenting reconstructed pictures, for example, an integrated or external display or monitor. For example, the display may include a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, a plasma display, a projector, a micro LED display, a liquid crystal on silicon (LCoS), Digital light processor (digital light processor, DLP) or any other type of display.
虽然,图1A将源设备12和目的地设备14绘示为单独的设备,但设备实施例也可以同时包括源设备12和目的地设备14或同时包括两者的功能性,即源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。在此类实施例中,可以使用相同硬件和/或软件,或使用单独的硬件和/或软件,或其任何组合来实施源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。Although FIG. 1A illustrates the source device 12 and the destination device 14 as separate devices, device embodiments may also include the functionality of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or both, ie, the source device 12 or The corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality. In such embodiments, the same hardware and/or software may be used, or separate hardware and/or software, or any combination thereof may be used to implement the source device 12 or corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or corresponding functionality .
本领域技术人员基于描述明显可知,不同单元的功能性或图1A所示的源设备12和/或目的地设备14的功能性的存在和(准确)划分可能根据实际设备和应用有所不同。源设备12和目的地设备14可以包括各种设备中的任一个,包含任何类别的手持或静止设备,例如,笔记本或膝上型计算机、移动电话、智能手机、平板或平板计算机、摄像机、台式计算机、机顶盒、电视机、相机、车载设备、显示设备、数字媒体播放器、视频游戏控制台、视频流式传输设备(例如内容服务服务器或内容分发服务器)、广播接收器设备、广播发射器设备等,并可以不使用或使用任何类别的操作系统。It is obvious to those skilled in the art based on the description that the existence and (accurate) division of the functionality of different units or the functionality of the source device 12 and/or the destination device 14 shown in FIG. 1A may vary according to actual devices and applications. Source device 12 and destination device 14 may include any of a variety of devices, including any type of handheld or stationary devices, such as notebook or laptop computers, mobile phones, smartphones, tablets or tablet computers, cameras, desktops Computers, set-top boxes, televisions, cameras, in-vehicle devices, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, video streaming devices (such as content service servers or content distribution servers), broadcast receiver devices, broadcast transmitter devices And so on, and can not use or use any kind of operating system.
编码器20和解码器30都可以实施为各种合适电路中的任一个,例如,一个或多个微处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA)、离散逻辑、硬件或其任何组合。如果部分地以软件实施所述技术,则设备可将软件的指令存储于合适的非暂时性计算机可读存储介质中,且可使用一或多个处理器以硬件执行指令从而执行本公开的技术。前述内容(包含硬件、软件、硬件与软件的组合等)中的任一者可视为一或多个处理器。Both the encoder 20 and the decoder 30 can be implemented as any of various suitable circuits, for example, one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application-specific integrated circuits (application-specific integrated circuits) circuit, ASIC), field-programmable gate array (FPGA), discrete logic, hardware, or any combination thereof. If the techniques are partially implemented in software, the device may store the instructions of the software in a suitable non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, and may use one or more processors to execute the instructions in hardware to perform the techniques of the present disclosure . Any one of the foregoing (including hardware, software, a combination of hardware and software, etc.) may be regarded as one or more processors.
在一些情况下,图1A中所示视频编码及解码系统10仅为示例,本申请的技术可以适用于不必包含编码和解码设备之间的任何数据通信的视频编码设置(例如,视频编码或视频解码)。在其它实例中,数据可从本地存储器检索、在网络上流式传输等。视频编码设备可以对数据进行编码并且将数据存储到存储器,和/或视频解码设备可以从存储器检索数据并且对数据进行解码。在一些实例中,由并不彼此通信而是仅编码数据到存储器和/或从存储器检索数据且解码数据的设备执行编码和解码。In some cases, the video encoding and decoding system 10 shown in FIG. 1A is only an example, and the technology of the present application may be applied to video encoding settings that do not necessarily include any data communication between encoding and decoding devices (eg, video encoding or video decoding). In other examples, data can be retrieved from local storage, streamed on the network, and so on. The video encoding device may encode the data and store the data to the memory, and/or the video decoding device may retrieve the data from the memory and decode the data. In some examples, encoding and decoding are performed by devices that do not communicate with each other but only encode data to and/or retrieve data from memory and decode the data.
参见图1B,图1B是根据一示例性实施例的包含图2的编码器20和/或图3的解码器30的视频译码系统40的实例的说明图。视频译码系统40可以实现本申请实施例的各种技术的组合。在所说明的实施方式中,视频译码系统40可以包含成像设备41、编码器20、解码器30(和/或藉由处理单元46的逻辑电路实施的视频编/解码器)、天线42、一个或多个处理器43、一个或多个存储器44和/或显示设备45。Referring to FIG. 1B, FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram of an example of a video coding system 40 including the encoder 20 of FIG. 2 and/or the decoder 30 of FIG. 3, according to an exemplary embodiment. The video decoding system 40 can implement a combination of various technologies in the embodiments of the present application. In the illustrated embodiment, the video decoding system 40 may include an imaging device 41, an encoder 20, a decoder 30 (and/or a video encoder/decoder implemented by the logic circuit of the processing unit 46), an antenna 42, One or more processors 43, one or more memories 44, and/or display devices 45.
如图1B所示,成像设备41、天线42、处理单元46、编码器20、解码器30、处理器43、存储器44和/或显示设备45能够互相通信。如所论述,虽然用编码器20和解码器30绘示视频译码系统40,但在不同实例中,视频译码系统40可以只包含编码器20或只包含解码器30。As shown in FIG. 1B, the imaging device 41, the antenna 42, the processing unit 46, the encoder 20, the decoder 30, the processor 43, the memory 44, and/or the display device 45 can communicate with each other. As discussed, although the video coding system 40 is shown with the encoder 20 and the decoder 30, in different examples, the video coding system 40 may include only the encoder 20 or only the decoder 30.
在一些实例中,天线42可以用于传输或接收视频数据的经编码比特流。另外,在一些实例中,显示设备45可以用于呈现视频数据。在一些实例中,逻辑电路可以通过处理单元46实施。处理单元46可以包含专用集成电路(application-specific integrated  circuit,ASIC)逻辑、图形处理器、通用处理器等。视频译码系统40也可以包含可选的处理器43,该可选处理器43类似地可以包含ASIC逻辑、图形处理器、通用处理器等。在一些实例中,逻辑电路可以通过硬件实施,如视频编码专用硬件等,处理器43可以通过通用软件、操作系统等实施。另外,存储器44可以是任何类型的存储器,例如易失性存储器(例如,静态随机存取存储器(static random access memory,SRAM)、动态随机存储器(dynamic random access memory,DRAM)等)或非易失性存储器(例如,闪存等)等。在非限制性实例中,存储器44可以由超速缓存内存实施。在一些实例中,逻辑电路可以访问存储器44(例如用于实施图像缓冲器)。在其它实例中,逻辑电路和/或处理单元46可以包含存储器(例如,缓存等)用于实施图像缓冲器等。In some examples, antenna 42 may be used to transmit or receive an encoded bitstream of video data. Additionally, in some examples, the display device 45 may be used to present video data. In some examples, the logic circuit may be implemented by the processing unit 46. The processing unit 46 may include application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like. The video decoding system 40 may also include an optional processor 43, which may similarly include ASIC logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like. In some examples, the logic circuit may be implemented by hardware, such as dedicated hardware for video encoding, etc., and the processor 43 may be implemented by general-purpose software, an operating system, or the like. In addition, the memory 44 may be any type of memory, such as volatile memory (for example, static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), etc.) or nonvolatile memory Memory (for example, flash memory, etc.), etc. In a non-limiting example, the memory 44 may be implemented by cache memory. In some examples, the logic circuit can access the memory 44 (eg, for implementing the image buffer). In other examples, the logic circuit and/or processing unit 46 may include memory (eg, cache, etc.) for implementing image buffers and the like.
在一些实例中,通过逻辑电路实施的编码器20可以包含(例如,通过处理单元46或存储器44实施的)图像缓冲器和(例如,通过处理单元46实施的)图形处理单元。图形处理单元可以通信耦合至图像缓冲器。图形处理单元可以包含通过逻辑电路实施的编码器20,以实施参照图2和/或本文中所描述的任何其它编码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。逻辑电路可以用于执行本文所论述的各种操作。In some examples, the encoder 20 implemented by logic circuits may include an image buffer (eg, implemented by the processing unit 46 or the memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (eg, implemented by the processing unit 46). The graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer. The graphics processing unit may include an encoder 20 implemented by logic circuits to implement the various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 2 and/or any other encoder system or subsystem described herein. Logic circuits can be used to perform the various operations discussed herein.
在一些实例中,解码器30可以以类似方式通过逻辑电路实施,以实施参照图3的解码器30和/或本文中所描述的任何其它解码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。在一些实例中,逻辑电路实施的解码器30可以包含(通过处理单元或存储器44实施的)图像缓冲器和(例如,通过处理单元46实施的)图形处理单元。图形处理单元可以通信耦合至图像缓冲器。图形处理单元可以包含通过逻辑电路实施的解码器30,以实施参照图3和/或本文中所描述的任何其它解码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。In some examples, decoder 30 may be implemented by logic circuits in a similar manner to implement the various modules discussed with reference to decoder 30 of FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder systems or subsystems described herein. In some examples, the decoder 30 implemented by the logic circuit may include an image buffer (implemented by the processing unit or the memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (for example, implemented by the processing unit 46). The graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer. The graphics processing unit may include a decoder 30 implemented by logic circuits to implement the various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder systems or subsystems described herein.
在一些实例中,天线42可以用于接收视频数据的经编码比特流。如所论述,经编码比特流可以包含本文所论述的与编码视频帧相关的数据、指示符、索引值、模式选择数据等,例如与编码划分相关的数据(例如,变换系数或经量化变换系数,(如所论述的)可选指示符,和/或定义编码划分的数据)。视频译码系统40还可包含耦合至天线42并用于解码经编码比特流的解码器30。显示设备45用于呈现视频帧。In some examples, antenna 42 may be used to receive an encoded bitstream of video data. As discussed, the encoded bitstream may include data related to encoded video frames, indicators, index values, mode selection data, etc. discussed herein, such as data related to encoding partitions (eg, transform coefficients or quantized transform coefficients , (As discussed) an optional indicator, and/or data defining the encoding division). The video coding system 40 may also include a decoder 30 coupled to the antenna 42 and used to decode the encoded bitstream. The display device 45 is used to present video frames.
应理解,本申请实施例中对于参考编码器20所描述的实例,解码器30可以用于执行相反过程。关于信令语法元素,解码器30可以用于接收并解析这种语法元素,相应地解码相关视频数据。在一些例子中,编码器20可以将语法元素熵编码成经编码视频比特流。在此类实例中,解码器30可以解析这种语法元素,并相应地解码相关视频数据。It should be understood that in the example described with reference to the encoder 20 in the embodiment of the present application, the decoder 30 may be used to perform the reverse process. Regarding signaling syntax elements, the decoder 30 may be used to receive and parse such syntax elements and decode the relevant video data accordingly. In some examples, encoder 20 may entropy encode syntax elements into an encoded video bitstream. In such instances, decoder 30 may parse such syntax elements and decode the relevant video data accordingly.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例描述的解码方法主要用于解码过程,此过程在编码器20和解码器30均存在。It should be noted that the decoding method described in the embodiment of the present application is mainly used in a decoding process, and this process exists in both the encoder 20 and the decoder 30.
参见图2,图2示出用于实现本申请实施例的编码器20的实例的示意性/概念性框图。在图2的实例中,编码器20包括残差计算单元204、变换处理单元206、量化单元208、逆量化单元210、逆变换处理单元212、重构单元214、缓冲器216、环路滤波器单元220、经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer,DPB)230、预测处理单元260和熵编码单元270。预测处理单元260可以包含帧间预测单元244、帧内预测单元254和模式选择单元262。帧间预测单元244可以包含运动估计单元和运动补偿单元(未图示)。图2所示的编码器20也可以称为混合型视频编码器或根据混合型视频编解码 器的视频编码器。Referring to FIG. 2, FIG. 2 shows a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of an encoder 20 for implementing an embodiment of the present application. In the example of FIG. 2, the encoder 20 includes a residual calculation unit 204, a transform processing unit 206, a quantization unit 208, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transform processing unit 212, a reconstruction unit 214, a buffer 216, a loop filter Unit 220, decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230, prediction processing unit 260, and entropy encoding unit 270. The prediction processing unit 260 may include an inter prediction unit 244, an intra prediction unit 254, and a mode selection unit 262. The inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation unit and a motion compensation unit (not shown). The encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 may also be referred to as a hybrid video encoder or a video encoder based on a hybrid video codec.
例如,残差计算单元204、变换处理单元206、量化单元208、预测处理单元260和熵编码单元270形成编码器20的前向信号路径,而如逆量化单元210、逆变换处理单元212、重构单元214、缓冲器216、环路滤波器220、DPB230、预测处理单元260形成编码器的后向信号路径,其中编码器的后向信号路径对应于解码器的信号路径(参见图3中的解码器30)。For example, the residual calculation unit 204, the transform processing unit 206, the quantization unit 208, the prediction processing unit 260, and the entropy encoding unit 270 form the forward signal path of the encoder 20, while the inverse quantization unit 210, the inverse transform processing unit 212, and the The construction unit 214, the buffer 216, the loop filter 220, the DPB 230, and the prediction processing unit 260 form the backward signal path of the encoder, where the backward signal path of the encoder corresponds to the signal path of the decoder (see FIG. 3). Decoder 30).
编码器20通过如输入202,接收图片201或图片201的图像块203,例如形成视频或视频序列的图片序列中的图片。图像块203也可以称为当前图片块或待编码图片块,图片201可以称为当前图片或待编码图片(尤其是在视频编码中将当前图片与其它图片区分开时,其它图片如同一视频序列亦即也包括当前图片的视频序列中的先前经编码和/或经解码图片)。The encoder 20 receives a picture 201 or an image block 203 of the picture 201 through, for example, an input 202, for example, forming a picture in a picture sequence of a video or a video sequence. The image block 203 may also be called a current picture block or a picture block to be encoded, and the picture 201 may be called a current picture or a picture to be encoded (especially when the current picture is distinguished from other pictures in video encoding, the other pictures are the same video sequence That is, the previously encoded and/or decoded pictures in the video sequence of the current picture are also included).
编码器20的实施例可以包括划分单元(图2中未绘示),用于将图片201划分成多个例如图像块203的块,通常划分成多个不重叠的块。划分单元可以用于对视频序列中所有图片使用相同的块大小以及定义块大小的对应栅格,或用于在图片或子集或图片群组之间更改块大小,并将每个图片划分成对应的块。An embodiment of the encoder 20 may include a division unit (not shown in FIG. 2) for dividing the picture 201 into a plurality of blocks such as image blocks 203, usually into a plurality of non-overlapping blocks. The division unit can be used to use the same block size for all pictures in the video sequence and a corresponding grid that defines the block size, or to change the block size between pictures or subsets or picture groups, and divide each picture into The corresponding block.
在一个实例中,编码器20的预测处理单元260可以用于执行上述划分技术的任何组合。In one example, the prediction processing unit 260 of the encoder 20 may be used to perform any combination of the above division techniques.
如图片201,图像块203也是或可以视为具有采样值的采样点的二维阵列或矩阵,虽然其尺寸比图片201小。换句话说,图像块203可以包括,例如,一个采样阵列(例如黑白图片201情况下的亮度阵列)或三个采样阵列(例如,彩色图片情况下的一个亮度阵列和两个色度阵列)或依据所应用的色彩格式的任何其它数目和/或类别的阵列。图像块203的水平和垂直方向(或轴线)上采样点的数目定义图像块203的尺寸。Like picture 201, image block 203 is also or can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of sampling points with sample values, although its size is smaller than picture 201. In other words, the image block 203 may include, for example, one sampling array (for example, the brightness array in the case of black and white picture 201) or three sampling arrays (for example, one brightness array and two chroma arrays in the case of color picture) or An array of any other number and/or category depending on the color format applied. The number of sampling points in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the image block 203 defines the size of the image block 203.
如图2所示的编码器20用于逐块编码图片201,例如对每个图像块203执行编码和预测。The encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 is used to encode the picture 201 block by block, for example, to perform encoding and prediction on each image block 203.
残差计算单元204用于基于图片图像块203和预测块265(下文提供预测块265的其它细节)计算残差块205,例如,通过逐样本(逐像素)将图片图像块203的样本值减去预测块265的样本值,以在样本域中获取残差块205。The residual calculation unit 204 is used to calculate the residual block 205 based on the picture image block 203 and the prediction block 265 (other details of the prediction block 265 are provided below), for example, by subtracting the sample value of the picture image block 203 sample by sample (pixel by pixel) The sample values of the block 265 are depredicted to obtain the residual block 205 in the sample domain.
变换处理单元206用于在残差块205的样本值上应用例如离散余弦变换(discrete cosine transform,DCT)或离散正弦变换(discrete sine transform,DST)的变换,以在变换域中获取变换系数207。变换系数207也可以称为变换残差系数,并在变换域中表示残差块205。The transform processing unit 206 is used to apply a transform such as discrete cosine transform (DCT) or discrete sine transform (DST) on the sample values of the residual block 205 to obtain transform coefficients 207 in the transform domain . The transform coefficient 207 may also be called a transform residual coefficient, and represents a residual block 205 in the transform domain.
变换处理单元206可以用于应用DCT/DST的整数近似值,例如为AVS,AVS2,AVS3指定的变换。与正交DCT变换相比,这种整数近似值通常由某一因子按比例缩放。为了维持经正变换和逆变换处理的残差块的范数,应用额外比例缩放因子作为变换过程的一部分。比例缩放因子通常是基于某些约束条件选择的,例如,比例缩放因子是用于移位运算的2的幂、变换系数的位深度、准确性和实施成本之间的权衡等。例如,在解码器30侧通过例如逆变换处理单元212为逆变换(以及在编码器20侧通过例如逆变换处理单元212为对应逆变换)指定具体比例缩放因子,以及相应地,可以在编码器20侧通过变换处理单元206为正变换指定对应比例缩放因子。The transform processing unit 206 may be used to apply integer approximations of DCT/DST, such as the transform specified by AVS, AVS2, and AVS3. Compared with the orthogonal DCT transform, this integer approximation is usually scaled by a factor. In order to maintain the norm of the residual block processed by the forward and inverse transform, an additional scaling factor is applied as part of the transform process. The scaling factor is usually selected based on certain constraints. For example, the scaling factor is a power of two used for the shift operation, the bit depth of the transform coefficient, the accuracy, and the trade-off between implementation cost, and so on. For example, a specific scaling factor can be specified for the inverse transform by the inverse transform processing unit 212 on the decoder 30 side (and corresponding inverse transform by the inverse transform processing unit 212 on the encoder 20 side), and accordingly, the encoder can be The 20 side specifies a corresponding scaling factor for the positive transform through the transform processing unit 206.
量化单元208用于例如通过应用标量量化或向量量化来量化变换系数207,以获取经量化变换系数209。经量化变换系数209也可以称为经量化残差系数209。量化过程可以减少与部分或全部变换系数207有关的位深度。例如,可在量化期间将n位变换系数向下舍入到m位变换系数,其中n大于m。可通过调整量化参数(quantization parameter,QP)修改量化程度。例如,对于标量量化,可以应用不同的标度来实现较细或较粗的量化。较小量化步长对应较细量化,而较大量化步长对应较粗量化。可以通过QP指示合适的量化步长。例如,量化参数可以为合适的量化步长的预定义集合的索引。例如,较小的量化参数可以对应精细量化(较小量化步长),较大量化参数可以对应粗糙量化(较大量化步长),反之亦然。量化可以包含除以量化步长以及例如通过逆量化210执行的对应的量化或逆量化,或者可以包含乘以量化步长。根据例如AVS,AVS2,AVS3的一些标准的实施例可以使用量化参数来确定量化步长。一般而言,可以基于量化参数使用包含除法的等式的定点近似来计算量化步长。可以引入额外比例缩放因子来进行量化和反量化,以恢复可能由于在用于量化步长和量化参数的等式的定点近似中使用的标度而修改的残差块的范数。在一个实例实施方式中,可以合并逆变换和反量化的标度。或者,可以使用自定义量化表并在例如比特流中将其从编码器通过信号发送到解码器。量化是有损操作,其中量化步长越大,损耗越大。The quantization unit 208 is used to quantize the transform coefficient 207 by, for example, applying scalar quantization or vector quantization to obtain the quantized transform coefficient 209. The quantized transform coefficient 209 may also be referred to as a quantized residual coefficient 209. The quantization process can reduce the bit depth associated with some or all of the transform coefficients 207. For example, n-bit transform coefficients can be rounded down to m-bit transform coefficients during quantization, where n is greater than m. The degree of quantization can be modified by adjusting quantization parameters (QP). For example, for scalar quantization, different scales can be applied to achieve thinner or coarser quantization. A smaller quantization step size corresponds to a finer quantization, and a larger quantization step size corresponds to a coarser quantization. The appropriate quantization step size can be indicated by QP. For example, the quantization parameter may be an index of a predefined set of suitable quantization steps. For example, smaller quantization parameters may correspond to fine quantization (smaller quantization step size), larger quantization parameters may correspond to coarse quantization (larger quantization step size), and vice versa. The quantization may include dividing by the quantization step size and the corresponding quantization or inverse quantization performed by, for example, inverse quantization 210, or may include multiplying the quantization step size. According to some standard embodiments such as AVS, AVS2, AVS3, quantization parameters may be used to determine the quantization step size. Generally speaking, the quantization step size can be calculated based on the quantization parameter using a fixed-point approximation including an equation of division. Additional scaling factors can be introduced for quantization and inverse quantization to restore the norm of the residual block that may be modified due to the scale used in the fixed-point approximation of the equations for quantization step size and quantization parameter. In an example embodiment, the scale of inverse transform and inverse quantization may be combined. Alternatively, a custom quantization table can be used and signaled from the encoder to the decoder in the bitstream, for example. Quantization is a lossy operation, where the larger the quantization step, the greater the loss.
逆量化单元210用于在经量化系数上应用量化单元208的逆量化,以获取经反量化系数211,例如,基于或使用与量化单元208相同的量化步长,应用量化单元208应用的量化方案的逆量化方案。经反量化系数211也可以称为经反量化残差系数211,对应于变换系数207,虽然由于量化造成的损耗通常与变换系数不相同。The inverse quantization unit 210 is used to apply the inverse quantization of the quantization unit 208 on the quantized coefficients to obtain the inverse quantization coefficients 211, for example, based on or using the same quantization step size as the quantization unit 208, apply the quantization scheme applied by the quantization unit 208 Inverse quantization scheme. The inverse quantized coefficient 211 may also be referred to as an inverse quantized residual coefficient 211, which corresponds to the transform coefficient 207, although the loss due to quantization is usually not the same as the transform coefficient.
逆变换处理单元212用于应用变换处理单元206应用的变换的逆变换,例如,逆DCT或逆DST,以在样本域中获取逆变换块213。逆变换块213也可以称为逆变换经反量化块213或逆变换残差块213。The inverse transform processing unit 212 is used to apply the inverse transform of the transform applied by the transform processing unit 206, for example, inverse DCT or inverse DST, to obtain the inverse transform block 213 in the sample domain. The inverse transform block 213 may also be referred to as an inverse transform dequantized block 213 or an inverse transform residual block 213.
重构单元214(例如,求和器214)用于将逆变换块213(即经重构残差块213)添加至预测块265,以在样本域中获取经重构块215,例如,将经重构残差块213的样本值与预测块265的样本值相加。The reconstruction unit 214 (eg, summer 214) is used to add the inverse transform block 213 (ie, the reconstructed residual block 213) to the prediction block 265 to obtain the reconstructed block 215 in the sample domain, for example, The sample values of the reconstructed residual block 213 and the sample values of the prediction block 265 are added.
可选地,例如线缓冲器216的缓冲器单元216(或简称“缓冲器”216)用于缓冲或存储经重构块215和对应的样本值,用于例如帧内预测。在其它的实施例中,编码器可以用于使用存储在缓冲器单元216中的未经滤波的经重构块和/或对应的样本值来进行任何类别的估计和/或预测,例如帧内预测。Optionally, a buffer unit 216 (or simply "buffer" 216), such as a line buffer 216, is used to buffer or store the reconstructed block 215 and corresponding sample values for, for example, intra prediction. In other embodiments, the encoder may be used to use the unfiltered reconstructed blocks and/or corresponding sample values stored in the buffer unit 216 for any type of estimation and/or prediction, such as intra prediction.
例如,编码器20的实施例可以经配置以使得缓冲器单元216不只用于存储用于帧内预测254的经重构块215,也用于环路滤波器单元220(在图2中未示出),和/或,例如使得缓冲器单元216和经解码图片缓冲器单元230形成一个缓冲器。其它实施例可以用于将经滤波块221和/或来自经解码图片缓冲器230的块或样本(图2中均未示出)用作帧内预测254的输入或基础。For example, an embodiment of the encoder 20 may be configured such that the buffer unit 216 is used not only to store the reconstructed block 215 for intra prediction 254, but also for the loop filter unit 220 (not shown in FIG. 2) Out), and/or, for example, causing the buffer unit 216 and the decoded picture buffer unit 230 to form a buffer. Other embodiments may be used to use the filtered block 221 and/or blocks or samples from the decoded picture buffer 230 (neither shown in FIG. 2) as an input or basis for intra prediction 254.
环路滤波器单元220(或简称“环路滤波器”220)用于对经重构块215进行滤波以获取经滤波块221,从而顺利进行像素转变或提高视频质量。环路滤波器单元220旨在表示一个或多个环路滤波器,例如去块滤波器、样本自适应偏移(sample-adaptive offset,SAO)滤波器或其它滤波器,例如双边滤波器、自适应环路滤波器(adaptive loop  filter,ALF),或锐化或平滑滤波器,或协同滤波器。尽管环路滤波器单元220在图2中示出为环内滤波器,但在其它配置中,环路滤波器单元220可实施为环后滤波器。经滤波块221也可以称为经滤波的经重构块221。经解码图片缓冲器230可以在环路滤波器单元220对经重构编码块执行滤波操作之后存储经重构编码块。The loop filter unit 220 (or simply "loop filter" 220) is used to filter the reconstructed block 215 to obtain the filtered block 221, so as to smoothly perform pixel conversion or improve video quality. The loop filter unit 220 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as deblocking filters, sample-adaptive offset (SAO) filters, or other filters, such as bilateral filters, Adaptive loop filter (adaptive loop filter, ALF), or sharpening or smoothing filter, or collaborative filter. Although the loop filter unit 220 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 2, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 220 may be implemented as a post-loop filter. The filtered block 221 may also be referred to as the filtered reconstructed block 221. The decoded picture buffer 230 may store the reconstructed encoding block after the loop filter unit 220 performs a filtering operation on the reconstructed encoding block.
编码器20(对应地,环路滤波器单元220)的实施例可以用于输出环路滤波器参数(例如,样本自适应偏移信息),例如,直接输出或由熵编码单元270或任何其它熵编码单元熵编码后输出,例如使得解码器30可以接收并应用相同的环路滤波器参数用于解码。Embodiments of the encoder 20 (correspondingly, the loop filter unit 220) may be used to output loop filter parameters (eg, sample adaptive offset information), for example, directly output or by the entropy encoding unit 270 or any other The entropy encoding unit outputs after entropy encoding, for example, so that the decoder 30 can receive and apply the same loop filter parameters for decoding.
经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer,DPB)230可以为存储参考图片数据供编码器20编码视频数据之用的参考图片存储器。DPB 230可由多种存储器设备中的任一个形成,例如动态随机存储器(dynamic random access memory,DRAM)(包含同步DRAM(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、磁阻式RAM(magnetoresistive RAM,MRAM)、电阻式RAM(resistive RAM,RRAM))或其它类型的存储器设备。可以由同一存储器设备或单独的存储器设备提供DPB 230和缓冲器216。在某一实例中,经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer,DPB)230用于存储经滤波块221。经解码图片缓冲器230可以进一步用于存储同一当前图片或例如先前经重构图片的不同图片的其它先前的经滤波块,例如先前经重构和经滤波块221,以及可以提供完整的先前经重构亦即经解码图片(和对应参考块和样本)和/或部分经重构当前图片(和对应参考块和样本),例如用于帧间预测。在某一实例中,如果经重构块215无需环内滤波而得以重构,则经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer,DPB)230用于存储经重构块215。The decoded picture buffer (decoded picture buffer, DPB) 230 may be a reference picture memory for storing reference picture data for the encoder 20 to encode video data. DPB 230 can be formed by any of a variety of memory devices, such as dynamic random access memory (dynamic random access memory (DRAM) (including synchronous DRAM (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), magnetoresistive RAM (magnetoresistive RAM, MRAM), resistive RAM (resistive RAM, RRAM)) or other types of memory devices. The DPB 230 and the buffer 216 may be provided by the same memory device or separate memory devices. In a certain example, a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 is used to store the filtered block 221. The decoded picture buffer 230 may be further used to store other previous filtered blocks of the same current picture or different pictures such as previous reconstructed pictures, such as the previously reconstructed and filtered block 221, and may provide the complete previous The reconstructed ie decoded pictures (and corresponding reference blocks and samples) and/or partially reconstructed current pictures (and corresponding reference blocks and samples), for example for inter prediction. In a certain example, if the reconstructed block 215 is reconstructed without in-loop filtering, a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 is used to store the reconstructed block 215.
预测处理单元260,也称为块预测处理单元260,用于接收或获取图像块203(当前图片201的当前图像块203)和经重构图片数据,例如来自缓冲器216的同一(当前)图片的参考样本和/或来自经解码图片缓冲器230的一个或多个先前经解码图片的参考图片数据231,以及用于处理这类数据进行预测,即提供可以为经帧间预测块245或经帧内预测块255的预测块265。The prediction processing unit 260, also known as the block prediction processing unit 260, is used to receive or acquire the image block 203 (current image block 203 of the current picture 201) and reconstructed picture data, such as the same (current) picture from the buffer 216 Reference samples and/or reference picture data 231 of one or more previously decoded pictures from the decoded picture buffer 230, and used to process such data for prediction, that is, to provide an inter prediction block 245 or The prediction block 265 of the intra prediction block 255.
模式选择单元262可以用于选择预测模式(例如帧内或帧间预测模式)和/或对应的用作预测块265的预测块245或255,以计算残差块205和重构经重构块215。The mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (eg, intra or inter prediction mode) and/or the corresponding prediction block 245 or 255 used as the prediction block 265 to calculate the residual block 205 and reconstruct the reconstructed block 215.
模式选择单元262的实施例可以用于选择预测模式(例如,从预测处理单元260所支持的那些预测模式中选择),所述预测模式提供最佳匹配或者说最小残差(最小残差意味着传输或存储中更好的压缩),或提供最小信令开销(最小信令开销意味着传输或存储中更好的压缩),或同时考虑或平衡以上两者。模式选择单元262可以用于基于码率失真优化(rate distortion optimization,RDO)确定预测模式,即选择提供最小码率失真优化的预测模式,或选择相关码率失真至少满足预测模式选择标准的预测模式。An embodiment of the mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (for example, from those prediction modes supported by the prediction processing unit 260), which provides the best match or the minimum residual (the minimum residual means Better compression in transmission or storage), or provide minimum signaling overhead (minimum signaling overhead means better compression in transmission or storage), or consider or balance both at the same time. The mode selection unit 262 may be used to determine a prediction mode based on rate distortion optimization (RDO), that is, to select a prediction mode that provides minimum bit rate distortion optimization, or to select a prediction mode in which the related bit rate distortion at least meets the prediction mode selection criteria .
下文将详细解释编码器20的实例(例如,通过预测处理单元260)执行的预测处理和(例如,通过模式选择单元262)执行的模式选择。The prediction process performed by the example of the encoder 20 (for example, by the prediction processing unit 260) and the mode selection (for example, by the mode selection unit 262) will be explained in detail below.
如上文所述,编码器20用于从(预先确定的)预测模式集合中确定或选择最好或最优的预测模式。预测模式集合可以包括例如帧内预测模式和/或帧间预测模式。As described above, the encoder 20 is used to determine or select the best or optimal prediction mode from the (predetermined) prediction mode set. The set of prediction modes may include, for example, intra prediction modes and/or inter prediction modes.
帧内预测模式集合可以包括35种不同的帧内预测模式,例如,如DC(或均值)模式和平面模式的非方向性模式,或如H.265中定义的方向性模式,或者可以包括67种不同的帧内预测模式,例如,如DC(或均值)模式和平面模式的非方向性模式,或如正在发展中的H.266中定义的方向性模式。The intra prediction mode set may include 35 different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in H.265, or may include 67 Different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in the developing H.266.
在可能的实现中,帧间预测模式集合取决于可用参考图片(即,例如前述存储在DBP 230中的至少部分经解码图片)和其它帧间预测参数,例如取决于是否使用整个参考图片或只使用参考图片的一部分,例如围绕当前块的区域的搜索窗区域,来搜索最佳匹配参考块,和/或例如取决于是否应用如半像素和/或四分之一像素内插的像素内插,帧间预测模式集合例如可包括先进运动矢量(advanced motion vector prediction,AMVP)模式和融合(merge)模式。具体实施中,帧间预测模式集合可包括本申请实施例改进的基于控制点的AMVP模式,以及,改进的基于控制点的merge模式。在一个实例中,帧内预测单元254可以用于执行下文描述的帧间预测技术的任意组合。In a possible implementation, the set of inter prediction modes depends on the available reference pictures (ie, for example, the aforementioned at least partially decoded pictures stored in DBP 230) and other inter prediction parameters, for example, depending on whether the entire reference picture is used or only Use a part of the reference picture, for example the search window area surrounding the area of the current block, to search for the best matching reference block, and/or for example depending on whether pixel interpolation such as half-pixel and/or quarter-pixel interpolation is applied For example, the set of inter prediction modes may include advanced motion vector (advanced motion vector prediction, AMVP) mode and merge mode. In a specific implementation, the set of inter prediction modes may include an improved control point-based AMVP mode according to an embodiment of the present application, and an improved control point-based merge mode. In one example, the intra prediction unit 254 may be used to perform any combination of inter prediction techniques described below.
除了以上预测模式,本申请实施例也可以应用跳过模式和/或直接模式。In addition to the above prediction modes, the embodiments of the present application may also apply skip mode and/or direct mode.
预测处理单元260可以进一步用于将图像块203划分成较小的块分区或子块,例如,通过迭代使用四叉树(quad-tree,QT)划分、二进制树(binary-tree,BT)划分或三叉树(triple-tree,TT)或者扩展四叉树(即EQT)划分,或其任何组合,以及用于例如为块分区或子块中的每一个执行预测,其中模式选择包括选择划分的图像块203的树结构和选择应用于块分区或子块中的每一个的预测模式。The prediction processing unit 260 may be further used to divide the image block 203 into smaller block partitions or sub-blocks, for example, by iteratively using quad-tree (QT) division, binary-tree (BT) division Or triple-tree (TT) or extended quad-tree (ie EQT) partitioning, or any combination thereof, and for performing predictions for each of block partitions or sub-blocks, for example, where mode selection includes selection of partitioned The tree structure of the image block 203 and the selection of the prediction mode applied to each of the block partitions or sub-blocks.
帧间预测单元244可以包含运动估计(motion estimation,ME)单元(图2中未示出)和运动补偿(motion compensation,MC)单元(图2中未示出)。运动估计单元用于接收或获取图片图像块203(当前图片201的当前图片图像块203)和经解码图片231,或至少一个或多个先前经重构块,例如,一个或多个其它/不同先前经解码图片231的经重构块,来进行运动估计。例如,视频序列可以包括当前图片和先前经解码图片31,或换句话说,当前图片和先前经解码图片31可以是形成视频序列的图片序列的一部分,或者形成该图片序列。The inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation (ME) unit (not shown in FIG. 2) and a motion compensation (MC) unit (not shown in FIG. 2). The motion estimation unit is used to receive or acquire a picture image block 203 (current picture image block 203 of the current picture 201) and a decoded picture 231, or at least one or more previously reconstructed blocks, for example, one or more other/different The reconstructed block of the previously decoded picture 231 is used for motion estimation. For example, the video sequence may include the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31, or in other words, the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31 may be part of the picture sequence forming the video sequence, or form the picture sequence.
例如,编码器20可以用于从多个其它图片中的同一或不同图片的多个参考块中选择参考块,并向运动估计单元(图2中未示出)提供参考图片和/或提供参考块的位置(X、Y坐标)与当前块的位置之间的偏移(空间偏移)作为帧间预测参数。该偏移也称为运动向量(motion vector,MV)。For example, the encoder 20 may be used to select a reference block from multiple reference blocks of the same or different pictures in multiple other pictures, and provide a reference picture and/or provide a reference to a motion estimation unit (not shown in FIG. 2) The offset (spatial offset) between the position of the block (X, Y coordinates) and the position of the current block is used as an inter prediction parameter. This offset is also called a motion vector (MV).
运动补偿单元用于获取帧间预测参数,并基于或使用帧间预测参数执行帧间预测来获取帧间预测块245。由运动补偿单元(图2中未示出)执行的运动补偿可以包含基于通过运动估计(可能执行对子像素精确度的内插)确定的运动/块向量取出或生成预测块。内插滤波可从已知像素样本产生额外像素样本,从而潜在地增加可用于编码图片块的候选预测块的数目。一旦接收到用于当前图片块的PU的运动向量,运动补偿单元246可以在一个参考图片列表中定位运动向量指向的预测块。运动补偿单元246还可以生成与块和视频条带相关联的语法元素,以供解码器30在解码视频条带的图片块时使用。The motion compensation unit is used to acquire inter prediction parameters, and perform inter prediction based on or using inter prediction parameters to obtain inter prediction blocks 245. The motion compensation performed by the motion compensation unit (not shown in FIG. 2) may include extracting or generating a prediction block based on a motion/block vector determined by motion estimation (possibly performing interpolation of sub-pixel accuracy). Interpolation filtering can generate additional pixel samples from known pixel samples, potentially increasing the number of candidate prediction blocks that can be used to encode picture blocks. Once the motion vector for the PU of the current picture block is received, the motion compensation unit 246 may locate the prediction block pointed to by the motion vector in a reference picture list. Motion compensation unit 246 may also generate syntax elements associated with blocks and video slices for use by decoder 30 when decoding picture blocks of video slices.
具体的,上述帧间预测单元244可向熵编码单元270传输语法元素,所述语法元素包括帧间预测参数(比如遍历多个帧间预测模式后选择用于当前块预测的帧间预测 模式的指示信息)。可能应用场景中,如果帧间预测模式只有一种,那么也可以不在语法元素中携带帧间预测参数,此时解码端30可直接使用默认的预测模式进行解码。可以理解的,帧间预测单元244可以用于执行帧间预测技术的任意组合。Specifically, the above inter prediction unit 244 may transmit a syntax element to the entropy encoding unit 270, where the syntax element includes inter prediction parameters (such as an inter prediction mode selected for the current block prediction after traversing multiple inter prediction modes Instructions). In a possible application scenario, if there is only one inter prediction mode, the inter prediction parameters may not be carried in the syntax element. In this case, the decoding terminal 30 may directly use the default prediction mode for decoding. It can be understood that the inter prediction unit 244 may be used to perform any combination of inter prediction techniques.
帧内预测单元254用于获取,例如接收同一图片的图片块203(当前图片块)和一个或多个先前经重构块,例如经重构相相邻块,以进行帧内估计。例如,编码器20可以用于从多个(预定)帧内预测模式中选择帧内预测模式。The intra prediction unit 254 is used to acquire, for example, a picture block 203 (current picture block) that receives the same picture and one or more previously reconstructed blocks, such as reconstructed neighboring blocks, for intra estimation. For example, the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra prediction mode from a plurality of (predetermined) intra prediction modes.
编码器20的实施例可以用于基于优化标准选择帧内预测模式,例如基于最小残差(例如,提供最类似于当前图片块203的预测块255的帧内预测模式)或最小码率失真。Embodiments of the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra prediction mode based on optimization criteria, for example, based on a minimum residual (eg, an intra prediction mode that provides the prediction block 255 most similar to the current picture block 203) or minimum rate distortion.
帧内预测单元254进一步用于基于如所选择的帧内预测模式的帧内预测参数确定帧内预测块255。在任何情况下,在选择用于块的帧内预测模式之后,帧内预测单元254还用于向熵编码单元270提供帧内预测参数,即提供指示所选择的用于块的帧内预测模式的信息。在一个实例中,帧内预测单元254可以用于执行帧内预测技术的任意组合。The intra prediction unit 254 is further used to determine the intra prediction block 255 based on the intra prediction parameters of the intra prediction mode as selected. In any case, after selecting the intra-prediction mode for the block, the intra-prediction unit 254 is also used to provide the intra-prediction parameters to the entropy encoding unit 270, that is, to provide an indication of the selected intra-prediction mode for the block Information. In one example, the intra prediction unit 254 may be used to perform any combination of intra prediction techniques.
具体的,上述帧内预测单元254可向熵编码单元270传输语法元素,所述语法元素包括帧内预测参数(比如遍历多个帧内预测模式后选择用于当前块预测的帧内预测模式的指示信息)。可能应用场景中,如果帧内预测模式只有一种,那么也可以不在语法元素中携带帧内预测参数,此时解码端30可直接使用默认的预测模式进行解码。Specifically, the above-mentioned intra-prediction unit 254 may transmit a syntax element to the entropy encoding unit 270, where the syntax element includes intra-prediction parameters (such as an intra-prediction mode selected for the current block prediction after traversing multiple intra-prediction modes) Instructions). In a possible application scenario, if there is only one intra prediction mode, the intra prediction parameters may not be carried in the syntax element. In this case, the decoding terminal 30 may directly use the default prediction mode for decoding.
熵编码单元270用于将熵编码算法或方案(例如,可变长度编码(variable length coding,VLC)方案、上下文自适应VLC(context adaptive VLC,CAVLC)方案、算术编码方案、上下文自适应二进制算术编码(context adaptive binary arithmetic coding,CABAC)、基于语法的上下文自适应二进制算术编码(syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding,SBAC)、概率区间划分熵(probability interval partitioning entropy,PIPE)编码或其它熵编码方法或技术)应用于经量化残差系数209、帧间预测参数、帧内预测参数和/或环路滤波器参数中的单个或所有上(或不应用),以获取可以通过输出272以例如经编码比特流21的形式输出的经编码图片数据21。可以将经编码比特流传输到视频解码器30,或将其存档稍后由视频解码器30传输或检索。熵编码单元270还可用于熵编码正被编码的当前视频条带的其它语法元素。The entropy coding unit 270 is used to entropy coding algorithms or schemes (for example, variable length coding (VLC) scheme, context adaptive VLC (context adaptive VLC, CAVLC) scheme, arithmetic coding scheme, context adaptive binary arithmetic Coding (context adaptive) binary arithmetic coding (CABAC), syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding (SBAC), probability interval entropy (probability interval interpartitioning entropy, PIPE) coding or other entropy Coding method or technique) applied to a single or all of the quantized residual coefficients 209, inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters, and/or loop filter parameters (or not applied) to obtain the output 272 to For example, the encoded picture data 21 output in the form of an encoded bit stream 21. The encoded bitstream may be transmitted to the video decoder 30 or archived for later transmission or retrieval by the video decoder 30. The entropy encoding unit 270 may also be used to entropy encode other syntax elements of the current video slice being encoded.
视频编码器20的其它结构变型可用于编码视频流。例如,基于非变换的编码器20可以在没有针对某些块或帧的变换处理单元206的情况下直接量化残差信号。在另一实施方式中,编码器20可具有组合成单个单元的量化单元208和逆量化单元210。Other structural variations of video encoder 20 may be used to encode video streams. For example, the non-transform based encoder 20 may directly quantize the residual signal without the transform processing unit 206 for certain blocks or frames. In another embodiment, the encoder 20 may have a quantization unit 208 and an inverse quantization unit 210 combined into a single unit.
具体的,在本申请实施例中,编码器20可用于实现后文实施例中描述的编码方法。Specifically, in the embodiment of the present application, the encoder 20 may be used to implement the encoding method described in the following embodiments.
应当理解的是,视频编码器20的其它的结构变化可用于编码视频流。例如,对于某些图像块或者图像帧,视频编码器20可以直接地量化残差信号而不需要经变换处理单元206处理,相应地也不需要经逆变换处理单元212处理;或者,对于某些图像块或者图像帧,视频编码器20没有产生残差数据,相应地不需要经变换处理单元206、量化单元208、逆量化单元210和逆变换处理单元212处理;或者,视频编码器20可以将经重构图像块作为参考块直接地进行存储而不需要经滤波器220处理;或者,视频编码器20中量化单元208和逆量化单元210可以合并在一起。环路滤波器220是可 选的,以及针对无损压缩编码的情况下,变换处理单元206、量化单元208、逆量化单元210和逆变换处理单元212是可选的。应当理解的是,根据不同的应用场景,帧间预测单元244和帧内预测单元254可以是被选择性的启用。It should be understood that other structural changes of the video encoder 20 may be used to encode the video stream. For example, for some image blocks or image frames, the video encoder 20 can directly quantize the residual signal without processing by the transform processing unit 206, and accordingly, without processing by the inverse transform processing unit 212; or, for some For image blocks or image frames, the video encoder 20 does not generate residual data, and accordingly does not need to be processed by the transform processing unit 206, quantization unit 208, inverse quantization unit 210, and inverse transform processing unit 212; or, the video encoder 20 may convert The reconstructed image block is directly stored as a reference block without being processed by the filter 220; alternatively, the quantization unit 208 and the inverse quantization unit 210 in the video encoder 20 may be merged together. The loop filter 220 is optional, and in the case of lossless compression coding, the transform processing unit 206, quantization unit 208, inverse quantization unit 210, and inverse transform processing unit 212 are optional. It should be understood that the inter prediction unit 244 and the intra prediction unit 254 may be selectively enabled according to different application scenarios.
参见图3,图3示出用于实现本申请实施例的解码器30的实例的示意性/概念性框图。视频解码器30用于接收例如由编码器20编码的经编码图片数据(例如,经编码比特流)21,以获取经解码图片231。在解码过程期间,视频解码器30从视频编码器20接收视频数据,例如表示经编码视频条带的图片块的经编码视频比特流及相关联的语法元素。Referring to FIG. 3, FIG. 3 shows a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of a decoder 30 for implementing an embodiment of the present application. The video decoder 30 is used to receive encoded picture data (eg, encoded bitstream) 21, for example, encoded by the encoder 20, to obtain the decoded picture 231. During the decoding process, video decoder 30 receives video data from video encoder 20, such as an encoded video bitstream and associated syntax elements representing picture blocks of the encoded video slice.
在图3的实例中,解码器30包括熵解码单元304、逆量化单元310、逆变换处理单元312、重构单元314(例如求和器314)、缓冲器316、环路滤波器320、经解码图片缓冲器330以及预测处理单元360。预测处理单元360可以包含帧间预测单元344、帧内预测单元354和模式选择单元362。在一些实例中,视频解码器30可执行大体上与参照图2的视频编码器20描述的编码遍次互逆的解码遍次。In the example of FIG. 3, the decoder 30 includes an entropy decoding unit 304, an inverse quantization unit 310, an inverse transform processing unit 312, a reconstruction unit 314 (such as a summer 314), a buffer 316, a loop filter 320, a The decoded picture buffer 330 and the prediction processing unit 360. The prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344, an intra prediction unit 354, and a mode selection unit 362. In some examples, video decoder 30 may perform a decoding pass that is generally inverse to the encoding pass described with reference to video encoder 20 of FIG. 2.
熵解码单元304用于对经编码图片数据21执行熵解码,以获取例如经量化系数309和/或经解码的编码参数(图3中未示出),例如,帧间预测、帧内预测参数、环路滤波器参数和/或其它语法元素中(经解码)的任意一个或全部。熵解码单元304进一步用于将帧间预测参数、帧内预测参数和/或其它语法元素转发至预测处理单元360。视频解码器30可接收视频条带层级和/或视频块层级的语法元素。The entropy decoding unit 304 is used to perform entropy decoding on the encoded picture data 21 to obtain, for example, quantized coefficients 309 and/or decoded encoding parameters (not shown in FIG. 3), for example, inter prediction, intra prediction parameters , Any or all of the loop filter parameters and/or other syntax elements (decoded). The entropy decoding unit 304 is further used to forward inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters, and/or other syntax elements to the prediction processing unit 360. Video decoder 30 may receive syntax elements at the video slice level and/or the video block level.
逆量化单元310功能上可与逆量化单元110相同,逆变换处理单元312功能上可与逆变换处理单元212相同,重构单元314功能上可与重构单元214相同,缓冲器316功能上可与缓冲器216相同,环路滤波器320功能上可与环路滤波器220相同,经解码图片缓冲器330功能上可与经解码图片缓冲器230相同。The inverse quantization unit 310 may be functionally the same as the inverse quantization unit 110, the inverse transform processing unit 312 may be functionally the same as the inverse transform processing unit 212, the reconstruction unit 314 may be functionally the same as the reconstruction unit 214, and the buffer 316 may be functionally Like the buffer 216, the loop filter 320 may be functionally the same as the loop filter 220, and the decoded picture buffer 330 may be functionally the same as the decoded picture buffer 230.
预测处理单元360可以包括帧间预测单元344和帧内预测单元354,其中帧间预测单元344功能上可以类似于帧间预测单元244,帧内预测单元354功能上可以类似于帧内预测单元254。预测处理单元360通常用于执行块预测和/或从经编码数据21获取预测块365,以及从例如熵解码单元304(显式地或隐式地)接收或获取预测相关参数和/或关于所选择的预测模式的信息。The prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344 and an intra prediction unit 354, wherein the inter prediction unit 344 may be similar in function to the inter prediction unit 244, and the intra prediction unit 354 may be similar in function to the intra prediction unit 254 . The prediction processing unit 360 is generally used to perform block prediction and/or obtain the prediction block 365 from the encoded data 21, and receive or obtain prediction-related parameters and/or information about the entropy decoding unit 304 (explicitly or implicitly). Information about the selected prediction mode.
当视频条带经编码为经帧内编码(I)条带时,预测处理单元360的帧内预测单元354用于基于信号表示的帧内预测模式及来自当前帧或图片的先前经解码块的数据来产生用于当前视频条带的图片块的预测块365。当视频帧经编码为经帧间编码(即B或P)条带时,预测处理单元360的帧间预测单元344(例如,运动补偿单元)用于基于运动向量及从熵解码单元304接收的其它语法元素生成用于当前视频条带的视频块的预测块365。对于帧间预测,可从一个参考图片列表内的一个参考图片中产生预测块。视频解码器30可基于存储于DPB 330中的参考图片,使用默认建构技术来建构参考帧列表:列表0和列表1。When the video slice is encoded as an intra-coded (I) slice, the intra prediction unit 354 of the prediction processing unit 360 is used to signal-based the intra prediction mode and the previous decoded block from the current frame or picture. Data to generate a prediction block 365 for the picture block of the current video slice. When the video frame is encoded as an inter-coded (ie, B or P) slice, the inter prediction unit 344 (eg, motion compensation unit) of the prediction processing unit 360 is used for the motion vector-based and received from the entropy decoding unit 304 Other syntax elements generate a prediction block 365 for the video block of the current video slice. For inter prediction, a prediction block may be generated from a reference picture in a reference picture list. The video decoder 30 may construct the reference frame lists: list 0 and list 1 based on the reference pictures stored in the DPB 330 using default construction techniques.
预测处理单元360用于通过解析运动向量和其它语法元素,确定用于当前视频条带的视频块的预测信息,并使用预测信息产生用于正经解码的当前视频块的预测块。在本申请的一实例中,预测处理单元360使用接收到的一些语法元素确定用于编码视频条带的视频块的预测模式(例如,帧内或帧间预测)、帧间预测条带类型(例如, B条带、P条带或GPB条带)、用于条带的参考图片列表中的一个或多个的建构信息、用于条带的每个经帧间编码视频块的运动向量、条带的每个经帧间编码视频块的帧间预测状态以及其它信息,以解码当前视频条带的视频块。在本公开的另一实例中,视频解码器30从比特流接收的语法元素包含接收自适应参数集(adaptive parameter set,APS)、序列参数集(sequence parameter set,SPS)、图片参数集(picture parameter set,PPS)或条带标头中的一个或多个中的语法元素。The prediction processing unit 360 is used to determine the prediction information for the video block of the current video slice by parsing the motion vector and other syntax elements, and use the prediction information to generate the prediction block for the current video block being decoded. In an example of the present application, the prediction processing unit 360 uses some received syntax elements to determine the prediction mode (eg, intra or inter prediction) of the video block used to encode the video slice, and the inter prediction slice type ( For example, B slice, P slice, or GPB slice), construction information for one or more of the reference picture lists for slices, motion vectors for each inter-coded video block for slices, The inter prediction status and other information of each inter-coded video block of the slice to decode the video block of the current video slice. In another example of the present disclosure, the syntax elements received by the video decoder 30 from the bitstream include an adaptive parameter set (adaptive parameter set, APS), a sequence parameter set (SPS), and a picture parameter set (picture parameter (set, PPS) or the syntax element in one or more of the stripe headers.
逆量化单元310可用于逆量化(即,反量化)在比特流中提供且由熵解码单元304解码的经量化变换系数。逆量化过程可包含使用由视频编码器20针对视频条带中的每一视频块所计算的量化参数来确定应该应用的量化程度并同样确定应该应用的逆量化程度。The inverse quantization unit 310 may be used to inverse quantize (ie, inverse quantize) the quantized transform coefficients provided in the bitstream and decoded by the entropy decoding unit 304. The inverse quantization process may include using the quantization parameters calculated by the video encoder 20 for each video block in the video slice to determine the degree of quantization that should be applied and also determine the degree of inverse quantization that should be applied.
逆变换处理单元312用于将逆变换(例如,逆DCT、逆整数变换或概念上类似的逆变换过程)应用于变换系数,以便在像素域中产生残差块。The inverse transform processing unit 312 is used to apply an inverse transform (eg, inverse DCT, inverse integer transform, or conceptually similar inverse transform process) to the transform coefficients, so as to generate a residual block in the pixel domain.
重构单元314(例如,求和器314)用于将逆变换块313(即经重构残差块313)添加到预测块365,以在样本域中获取经重构块315,例如通过将经重构残差块313的样本值与预测块365的样本值相加。The reconstruction unit 314 (eg, summer 314) is used to add the inverse transform block 313 (ie, the reconstructed residual block 313) to the prediction block 365 to obtain the reconstructed block 315 in the sample domain, for example by The sample values of the reconstructed residual block 313 are added to the sample values of the prediction block 365.
环路滤波器单元320(在编码循环期间或在编码循环之后)用于对经重构块315进行滤波以获取经滤波块321,从而顺利进行像素转变或提高视频质量。在一个实例中,环路滤波器单元320可以用于执行下文描述的滤波技术的任意组合。环路滤波器单元320旨在表示一个或多个环路滤波器,例如去块滤波器、SAO滤波器或其它滤波器,例如双边滤波器、ALF,或锐化或平滑滤波器,或协同滤波器。尽管环路滤波器单元320在图3中示出为环内滤波器,但在其它配置中,环路滤波器单元320可实施为环后滤波器。The loop filter unit 320 (during the encoding loop or after the encoding loop) is used to filter the reconstructed block 315 to obtain the filtered block 321 to smoothly perform pixel conversion or improve video quality. In one example, the loop filter unit 320 may be used to perform any combination of filtering techniques described below. The loop filter unit 320 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as deblocking filters, SAO filters, or other filters, such as bilateral filters, ALF, or sharpening or smoothing filters, or collaborative filtering Device. Although the loop filter unit 320 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 3, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 320 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.
随后将给定帧或图片中的经解码视频块321存储在存储用于后续运动补偿的参考图片的经解码图片缓冲器330中。The decoded video block 321 in a given frame or picture is then stored in a decoded picture buffer 330 that stores reference pictures for subsequent motion compensation.
解码器30用于例如,藉由输出332输出经解码图片31,以向用户呈现或供用户查看。The decoder 30 is used, for example, to output the decoded picture 31 through the output 332 for presentation to the user or for the user to view.
视频解码器30的其它变型可用于对压缩的比特流进行解码。例如,解码器30可以在没有环路滤波器单元320的情况下生成输出视频流。例如,基于非变换的解码器30可以在没有针对某些块或帧的逆变换处理单元312的情况下直接逆量化残差信号。在另一实施方式中,视频解码器30可以具有组合成单个单元的逆量化单元310和逆变换处理单元312。Other variations of video decoder 30 may be used to decode the compressed bitstream. For example, the decoder 30 may generate the output video stream without the loop filter unit 320. For example, the non-transform based decoder 30 may directly inversely quantize the residual signal without the inverse transform processing unit 312 for certain blocks or frames. In another embodiment, the video decoder 30 may have an inverse quantization unit 310 and an inverse transform processing unit 312 combined into a single unit.
具体的,在本申请实施例中,解码器30用于实现后文实施例中描述的解码方法。Specifically, in the embodiment of the present application, the decoder 30 is used to implement the decoding method described in the embodiment below.
应当理解的是,视频解码器30的其它结构变化可用于解码经编码视频位流。例如,视频解码器30可以不经滤波器320处理而生成输出视频流;或者,对于某些图像块或者图像帧,视频解码器30的熵解码单元304没有解码出经量化的系数,相应地不需要经逆量化单元310和逆变换处理单元312处理。环路滤波器320是可选的;以及针对无损压缩的情况下,逆量化单元310和逆变换处理单元312是可选的。应当理解的是,根据不同的应用场景,帧间预测单元和帧内预测单元可以是被选择性的启用。It should be understood that other structural variations of video decoder 30 may be used to decode the encoded video bitstream. For example, the video decoder 30 may generate an output video stream without processing by the filter 320; or, for certain image blocks or image frames, the entropy decoding unit 304 of the video decoder 30 does not decode the quantized coefficients, and accordingly does not It needs to be processed by the inverse quantization unit 310 and the inverse transform processing unit 312. The loop filter 320 is optional; and in the case of lossless compression, the inverse quantization unit 310 and the inverse transform processing unit 312 are optional. It should be understood that, according to different application scenarios, the inter prediction unit and the intra prediction unit may be selectively enabled.
应当理解的是,本申请的编码器20和解码器30中,针对某个环节的处理结果可 以经过进一步处理后,输出到下一个环节,例如,在插值滤波、运动矢量推导或环路滤波等环节之后,对相应环节的处理结果进一步进行Clip或移位shift等操作。It should be understood that in the encoder 20 and the decoder 30 of the present application, the processing results for a certain link can be further processed and output to the next link, for example, in interpolation filtering, motion vector derivation or loop filtering, etc. After the link, the results of the corresponding link are further clipped or shift shifted.
参见图4,图4是本申请实施例提供的视频译码设备400(例如视频编码设备400或视频解码设备400)的结构示意图。视频译码设备400适于实施本文所描述的实施例。在一个实施例中,视频译码设备400可以是视频解码器(例如图1A的解码器30)或视频编码器(例如图1A的编码器20)。在另一个实施例中,视频译码设备400可以是上述图1A的解码器30或图1A的编码器20中的一个或多个组件。Referring to FIG. 4, FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a video decoding device 400 (for example, a video encoding device 400 or a video decoding device 400) provided by an embodiment of the present application. The video coding apparatus 400 is suitable for implementing the embodiments described herein. In one embodiment, the video coding device 400 may be a video decoder (eg, decoder 30 of FIG. 1A) or a video encoder (eg, encoder 20 of FIG. 1A). In another embodiment, the video decoding device 400 may be one or more components in the decoder 30 of FIG. 1A or the encoder 20 of FIG. 1A described above.
视频译码设备400包括:用于接收数据的入口端口410和接收器单元(Rx)420,用于处理数据的处理器、逻辑单元或中央处理器(CPU)430,用于传输数据的发射器单元(Tx)440和出口端口450,以及,用于存储数据的存储器460。视频译码设备400还可以包括与入口端口410、接收器单元420、发射器单元440和出口端口450耦合的光电转换组件和电光(EO)组件,用于光信号或电信号的出口或入口。The video decoding device 400 includes: an inlet port 410 for receiving data and a receiver unit (Rx) 420, a processor for processing data, a logic unit or a central processing unit (CPU) 430, and a transmitter for transmitting data A unit (Tx) 440 and an exit port 450, and a memory 460 for storing data. The video decoding device 400 may further include a photoelectric conversion component and an electro-optical (EO) component coupled to the inlet port 410, the receiver unit 420, the transmitter unit 440, and the outlet port 450 for the outlet or inlet of the optical signal or the electrical signal.
处理器430通过硬件和软件实现。处理器430可以实现为一个或多个CPU芯片、核(例如,多核处理器)、FPGA、ASIC和DSP。处理器430与入口端口410、接收器单元420、发射器单元440、出口端口450和存储器460通信。处理器430包括译码模块470(例如编码模块470或解码模块470)。编码/解码模块470实现本文中所公开的实施例,以实现本申请实施例所提供的划分方法。例如,编码/解码模块470实现、处理或提供各种编码操作。因此,通过编码/解码模块470为视频译码设备400的功能提供了实质性的改进,并影响了视频译码设备400到不同状态的转换。或者,以存储在存储器460中并由处理器430执行的指令来实现编码/解码模块470。The processor 430 is implemented by hardware and software. The processor 430 may be implemented as one or more CPU chips, cores (eg, multi-core processors), FPGA, ASIC, and DSP. The processor 430 communicates with the inlet port 410, the receiver unit 420, the transmitter unit 440, the outlet port 450, and the memory 460. The processor 430 includes a decoding module 470 (for example, an encoding module 470 or a decoding module 470). The encoding/decoding module 470 implements the embodiments disclosed herein to implement the division method provided by the embodiments of the present application. For example, the encoding/decoding module 470 implements, processes, or provides various encoding operations. Therefore, the encoding/decoding module 470 provides a substantial improvement to the function of the video decoding device 400 and affects the conversion of the video decoding device 400 to different states. Alternatively, the encoding/decoding module 470 is implemented with instructions stored in the memory 460 and executed by the processor 430.
存储器460包括一个或多个磁盘、磁带机和固态硬盘,可以用作溢出数据存储设备,用于在选择性地执行这些程序时存储程序,并存储在程序执行过程中读取的指令和数据。存储器460可以是易失性和/或非易失性的,可以是只读存储器(ROM)、随机存取存储器(RAM)、随机存取存储器(ternary content-addressable memory,TCAM)和/或静态随机存取存储器(SRAM)。The memory 460 includes one or more magnetic disks, tape drives, and solid-state hard disks, and can be used as an overflow data storage device for storing programs when these programs are selectively executed, as well as instructions and data read during program execution. The memory 460 may be volatile and/or non-volatile, and may be read only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), random access memory (ternary content-addressable memory (TCAM), and/or static Random Access Memory (SRAM).
参见图5,图5是根据一示例性实施例的可用作图1A中的源设备12和目的地设备14中的任一个或两个的装置500的简化框图。装置500可以实现本申请的技术。换言之,图5为本申请实施例的编码设备或解码设备(简称为译码设备500)的一种实现方式的示意性框图。其中,译码设备500可以包括处理器510、存储器530和总线系统550。其中,处理器和存储器通过总线系统相连,该存储器用于存储指令,该处理器用于执行该存储器存储的指令。译码设备的存储器存储程序代码,且处理器可以调用存储器中存储的程序代码执行本申请描述的各种视频编码或解码方法,尤其是各种新的解码的方法。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。Referring to FIG. 5, FIG. 5 is a simplified block diagram of an apparatus 500 that can be used as either or both of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 in FIG. 1A according to an exemplary embodiment. The device 500 can implement the technology of the present application. In other words, FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram of an implementation manner of an encoding device or a decoding device (referred to simply as a decoding device 500) according to an embodiment of the present application. The decoding device 500 may include a processor 510, a memory 530, and a bus system 550. The processor and the memory are connected through a bus system, the memory is used to store instructions, and the processor is used to execute the instructions stored in the memory. The memory of the decoding device stores the program code, and the processor can call the program code stored in the memory to perform various video encoding or decoding methods described in this application, especially various new decoding methods. In order to avoid repetition, they are not described in detail here.
在本申请实施例中,处理器510可以是中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),处理器510还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。In the embodiment of the present application, the processor 510 may be a central processing unit (CPU), and the processor 510 may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), or off-the-shelf. Programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
该存储器530可以包括ROM设备或者RAM设备。任何其他适宜类型的存储设备 也可以用作存储器530。存储器530可以包括由处理器510使用总线550访问的代码和数据531。存储器530可以进一步包括操作系统533和应用程序535,该应用程序535包括允许处理器510执行本申请描述的视频编码或解码方法(尤其是本申请描述的解码方法)的至少一个程序。例如,应用程序535可以包括应用1至N,其进一步包括执行在本申请描述的视频编码或解码方法的视频编码或解码应用(简称视频译码应用)。The memory 530 may include a ROM device or a RAM device. Any other suitable type of storage device may also be used as the memory 530. The memory 530 may include code and data 531 accessed by the processor 510 using the bus 550. The memory 530 may further include an operating system 533 and an application program 535 including at least one program that allows the processor 510 to perform the video encoding or decoding method described in the present application (in particular, the decoding method described in the present application). For example, the application program 535 may include applications 1 to N, which further include a video encoding or decoding application (referred to as a video coding application for short) that performs the video encoding or decoding method described in this application.
该总线系统550除包括数据总线之外,还可以包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线等。但是为了清楚说明起见,在图中将各种总线都标为总线系统550。In addition to the data bus, the bus system 550 may also include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus. However, for clarity, various buses are marked as the bus system 550 in the figure.
可选的,译码设备500还可以包括一个或多个输出设备,诸如显示器570。在一个示例中,显示器570可以是触感显示器,其将显示器与可操作地感测触摸输入的触感单元合并。显示器570可以经由总线550连接到处理器510。Optionally, the decoding device 500 may also include one or more output devices, such as a display 570. In one example, the display 570 may be a tactile display that merges the display with a tactile unit that operably senses touch input. The display 570 may be connected to the processor 510 via the bus 550.
以下,说明本申请实施例中涉及的关键术语和技术,以方便读者理解:The key terms and technologies involved in the embodiments of the present application are described below to facilitate readers' understanding:
CTU:一幅图像由多个CTU构成,一个CTU通常对应于一个方形图像区域,一个CTU包含这个图像区域中的亮度像素和色度像素,或者只包含亮度像素,或者只包含色度像素。CTU的大小可以设置为64×64,当然也可以设置为其它值,如128×128或256×256等。64×64的CTU是包含64列、且每列包含64个像素的矩形像素点阵。其他大小的CTU的解释与此类似,此处不再赘述。CTU可以对应一些语法元素,这些语法元素用于指示如何将CTU划分成至少一个CU,以及用于解码每个CU得到重建图像的信息等。CTU: An image consists of multiple CTUs. A CTU usually corresponds to a square image area. A CTU contains the luminance pixels and chrominance pixels in this image area, or only the luminance pixels or only the chrominance pixels. The size of the CTU can be set to 64×64, of course, it can also be set to other values, such as 128×128 or 256×256. The 64×64 CTU is a rectangular pixel lattice containing 64 columns, and each column contains 64 pixels. The explanation of CTUs of other sizes is similar to this and will not be repeated here. The CTU may correspond to some syntax elements, which are used to indicate how to divide the CTU into at least one CU, and information used to decode each CU to obtain a reconstructed image.
CU:通常对应于一个A×B的矩形区域,包含A×B亮度像素和它对应的色度像素。其中,A为矩形的宽,B为矩形的高,A和B可以相同也可以不同。A和B的取值通常为2的整数次幂,例如,128、64、32、16、8、4等。一个CU可以通过解码处理得到一个A×B的矩形区域的重建图像,解码处理通常包括预测、反量化、反变换等。CU: usually corresponds to an A×B rectangular area, containing A×B luma pixels and its corresponding chroma pixels. Among them, A is the width of the rectangle, B is the height of the rectangle, A and B may be the same or different. The value of A and B is usually an integer power of 2, for example, 128, 64, 32, 16, 8, 4, etc. A CU can obtain a reconstructed image of an A×B rectangular area through the decoding process. The decoding process usually includes prediction, inverse quantization, and inverse transform.
划分方式,可以通过划分类型和划分方向来表征。其中,划分类型可以是二叉树划分类型或扩展四叉树划分类型等。划分方向可以是竖直方向或水平方向。其中,水平方向是垂直于当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。竖直方向是垂直于当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。基于此,划分方式可以是水平二叉树划分方式、竖直二叉树划分方式、水平扩展四叉树划分方式或竖直扩展四叉树划分方式。另外,划分方式也可以仅通过划分类型来表征,例如,四叉树划分方式与四叉树划分类型所表达的含义相同。The division method can be characterized by the division type and division direction. The division type may be a binary tree division type or an extended quadtree division type. The dividing direction may be a vertical direction or a horizontal direction. The horizontal direction is the direction perpendicular to the side where the height of the current image block is located. The vertical direction is the direction perpendicular to the side where the width of the current image block is located. Based on this, the division mode may be a horizontal binary tree division mode, a vertical binary tree division mode, a horizontally expanded quadtree division mode, or a vertically extended quadtree division mode. In addition, the division mode may also be characterized by only the division type, for example, the quadtree division mode has the same meaning as the quadtree division type.
BT(二叉树):是一种树状结构,一个节点可以划分成两个子节点。在采用二叉树的编码方法中,一个二叉树结构上的节点可以不划分,或者可以划分成两个下一层级的节点。将一个节点划分成两个节点的方式包括水平二叉树划分方式和竖直二叉树划分方式。其中,水平二叉树划分方式具体为:将节点对应的区域划分成上、下两个相同大小的区域,每个区域对应于一个节点,如图6中的(a)图所示。竖直二叉树划分方式具体为:将节点对应的区域划分成左、右两个大小相同的区域,每个区域对应于一个节点,如图6中的(b)图所示。BT (Binary Tree): It is a tree structure, a node can be divided into two child nodes. In the coding method using a binary tree, the nodes on a binary tree structure may not be divided, or may be divided into two nodes at the next level. The method of dividing a node into two nodes includes a horizontal binary tree division method and a vertical binary tree division method. Among them, the horizontal binary tree division method is specifically: the area corresponding to the node is divided into upper and lower areas of the same size, and each area corresponds to a node, as shown in (a) in FIG. 6. The vertical binary tree division method is specifically as follows: the area corresponding to the node is divided into left and right areas of the same size, and each area corresponds to a node, as shown in (b) in FIG. 6.
QT(四叉树):是一种树状结构,一个节点可划分成四个子节点。AVS视频标准采用基于四叉树的CTU划分方式,具体的,将CTU作为根节点,每个节点对应于一个方形的区域;一个节点可以不再划分(此时它对应的区域为一个CU),或者可以划 分成下一层级的四个节点,即把这个方形区域划分成四个大小相同的方形区域,划分后的每个方形区域的高、宽各为划分前的区域的高、宽的一半,每个区域对应于一个节点。如图6中的(c)图所示。QT (Quad Tree): It is a tree structure, a node can be divided into four child nodes. The AVS video standard uses the CTU division method based on the quadtree. Specifically, the CTU is used as the root node, and each node corresponds to a square area; a node can no longer be divided (in this case, the corresponding area is a CU), Or it can be divided into four nodes at the next level, that is, the square area is divided into four square areas of the same size, and the height and width of each square area after division are half of the height and width of the area before division , Each zone corresponds to a node. As shown in (c) in Figure 6.
EQT(扩展四叉树):是一种树状结构,一个节点可划分成四个子节点。在采用EQT的编码方法中,一个扩展四叉树结构上的节点可以不划分,或者可以划分成下一层级的四个节点。将一个节点划分成四个节点的方式包括:水平扩展四叉树划分方式和竖直扩展四叉树划分方式。其中,水平四叉树划分方式具体为:先水平三分,将节点对应的区域划分成上、中、下三个区域,每个区域对应于一个节点,其中上、中、下三个区域的高分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/4,再将中区域的节点划分成左、右两个相同大小的区域,如图6中的(d)图所示。竖直扩展四叉树划分方式具体为:先竖直三分,将节点对应的区域划分成左、中、右三个区域,每个区域对应于一个节点,其中左、中、右三个区域的宽分别为节点高的1/4、1/2、1/4,再将中区域的节点划分成上、下两个相同大小的区域,如图6中的(e)图所示。EQT (Extended Quadtree): It is a tree structure, a node can be divided into four child nodes. In the coding method using EQT, a node on an extended quadtree structure may not be divided, or may be divided into four nodes at the next level. The method of dividing one node into four nodes includes: horizontally expanding quadtree division method and vertically expanding quadtree division method. Among them, the horizontal quadtree division method is as follows: first horizontal three points, the area corresponding to the node is divided into upper, middle, and lower areas, each area corresponds to a node, of which the upper, middle, and lower areas The heights are 1/4, 1/2, and 1/4 of the node height, respectively, and then the nodes in the middle area are divided into left and right areas of the same size, as shown in (d) in FIG. 6. The vertical expansion quadtree is divided into three parts: first, vertically divide the area corresponding to the node into three areas of left, center, and right, each area corresponds to a node, and the three areas of left, center, and right The widths are 1/4, 1/2, and 1/4 of the node height, respectively, and the nodes in the middle area are divided into upper and lower areas of the same size, as shown in (e) in FIG. 6.
QTBT方案,是QT划分和BT划分级联的方式。具体的,CTU先按照QT划分,QT的叶节点允许继续使用BT进行划分,如图7所示,即第一级编码树为QT,第二级编码树为BT。其中图7右图中每个端点表示一个节点,一个节点连出4根实线表示四叉树划分,一个节点连出2根虚线表示二叉树划分,a到m为13个叶节点,每个叶节点对应1个CU;二叉树节点上的“1”表示竖直划分,“0”表示水平划分;一个CTU按照图7的右图进行划分,可以得到a到m这13个CU,如图7的左图所示。The QTBT scheme is a cascade of QT division and BT division. Specifically, the CTU is first divided according to QT, and the leaf nodes of QT are allowed to continue to be divided using BT, as shown in FIG. 7, that is, the first-level coding tree is QT and the second-level coding tree is BT. Among them, each endpoint in the right figure of FIG. 7 represents a node, a node connected with 4 solid lines represents a quadtree division, a node connected with 2 dotted lines represents a binary tree division, a to m are 13 leaf nodes, each leaf The node corresponds to 1 CU; "1" on the binary tree node indicates vertical division, and "0" indicates horizontal division; a CTU is divided according to the right figure of FIG. 7, and 13 CUs from a to m can be obtained, as shown in FIG. 7 Shown on the left.
QTBT方案优点为CU形状更加多样,从而更好地适应局部图像的内容。AVS2视频编码标准中基于QT划分使得所有CU都只能是正方形,即CU的宽(width)等于CU的高(height)。CU的宽是CU包含的像素的列数,CU的高是CU包含的像素的行数。引入BT划分后,CU的宽和高可以不相同,例如宽与高之比为2、4、8、16、1/2、1/4、1/8或者1/16。在QTBT下,所有CU的宽和高都不能小于最小CU的边长,最小CU尺寸可以包含在SPS中,例如最小CU可设置为4×4。The advantage of the QTBT scheme is that the shape of the CU is more diverse, so as to better adapt to the content of the local image. The QT division in the AVS2 video coding standard makes all CUs only be square, that is, the width of the CU is equal to the height of the CU. The width of the CU is the number of columns of pixels included in the CU, and the height of the CU is the number of rows of pixels included in the CU. After BT division is introduced, the width and height of the CU may be different, for example, the ratio of width to height is 2, 4, 8, 16, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, or 1/16. Under QTBT, the width and height of all CUs cannot be smaller than the side length of the smallest CU. The smallest CU size can be included in the SPS, for example, the smallest CU can be set to 4×4.
在QTBT方案的基础上,AVS3视频编码标准提出了EQT方案,即第一级编码树可以使用QT划分,第二级编码树使用BT和EQT划分。更具体的,以CTU为第一级编码树的根节点,第一级编码树采用QT划分方式,将CTU划分为第一级编码树的叶节点;再以第一级编码树的叶节点作为第二级编码树的根节点,第二级编码树可采用上述的水平BT划分方式、竖直BT划分方式、水平EQT划分方式、竖直EQT划分方式这四种划分方式,将第一级编码树的叶节点继续划分成第二级编码树的叶节点。Based on the QTBT scheme, the AVS3 video coding standard proposes the EQT scheme, that is, the first-level coding tree can be divided by QT, and the second-level coding tree can be divided by BT and EQT. More specifically, the CTU is used as the root node of the first-level coding tree. The first-level coding tree uses QT division to divide the CTU into the first-level coding tree leaf nodes; the first-level coding tree leaf nodes are used as The root node of the second-level coding tree. The second-level coding tree can adopt the above-mentioned horizontal BT division, vertical BT division, horizontal EQT division, and vertical EQT division. The leaf nodes of the tree continue to be divided into the leaf nodes of the second-level coding tree.
在第二级编码树中,对于编码器来说,通常基于最小CU尺寸原则和最小码率失真优化(rate distortion optimization,RDO)原则确定是否对当前图像块(即当前节点)进行划分,以及如果划分的话采用哪种划分方式。具体的:先基于最小CU尺寸原则,确定当前图像块可能的划分方式,即依据划分后得到的每个图像块的尺寸必须大于或等于最小CU尺寸,确定可适用于当前图像块的划分方式。如果所有的候选划分方式(即水平BT划分方式、竖直BT划分方式、水平EQT划分方式、竖直EQT划分方式)均不适用,则确定不能对当前图像块进行划分。否则,计算并比较不划分当前图像块时的RDO与采用每种可能的划分方式进行划分时RDO,如果不划分时RDO最小,则 确定不对当前图像块不进行划分;如果采用某种划分方式时RDO最小,则确定后续采用该划分方式对当前图像块进行划分。该方法需要遍历基于最小CU尺寸原则所确定的适用于当前图像块的所有可能的划分方式,从而确定出对当前图像块进行划分的划分方式,因此,编码复杂度较高。另外,如果确定采用某种划分方式对当前图像块进行划分,则码流中携带表示该划分方式的划分类型和划分方向的信息,因此,码流传输开销较大。In the second-level coding tree, for the encoder, it is usually determined whether to divide the current image block (that is, the current node) based on the minimum CU size principle and the minimum rate distortion optimization (RDO) principle, and if The division method used for division. Specifically: first, based on the principle of minimum CU size, determine the possible division method of the current image block, that is, according to the size of each image block obtained after division must be greater than or equal to the minimum CU size, determine the division method applicable to the current image block. If all candidate division methods (ie, horizontal BT division method, vertical BT division method, horizontal EQT division method, and vertical EQT division method) are not applicable, it is determined that the current image block cannot be divided. Otherwise, calculate and compare the RDO when the current image block is not divided with the RDO when using every possible division method. If the RDO is the smallest when it is not divided, it is determined that the current image block is not divided; if a certain division method is used If the RDO is the smallest, it is determined that the current image block will be divided in the following manner. This method needs to traverse all possible division methods that are determined for the current image block based on the principle of minimum CU size, so as to determine the division method for dividing the current image block, and therefore, the coding complexity is high. In addition, if it is determined that a certain division method is used to divide the current image block, the code stream carries information indicating the division type and division direction of the division method, and therefore, the transmission overhead of the code stream is large.
基于此,本申请实施例提供了一种视频编码方法及相应的解码方法。以下,结合附图,详细阐述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。Based on this, the embodiments of the present application provide a video encoding method and a corresponding decoding method. The technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are explained in detail below with reference to the drawings.
如图8所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种视频译码方法的流程示意图。图8所示的方法包括如下步骤:As shown in FIG. 8, it is a schematic flowchart of a video decoding method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method shown in Figure 8 includes the following steps:
S001:译码器根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定当前图像块的块划分策略。S001: The decoder determines the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block.
其中,当视频译码方法具体是视频编码方法时,译码器具体是编码器。当视频译码方法具体是视频解码方法时,译码器具体是解码器。Among them, when the video decoding method is specifically a video encoding method, the decoder is specifically an encoder. When the video decoding method is specifically a video decoding method, the decoder is specifically a decoder.
当前图像块,可以是对待译码图像进行划分的过程中的任意一个图像块。例如,第二级编码树中的任意一个图像块。The current image block may be any image block in the process of dividing the image to be decoded. For example, any image block in the second-level coding tree.
块划分策略,是指用于基于当前图像块得到编码块的策略。例如,当前图像块的块划分策略可以包括:对于当前图像块来说,哪些划分方式不合法。又如,当前图像块的块划分策略可以包括:对当前图像块进行划分时所采用的目标划分方式等。The block division strategy refers to a strategy for obtaining coded blocks based on the current image block. For example, the block division strategy of the current image block may include: for the current image block, which division method is illegal. As another example, the block division strategy of the current image block may include: a target division manner adopted when dividing the current image block, and the like.
可以理解的是,译码器可以基于最小CU尺寸原则确定可适用于当前图像块的划分方式。因此,在一种可能的实现方式中,可以将“最小CU尺寸原则”作为块划分策略的一部分。在另一种可能的实现方式中,可以认为“最小CU尺寸原则”与块划分策略是独立的两种策略。为了方便描述,下文中均以后者为例进行说明。It can be understood that the decoder may determine the division method applicable to the current image block based on the minimum CU size principle. Therefore, in a possible implementation, the "minimum CU size principle" can be used as part of the block division strategy. In another possible implementation, the "minimum CU size principle" and the block division strategy can be considered as two independent strategies. For convenience of description, the latter is used as an example in the following description.
S002:译码器将该块划分策略应用于当前图像块以得到编码块。S002: The decoder applies the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain an encoded block.
编码块,可以认为是编码树(如EQT方案中的第二级编码树)中的叶节点。关于编码块的相关解释可以参考上文,或者可以参考现有技术。The coding block can be regarded as a leaf node in the coding tree (such as the second-level coding tree in the EQT scheme). The relevant explanation about the coding block can refer to the above, or can refer to the prior art.
具体的:如果译码器基于块划分策略(可选的,还可以基于其他策略如最小CU尺寸原则和最小RDO原则等),确定不对当前图像块进行划分,则可以将当前图像块作为编码树中的叶节点。该情况下,当前图像块可以作为一个编码块。Specifically: If the decoder is based on a block division strategy (optionally, it can also be based on other strategies such as the minimum CU size principle and the minimum RDO principle, etc.) and determines not to divide the current image block, the current image block can be used as the coding tree In the leaf node. In this case, the current image block can be used as a coding block.
如果译码器基于块划分策略(可选的,还可以基于其他策略如最小CU尺寸原则和最小RDO原则等),确定需要对当前图像块进行划分,则可以将划分后得到的图像块分别作为当前图像块,然后执行S001~S002,以此类推,直至不再对当前图像块进行划分时,将该当前图像块作为编码树中的叶节点。该情况下,该当前图像块可以作为一个编码块。If the decoder is based on the block division strategy (optional, it can also be based on other strategies such as the minimum CU size principle and the minimum RDO principle, etc.) and determines that the current image block needs to be divided, the divided image blocks can be used as The current image block, and then execute S001 to S002, and so on, until the current image block is no longer divided, the current image block is used as a leaf node in the coding tree. In this case, the current image block can be used as a coding block.
S003:译码器通过对得到的编码块进行重构以实现对当前图像块的重构。该步骤的具体实现方式可以参考上文中的描述,或者可以参考现有技术。S003: The decoder reconstructs the obtained coding block to reconstruct the current image block. The specific implementation of this step can refer to the description above, or can refer to the prior art.
本技术方案中,有条件地确定当前图像块的块划分策略,从而得到编码块,这样,有助于降低划分复杂度,从而提高视频编解码性能。In this technical solution, the block division strategy of the current image block is determined conditionally to obtain the coding block. In this way, it helps to reduce the complexity of the division and thereby improve the performance of video encoding and decoding.
上述S001~S002可以认为是本申请实施例提供的图像块划分方法。以下,通过图 9~图12说明本申请实施例提供的图像块划分方法。The above S001 to S002 can be considered as the image block division method provided by the embodiment of the present application. The image block division method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described below with reference to FIGS. 9-12.
如图9所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种图像块划分方法流程示意图。图9所示的方法包括如下步骤:As shown in FIG. 9, it is a schematic flowchart of an image block division method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method shown in Figure 9 includes the following steps:
S101:编码器判断当前图像块的宽是否小于第一阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积。S101: The encoder determines whether the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block.
若否,则执行S102。若是,则执行S103。If not, S102 is executed. If yes, execute S103.
可选的,第一阈值是允许的编码树(如上文中描述的第二级编码树)中节点的长边长度与短边长度之比的最大值。可选的,第一阈值是大于1的值,如大于1的整数。可选的,第一阈值是2的整数幂,例如,第一阈值是4、8或16等。需要说明的是,如果不加说明,本申请实施例中的具体示例均是以第一阈值是大于1的值为例进行说明的。Optionally, the first threshold is the maximum value of the ratio of the long side length to the short side length of the nodes in the allowed coding tree (such as the second-level coding tree described above). Optionally, the first threshold is a value greater than 1, such as an integer greater than 1. Optionally, the first threshold is an integer power of 2, for example, the first threshold is 4, 8, or 16, etc. It should be noted that, if no description is given, the specific examples in the embodiments of the present application are described by taking the value of the first threshold greater than 1 as an example.
S102:编码器确定第一候选集合。第一候选集合是针对当前图像块合法的划分方式构成的集合。其中,第一候选集合不包括划分方向为水平方向的划分方式。也就是说,水平方向的划分方式不合法。然后,根据第一候选集合确定是否对当前图像块进行划分,以及当划分时所采用的目标划分方式。S102: The encoder determines the first candidate set. The first candidate set is a set composed of legal division methods for the current image block. Among them, the first candidate set does not include a division manner in which the division direction is the horizontal direction. In other words, the horizontal division method is illegal. Then, it is determined whether to divide the current image block according to the first candidate set, and the target division manner adopted when dividing.
如果确定对当前图像块进行划分,则执行S105。If it is determined to divide the current image block, S105 is executed.
如果确定不对当前图像块进行划分,则执行S108。If it is determined that the current image block is not divided, S108 is performed.
具体的,编码器可以首先确定当前图像块的块划分策略,该块划分策略包括不包括划分方向为水平方向的划分。也就是说,在当前图像块不满足第一条件时,确定当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为水平方向的划分。第一条件包括当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积。然后,至少基于该块划分策略,确定第一候选集合。例如,编码器可以基于“最小CU尺寸原则”和该块划分策略确定第一候选集合。假设基于“最小CU原则”,确定的可适用于当前图像块的划分方式包括竖直二叉树划分方式、竖直扩展四叉树划分方式、水平二叉树划分方式和水平扩展四叉树划分方式,那么:第一候选集合可以包括竖直二叉树划分方式和竖直扩展四叉树划分方式,不包括水平二叉树划分方式和水平扩展四叉树划分方式。也就是说,针对当前图像块合法的划分方式是竖直方向的划分方式。Specifically, the encoder may first determine the block division strategy of the current image block. The block division strategy includes the division that does not include the division direction in the horizontal direction. That is, when the current image block does not satisfy the first condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the horizontal direction. The first condition includes that the width of the current image block is smaller than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block. Then, based on at least the block division strategy, the first candidate set is determined. For example, the encoder may determine the first candidate set based on the "minimum CU size principle" and the block division strategy. Assuming that based on the "minimum CU principle", the determined division methods applicable to the current image block include a vertical binary tree division method, a vertically extended quadtree division method, a horizontal binary tree division method, and a horizontally extended quadtree division method, then: The first candidate set may include a vertical binary tree division mode and a vertically extended quadtree division mode, but does not include a horizontal binary tree division mode and a horizontally expanded quadtree division mode. In other words, the legal division method for the current image block is the vertical division method.
在一个示例中,根据候选集合确定是否对当前图像块进行划分,以及当划分时所采用的目标划分方式,可以包括:计算并比较不划分当前图像块时的RDO与采用该候选集合中的每种可能的划分方式进行划分时RDO;如果不划分时RDO最小,则确定不对当前图像块不进行划分;如果采用该候选集合中的某种划分方式时RDO最小,则确定该划分方式为目标划分方式。在另一个示例中,如果候选集合为空,则确定不对当前图像块进行划分。其中,这两个示例中的候选集合可以是第一候选集合,或者是下文中的第二候选集合或第三候选集合。In one example, determining whether to divide the current image block according to the candidate set, and the target division method used when dividing may include: calculating and comparing the RDO when the current image block is not divided and using each of the candidate sets RDO when dividing by a possible division method; if RDO is minimum when not dividing, it is determined that the current image block is not divided; if RDO is minimum when using a certain division method in the candidate set, the division method is determined as the target division the way. In another example, if the candidate set is empty, it is determined not to divide the current image block. The candidate set in these two examples may be the first candidate set, or the second candidate set or the third candidate set below.
可以理解的是,当第一阈值是大于1的值时,S101的判断结果是“否”,即当前图像块的宽大于或等于第一阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积,说明:当前图像块的宽是长边,高是短边。根据S102的描述可知,编码器默认垂直于当前图像块的短边(具体是高)的划分方式不合法。具体实现时,编码器和解码器可以预定义S101的判断结果是“否”时,垂直于当前图像块的短边(具体是高)的划分方式不合法。It can be understood that when the first threshold is a value greater than 1, the determination result of S101 is "No", that is, the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block. Explanation: the current image The width of the block is the long side and the height is the short side. According to the description of S102, it is known that, by default, the encoder is not perpendicular to the short side (specifically, high) of the current image block. During specific implementation, the encoder and decoder may predefine that when the judgment result of S101 is “No”, the division method perpendicular to the short side (specifically high) of the current image block is illegal.
S103:编码器判断待编码图像中的当前图像块的高是否小于第一阈值与当前图像 块的宽的乘积。S103: The encoder determines whether the height of the current image block in the image to be encoded is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block.
若否,则执行S104。若是,则执行S106。If not, S104 is executed. If yes, S106 is executed.
S104:编码器确定第二候选集合。第二候选集合是针对当前图像块合法的划分方式构成的集合。其中,第二候选集合不包括划分方向为竖直方向的划分方式。也就是说,竖直方向的划分方式不合法。然后,根据第二候选集合确定是否对当前图像块进行划分,以及当划分时所采用的目标划分方式。S104: The encoder determines the second candidate set. The second candidate set is a set composed of legal division methods for the current image block. Among them, the second candidate set does not include a division manner in which the division direction is the vertical direction. In other words, the vertical division method is illegal. Then, it is determined whether to divide the current image block according to the second candidate set, and the target division manner adopted when dividing.
如果确定对当前图像块进行划分,则执行S105。If it is determined to divide the current image block, S105 is executed.
如果确定不对当前图像块进行划分,则执行S108。If it is determined that the current image block is not divided, S108 is performed.
具体的,编码器首先确定当前图像块的块划分策略,该块划分策略包括不包括划分方向为竖直方向的划分。也就是说,在当前图像块不满足第二条件时,确定当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为竖直方向的划分。第二条件包括当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积。然后,至少基于该块划分策略,确定第二候选集合。例如,编码器可以基于“最小CU尺寸原则”和该块划分策略确定第二候选集合。假设基于“最小CU原则”,确定的可适用于当前图像块的划分方式包括竖直二叉树划分方式、竖直扩展四叉树划分方式、水平二叉树划分方式和水平扩展四叉树划分方式,那么:第二候选集合可以包括水平二叉树划分方式和水平扩展四叉树划分方式,不包括竖直二叉树划分方式和竖直扩展四叉树划分方式。也就是说,针对当前图像块合法的划分方式是水平方向。Specifically, the encoder first determines the block division strategy of the current image block. The block division strategy includes the division that does not include the division direction in the vertical direction. That is, when the current image block does not satisfy the second condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the vertical direction. The second condition includes that the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block. Then, at least based on the block division strategy, a second candidate set is determined. For example, the encoder may determine the second candidate set based on the "minimum CU size principle" and the block division strategy. Assuming that based on the "minimum CU principle", the determined division methods applicable to the current image block include a vertical binary tree division method, a vertically extended quadtree division method, a horizontal binary tree division method, and a horizontally extended quadtree division method, then: The second candidate set may include a horizontal binary tree division mode and a horizontally expanded quadtree division mode, but does not include a vertical binary tree division mode and a vertically extended quadtree division mode. In other words, the legal division method for the current image block is the horizontal direction.
可以理解的是,当第一阈值是大于1的值时,S103的判断结果是“否”,即当前图像块的高大于或等于第一阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积,说明:当前图像块的高是长边,宽是短边。根据S104的描述可知,编码器默认垂直于当前图像块的短边(具体是宽)的划分方式不合法。具体实现时,编码器和解码器可以预定义S103的判断结果是“否”时,垂直于当前图像块的短边(具体是宽)的划分方式不合法。It can be understood that when the first threshold is a value greater than 1, the judgment result of S103 is "No", that is, the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block. Explanation: the current image The height of the block is the long side and the width is the short side. According to the description of S104, it is known that the encoder's default division method perpendicular to the short side (specifically the width) of the current image block is illegal. In a specific implementation, the encoder and decoder may predefine that when the judgment result of S103 is “No”, the division method perpendicular to the short side (specifically the width) of the current image block is illegal.
S105:编码器按照目标划分方式对当前图像块进行划分。并且,将第一标识信息和第二标识信息编入码流。第一标识信息用于表示是否对当前图像块进行划分(具体是划分)。第二标识信息用于表示目标划分方式的划分类型(如二叉树划分类型或扩展四叉树划分类型)。S105: The encoder divides the current image block according to the target division mode. And, the first identification information and the second identification information are encoded into the code stream. The first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block (specifically, division). The second identification information is used to indicate the division type of the target division manner (for example, binary tree division type or extended quadtree division type).
执行S105之后,执行S109。After executing S105, execute S109.
S106:编码器确定第三候选集合。第三候选集合是针对当前图像块合法的划分方式构成的集合。然后,根据第三候选集合确定是否对当前图像块进行划分,以及当划分时所采用的目标划分方式。S106: The encoder determines a third candidate set. The third candidate set is a set composed of legal division methods for the current image block. Then, it is determined whether to divide the current image block according to the third candidate set, and the target division manner adopted when dividing.
如果确定对当前图像块进行划分,则执行S107。If it is determined to divide the current image block, S107 is performed.
如果确定不对当前图像块进行划分,则执行S108。If it is determined that the current image block is not divided, S108 is performed.
具体实现时,编码器可以基于“最小CU尺寸原则”确定第三候选集合。例如,第三候选集合可以包括水平二叉树划分方式、水平扩展四叉树划分方式、竖直二叉树划分方式和竖直扩展四叉树划分方式。In specific implementation, the encoder may determine the third candidate set based on the "minimum CU size principle". For example, the third candidate set may include a horizontal binary tree division manner, a horizontally expanded quadtree division manner, a vertical binary tree division manner, and a vertically expanded quadtree division manner.
需要说明的是,上述S101~S102和S103~S104的执行顺序可以不分先后。例如,编码器可以先执行S103,并在S103的判断结果为“是”时,执行上述S101,在S103的判断结果为“否”时,执行上述S104。并且,在S101的判断结果为“是”时,执行上 述S106,在S101的判断结果为“否”时,执行上述S102。It should be noted that, the execution order of the foregoing S101 to S102 and S103 to S104 may be in no particular order. For example, the encoder may first execute S103, and execute the above S101 when the judgment result of S103 is "Yes", and execute the above S104 when the judgment result of S103 is "No". When the judgment result of S101 is "Yes", the above S106 is executed, and when the judgment result of S101 is "No", the above S102 is executed.
另外,编码器还可以不执行上述S101~S102,或者,不执行上述S103~S104。例如,当不执行上述S103~S104时,编码器可以在S101的判断结果为“是”时,直接执行上述S106。In addition, the encoder may not perform the above-mentioned S101 to S102, or may not perform the above-mentioned S103 to S104. For example, when the above S103 to S104 are not executed, the encoder may directly execute the above S106 when the judgment result of S101 is "YES".
S107:编码器按照目标划分方式对当前图像块进行划分。并且,将第一标识信息、第二标识信息和第三标识信息均编入码流。第一标识信息用于表示是否对当前图像块进行划分(具体是划分)。第二标识信息用于表示目标划分方式的划分类型(如二叉树划分类型或扩展四叉树划分类型),第三标识信息用于表示目标划分方式的划分方向(如水平方向或竖直方向)。S107: The encoder divides the current image block according to the target division mode. And, the first identification information, the second identification information, and the third identification information are all encoded into the code stream. The first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block (specifically, division). The second identification information is used to indicate the division type of the target division mode (such as the binary tree division type or the extended quadtree division type), and the third identification information is used to indicate the division direction of the target division mode (such as the horizontal direction or the vertical direction).
执行S107之后,执行S109。After executing S107, execute S109.
S108:编码器将第一标识信息编入码流。第一标识信息用于表示是否对当前图像块进行划分(具体是不划分)。S108: The encoder encodes the first identification information into the code stream. The first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block (specifically, not to divide).
S109:编码器向解码器发送码流。S109: The encoder sends a code stream to the decoder.
需要说明的是,对于执行划分操作后得到的“划分后的图像块”来说,编码器可以将其作为当前图像块,从而返回执行S101~S109。It should be noted that, for the "divided image block" obtained after performing the division operation, the encoder may use it as the current image block, and thus return to execution of S101 to S109.
本实施例提供的视频编码方法,有条件地确定当前图像块的块划分策略,与现有EQT方案中针对第二级编码树中的节点的划分方法相比,能够减小划分复杂度,从而提高编码效率。并且,当当前图像块的宽大于或等于第一阈值与高的乘积,和/或当前图像块的高大于或等于第一阈值与宽的乘积时,默认划分方向是垂直于当前图像块的短边的划分方式不合法。因此,不需要在码流中编入表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方向的信息,这样可以节省传输比特开销。另外,本技术方案有助于将编码树中的叶节点的宽与高之比(或高与宽之比)限制在一定范围之内,有助于在编码过程中尽量不出现“细长”的节点,从而方便进行编码。The video coding method provided in this embodiment conditionally determines the block division strategy of the current image block. Compared with the existing EQT scheme for the nodes in the second-level coding tree, the division complexity can be reduced, thereby Improve coding efficiency. Moreover, when the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the height, and/or the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the width, the default division direction is the short perpendicular to the current image block The division of edges is illegal. Therefore, there is no need to compile information indicating the division direction of the current image block into the code stream, which can save transmission bit overhead. In addition, this technical solution helps to limit the width-to-height ratio (or height-to-width ratio) of leaf nodes in the coding tree to a certain range, and helps to avoid "slenderness" in the coding process as much as possible Node, which facilitates coding.
如图10所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种图像块划分方法的流程示意图。图10所示的视频解码方法与图9所示的视频编码方法相对应,因此,本实施例中相关内容的解释可以参考上述图9所示的实施例。图10所示的方法包括如下步骤:As shown in FIG. 10, it is a schematic flowchart of an image block division method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The video decoding method shown in FIG. 10 corresponds to the video encoding method shown in FIG. 9, therefore, for the explanation of related content in this embodiment, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 described above. The method shown in Figure 10 includes the following steps:
S201:解码器接收来自编码器的码流。S201: The decoder receives the code stream from the encoder.
S202:解码器解析码流,以得到第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于表示是否对当前图像块进行划分。S202: The decoder parses the code stream to obtain first identification information, where the first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block.
如果第一标识信息表示不对当前图像块进行划分,则针对当前图像块的划分过程结束。该情况下,可以将当前图像块作为一个编码块。If the first identification information indicates that the current image block is not divided, the division process for the current image block ends. In this case, the current image block can be used as a coding block.
如果第一标识信息表示对当前图像块进行划分,则执行以下S203。If the first identification information indicates that the current image block is divided, the following S203 is performed.
S203:解码器判断当前图像块的宽是否小于第一阈值与高的乘积。S203: The decoder judges whether the width of the current image block is smaller than the product of the first threshold and the height.
若否,则执行S204。若是,则执行S205。If not, S204 is executed. If yes, execute S205.
S204:解码器继续解析码流,以得到第二标识信息,第二标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分类型;并采用第二标识信息所表示的划分类型,对当前图像块进行划分方向为竖直方向的划分。S204: The decoder continues to parse the code stream to obtain second identification information, and the second identification information is used to indicate the type of division for dividing the current image block; and the type of division indicated by the second identification information is used for the current image block. The division direction is vertical division.
执行S204之后,则针对当前图像块的划分过程结束。After executing S204, the division process for the current image block ends.
具体的,当S203的判断结果是“否”时,解码器可以基于该判断结果,确定当前图 像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为水平方向的划分。然后,基于该块划分策略,采用第二标识信息所表示的划分类型,对当前图像块进行划分方向为竖直方向的划分。Specifically, when the judgment result of S203 is "No", the decoder may determine that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the horizontal direction based on the judgment result. Then, based on the block division strategy, the division type indicated by the second identification information is used to divide the current image block into the vertical direction.
示例的,第二标识信息所表示的划分类型可以包括二叉树划分类型或扩展四叉树划分类型等。如果第二标识信息所表示的划分类型是二叉树划分类型,则对当前图像块进行竖直二叉树划分;如果第二标识信息所表示的划分类型是扩展四叉树划分类型,则对当前图像块进行竖直扩展四叉树划分。Exemplarily, the division type indicated by the second identification information may include a binary tree division type or an extended quadtree division type, and so on. If the division type indicated by the second identification information is a binary tree division type, the current image block is divided into vertical binary trees; if the division type indicated by the second identification information is an extended quadtree division type, the current image block is divided into Vertically expand the quadtree division.
当第一阈值是大于1的值时,S203的判断结果是“否”,即当前图像块的宽大于或等于第一阈值与高的乘积,说明当前图像块的宽是长边,高是短边。When the first threshold is a value greater than 1, the judgment result of S203 is "No", that is, the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the height, indicating that the width of the current image block is the long side and the height is short side.
S205:解码器判断当前图像块的高是否小于第一阈值与宽的乘积。S205: The decoder determines whether the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width.
若否,则执行S206。若是,则执行S207。If not, S206 is executed. If yes, execute S207.
S206:解码器继续解析码流,以得到第二标识信息,第二标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分类型;并采用第二标识信息所表示的划分类型,对当前图像块进行划分方向为水平方向的划分。S206: The decoder continues to parse the code stream to obtain second identification information, and the second identification information is used to indicate the type of division for dividing the current image block; and the type of division indicated by the second identification information is used for the current image block. The division direction is the division in the horizontal direction.
执行S206之后,则针对当前图像块的划分过程结束。After executing S206, the division process for the current image block ends.
具体的,当S205的判断结果是“否”时,解码器可以基于该判断结果,确定当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为竖直方向的划分。然后,基于该块划分策略,采用第二标识信息所表示的划分类型,对当前图像块进行划分方向为水平方向的划分。Specifically, when the judgment result of S205 is "No", the decoder may determine that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the vertical direction based on the judgment result. Then, based on the block division strategy, the division type indicated by the second identification information is used to divide the current image block into the horizontal direction.
示例的,第二标识信息所表示的划分类型可以包括二叉树划分类型或扩展四叉树划分类型等。如果第二标识信息所表示的划分类型是二叉树划分类型,则对当前图像块进行水平二叉树划分;如果第二标识信息所表示的划分类型是扩展四叉树划分类型,则对当前图像块进行水平扩展四叉树划分。Exemplarily, the division type indicated by the second identification information may include a binary tree division type or an extended quadtree division type, and so on. If the division type indicated by the second identification information is a binary tree division type, horizontal binary tree division is performed on the current image block; if the division type indicated by the second identification information is an extended quadtree division type, horizontal level is performed on the current image block Extended quadtree division.
当第一阈值是大于1的值时,S205的判断结果是“否”,即当前图像块的高大于或等于第一阈值与宽的乘积,说明当前图像块的高是长边,宽是短边。When the first threshold is a value greater than 1, the judgment result of S205 is "No", that is, the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the width, indicating that the height of the current image block is the long side and the width is short side.
S207:解码器继续解析码流,以得到第二标识信息和第三标识信息,第二标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分类型,第三标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方向;以及,采用第二标识信息所表示的划分类型,对当前图像块进行第三标识信息所表示的划分方向的划分。S207: The decoder continues to parse the code stream to obtain second identification information and third identification information. The second identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block, and the third identification information is used to indicate the current image block. The division direction of the division; and, using the division type indicated by the second identification information, divide the current image block into the division direction indicated by the third identification information.
执行S207之后,则针对当前图像块的划分过程结束。After performing S207, the division process for the current image block ends.
例如,当第二标识信息所表示的划分类型是二叉树划分类型,且第三标识信息所表示的划分方向是水平划分,则对当前图像块进行水平二叉树划分。其他示例不再一一列举。For example, when the division type indicated by the second identification information is a binary tree division type, and the division direction indicated by the third identification information is a horizontal division, horizontal binary tree division is performed on the current image block. Other examples are not listed one by one.
具体的,解码器可以执行一次解析码流的操作,得到第二标识信息和第三标识信息。或者,解码器可以执行一次解析码流的操作得到第二标识信息,执行另一次解析码流的操作得到第三标识信息,且两次解析步骤可以不分先后。Specifically, the decoder may perform the operation of parsing the code stream once to obtain the second identification information and the third identification information. Alternatively, the decoder may perform the operation of parsing the code stream once to obtain second identification information, and perform another operation of parsing the code stream to obtain third identification information, and the two parsing steps may be in no particular order.
需要说明的是,上述S203~S204和S205~S206的执行顺序可以不分先后。例如,解码器可以先执行S205,并在S205的判断结果为“是”时,执行上述S203,在S205的判断结果为“否”时,执行上述S206。并且,在S203的判断结果为“是”时,执行上述S207,在S203的判断结果为“否”时,执行上述S204。It should be noted that the execution order of the foregoing S203 to S204 and S205 to S206 may be in no particular order. For example, the decoder may first execute S205, and execute the above S203 when the judgment result of S205 is "Yes", and execute the above S206 when the judgment result of S205 is "No". In addition, when the judgment result of S203 is "Yes", the above S207 is executed, and when the judgment result of S203 is "No", the above S204 is executed.
另外,解码器还可以不执行上述S203~S204,或者,不执行上述S205~S206。例 如,当不执行上述S205~S206时,解码器可以在S203的判断结果为“是”时,直接执行上述S207。可以理解的是,具体实现时,若编码器执行上述S101~S102,则解码器执行上述S203~S204;若编码器执行上述S103~S104,则解码器执行上述S205~S206。In addition, the decoder may not perform the above S203 to S204, or may not perform the above S205 to S206. For example, when the above S205 to S206 are not executed, the decoder can directly execute the above S207 when the judgment result of S203 is "YES". It can be understood that, in a specific implementation, if the encoder executes the above S101 to S102, the decoder executes the above S203 to S204; if the encoder performs the above S103 to S104, the decoder executes the above S205 to S206.
需要说明的是,对于执行划分操作后得到的“划分后的图像块”来说,解码器可以将其作为当前图像块,从而执行S202~S207。It should be noted that, for the "divided image block" obtained after performing the division operation, the decoder may use it as the current image block, so as to execute S202-S207.
本实施例提供的视频解码方法,当当前图像块的宽大于或等于第一阈值与高的乘积,和/或当前图像块的高大于或等于第一阈值与宽的乘积时,解码器默认划分方向是垂直于当前图像块的短边的划分方式不合法。这样,编码器不需要在码流中编入表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方向的信息,因此可以节省传输比特开销。另外,本技术方案有助于将编码树中的叶节点的宽与高之比(或高与宽之比)限制在一定范围之内,有助于在编码过程中尽量不出现“细长”的节点,从而方便进行编码。In the video decoding method provided in this embodiment, when the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the height, and/or the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the first threshold and the width, the decoder defaults to dividing The direction is perpendicular to the short side of the current image block, which is illegal. In this way, the encoder does not need to incorporate information indicating the division direction of the current image block into the code stream, so transmission bit overhead can be saved. In addition, this technical solution helps to limit the width-to-height ratio (or height-to-width ratio) of leaf nodes in the coding tree to a certain range, and helps to avoid "slenderness" in the coding process as much as possible Node, which facilitates coding.
如图11所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种图像块划分方法的流程示意图。本实施例中的当前图像块、第一标识信息、第二标识信息和第三标识信息的相关说明均可以参考上文。图11所示的方法包括如下步骤:As shown in FIG. 11, it is a schematic flowchart of a method for dividing an image block according to an embodiment of the present application. The relevant descriptions of the current image block, the first identification information, the second identification information and the third identification information in this embodiment can all refer to the above. The method shown in Figure 11 includes the following steps:
S301:编码器判断当前图像块的宽是否小于第二阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积。S301: The encoder determines whether the width of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block.
若否,则执行S302。若是,则执行S303。If not, S302 is executed. If yes, execute S303.
可选的,第二阈值是允许的编码树中节点的长边长度与短边长度之比的最大值的二分之一。可选的,第二阈值是大于1的值,如大于1的整数。可选的,第二阈值是2的整数幂,例如,第二阈值是2、4或8等。需要说明的是,如果不加说明,本申请实施例中的具体示例均是以第二阈值是大于1的值为例进行说明的。Optionally, the second threshold is one-half the maximum value of the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the node in the allowed coding tree. Optionally, the second threshold is a value greater than 1, such as an integer greater than 1. Optionally, the second threshold is an integer power of 2, for example, the second threshold is 2, 4, or 8, and so on. It should be noted that, if no description is given, the specific examples in the embodiments of the present application are described by taking the value of the second threshold greater than 1 as an example.
S302:编码器确定第一候选集合。第一候选集合是针对当前图像块合法的划分方式构成的集合。其中,第一候选集合不包括划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分方式。也就是说,划分方向是水平方向的扩展四叉树划分方式不合法。然后,根据第一候选集合确定是否对当前图像块进行划分,以及当划分时所采用的目标划分方式。S302: The encoder determines the first candidate set. The first candidate set is a set composed of legal division methods for the current image block. Among them, the first candidate set does not include an expanded quadtree division manner in which the division direction is the horizontal direction. In other words, it is illegal to divide the quadtree in the horizontal direction. Then, it is determined whether to divide the current image block according to the first candidate set, and the target division manner adopted when dividing.
如果确定对当前图像块进行划分,则执行S305。If it is determined to divide the current image block, S305 is executed.
如果确定不对当前图像块进行划分,则执行S308。If it is determined that the current image block is not divided, S308 is executed.
具体的,编码器可以首先确定当前图像块的块划分策略,该块划分策略包括不包括划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分。也就是说,在当前图像块不满足第三条件时,确定当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分。第三条件包括当前图像块的宽小于第二阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积。然后,至少基于该块划分策略,确定第一候选集合。例如,编码器可以基于“最小CU尺寸原则”和该块划分策略确定第一候选集合。假设基于“最小CU原则”,确定的可适用于当前图像块的划分方式包括竖直二叉树划分方式、竖直扩展四叉树划分方式、水平二叉树划分方式和水平扩展四叉树划分方式,那么:第一候选集合可以包括水平二叉树划分方式、竖直二叉树划分方式和竖直扩展四叉树划分方式,不包括水平扩展四叉树划分方式。Specifically, the encoder may first determine the block division strategy of the current image block. The block division strategy includes the division of the extended quadtree that does not include the horizontal division direction. That is, when the current image block does not satisfy the third condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the extended quadtree division in which the division direction is the horizontal direction. The third condition includes that the width of the current image block is smaller than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block. Then, based on at least the block division strategy, the first candidate set is determined. For example, the encoder may determine the first candidate set based on the "minimum CU size principle" and the block division strategy. Assuming that based on the "minimum CU principle", the determined division methods applicable to the current image block include a vertical binary tree division method, a vertically extended quadtree division method, a horizontal binary tree division method, and a horizontally extended quadtree division method, then: The first candidate set may include a horizontal binary tree division manner, a vertical binary tree division manner, and a vertical expansion quadtree division manner, but does not include a horizontal expansion quadtree division manner.
S303:编码器判断待编码图像中的当前图像块的高是否小于第二阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积。S303: The encoder determines whether the height of the current image block in the image to be encoded is less than the product of the second threshold and the width of the current image block.
若否,则执行S304;若是,则执行S306。If not, execute S304; if yes, execute S306.
S304:编码器确定第二候选集合。第二候选集合是针对当前图像块合法的划分方 式构成的集合。其中,第二候选集合不包括划分方向为竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分方式。也就是说,划分方向是竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分方式不合法。然后,根据第二候选集合确定是否对当前图像块进行划分,以及当划分时所采用的目标划分方式。S304: The encoder determines the second candidate set. The second candidate set is a set composed of legal division methods for the current image block. Wherein, the second candidate set does not include the extended quadtree division manner in which the division direction is the vertical direction. In other words, it is illegal to divide the quadtree in the vertical direction. Then, it is determined whether to divide the current image block according to the second candidate set, and the target division manner adopted when dividing.
如果确定对当前图像块进行划分,则执行S305。If it is determined to divide the current image block, S305 is executed.
如果确定不对当前图像块进行划分,则执行S308。If it is determined that the current image block is not divided, S308 is executed.
具体的,编码器可以首先确定当前图像块的块划分策略,该块划分策略包括不包括划分方向为竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分。也就是说,在当前图像块不满足第四条件时,确定当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分。第四条件包括当前图像块的高小于第二阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积。然后,至少基于该块划分策略,确定第二候选集合。例如,编码器可以基于“最小CU尺寸原则”和该块划分策略确定第二候选集合。假设基于“最小CU原则”,确定的可适用于当前图像块的划分方式包括竖直二叉树划分方式、竖直扩展四叉树划分方式、水平二叉树划分方式和水平扩展四叉树划分方式,那么:第二候选集合可以包括水平二叉树划分方式、竖直二叉树划分方式和水平扩展四叉树划分方式,不包括竖直扩展四叉树划分方式。Specifically, the encoder may first determine the block division strategy of the current image block. The block division strategy includes the division of the extended quadtree that does not include the vertical division direction. That is, when the current image block does not satisfy the fourth condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the extended quadtree division with the vertical division direction. The fourth condition includes that the height of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the width of the current image block. Then, at least based on the block division strategy, a second candidate set is determined. For example, the encoder may determine the second candidate set based on the "minimum CU size principle" and the block division strategy. Assuming that based on the "minimum CU principle", the determined division methods applicable to the current image block include a vertical binary tree division method, a vertically extended quadtree division method, a horizontal binary tree division method, and a horizontally extended quadtree division method, then: The second candidate set may include a horizontal binary tree division manner, a vertical binary tree division manner, and a horizontally expanded quadtree division manner, but does not include a vertically extended quadtree division manner.
S305:编码器按照目标划分方式对当前图像块进行划分。并且:S305: The encoder divides the current image block according to the target division mode. and:
如果目标划分方式的划分类型是二叉树划分类型,则将第一标识信息、第二标识信息和第三标识信息均编入码流,其中,第一标识信息用于表示是否对当前图像块进行划分(具体是划分),第二标识信息用于表示目标划分方式的划分类型(具体是二叉树划分类型),第三标识信息用于表示目标划分方式的划分方向(具体是水平方向或竖直方向)。If the division type of the target division mode is a binary tree division type, the first identification information, the second identification information, and the third identification information are all encoded into the code stream, where the first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block (Specifically, division), the second identification information is used to indicate the division type of the target division mode (specifically, binary tree division type), and the third identification information is used to indicate the division direction of the target division mode (specifically, horizontal direction or vertical direction) .
如果目标划分方式的划分类型是扩展四叉树划分类型,则将第一标识信息和第二标识信息编入码流,其中,第一标识信息用于表示是否对当前图像块进行划分(具体是划分),第二标识信息用于表示目标划分方式的划分类型(具体是扩展四叉树划分类型)。If the division type of the target division mode is the extended quadtree division type, the first identification information and the second identification information are encoded into the code stream, where the first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block (specifically Division), the second identification information is used to indicate the division type of the target division mode (specifically, the division type of the extended quadtree).
执行S305之后,执行S309。After executing S305, execute S309.
S306~S309,可以参考上述S106~S109。For S306 to S309, refer to S106 to S109 above.
需要说明的是,对于执行划分操作后得到的“划分后的图像块”来说,编码器可以将其作为当前图像块,从而返回执行S301~S309。It should be noted that, for the "divided image block" obtained after performing the division operation, the encoder may use it as the current image block, and thus return to execute S301 to S309.
本实施例中,编码器确定是否对当前图像块进行划分,以及当划分时所采用的目标划分方式的具体实现方式,可以参考上文,此处不再赘述。In this embodiment, the encoder determines whether to divide the current image block, and the specific implementation manner of the target division mode adopted when dividing, can refer to the above, and will not be described here.
需要说明的是,上述S301~S302和S303~S304的执行顺序可以不分先后。例如,编码器可以先执行S303,并在S303的判断结果为“是”时,执行上述S301,在S303的判断结果为“否”时,执行上述S304。并且,在S301的判断结果为“是”时,执行上述S306,在S301的判断结果为“否”时,执行上述S302。It should be noted that the execution order of the above S301 to S302 and S303 to S304 may be in no particular order. For example, the encoder may execute S303 first, and execute the above S301 when the judgment result of S303 is “Yes”, and execute the above S304 when the judgment result of S303 is “No”. In addition, when the judgment result of S301 is “Yes”, the above S306 is executed, and when the judgment result of S301 is “No”, the above S302 is executed.
另外,编码器还可以不执行上述S301~S302,或者,不执行上述S303~S304。例如,当不执行上述S303~S304时,编码器可以在S301的判断结果为“是”时,直接执行上述S306。In addition, the encoder may not perform the above S301 to S302, or may not perform the above S303 to S304. For example, when the above S303 to S304 are not executed, the encoder may directly execute the above S306 when the judgment result of S301 is "Yes".
本实施例提供的视频编码方法中,有条件地确定当前图像块的块划分策略,与现有EQT方案中针对第二级编码树中的节点的划分方法相比,能够减小划分复杂度,从 而提高编码效率。并且,当当前图像块的宽大于或等于第二阈值与高的乘积,和/或当前图像块的高大于或等于第二阈值与宽的乘积时,默认划分方向是垂直于当前图像块的短边的扩展四叉树划分方式不合法。因此,当划分类型是扩展四叉树划分时,不需要在码流中编入表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方向的信息,这样可以节省传输比特开销。另外,本技术方案有助于将编码树中的叶节点的宽与高之比(或高与宽之比)限制在一定范围之内,有助于在编码过程中尽量不出现“细长”的节点,从而方便进行编码。In the video coding method provided in this embodiment, the block division strategy of the current image block is determined conditionally, which can reduce the division complexity compared with the existing EQT scheme for the nodes in the second-level coding tree. Thereby improving coding efficiency. Moreover, when the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the second threshold and the height, and/or the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the second threshold and the width, the default division direction is the short perpendicular to the current image block The method of dividing the extended quadtree is illegal. Therefore, when the division type is extended quadtree division, it is not necessary to compile information indicating the division direction of the current image block into the code stream, which can save transmission bit overhead. In addition, this technical solution helps to limit the width-to-height ratio (or height-to-width ratio) of leaf nodes in the coding tree to a certain range, and helps to avoid "slenderness" in the coding process as much as possible Node, which facilitates coding.
如图12所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种图像块划分方法的流程示意图。图12所示的视频解码方法与图11所示的视频编码方法相对应。图12所示的方法包括如下步骤:As shown in FIG. 12, it is a schematic flowchart of an image block division method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The video decoding method shown in FIG. 12 corresponds to the video encoding method shown in FIG. 11. The method shown in Figure 12 includes the following steps:
S401:解码器接收来自编码器的码流。S401: The decoder receives the code stream from the encoder.
S402:解码器解析码流,以得到第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于表示是否对当前图像块进行划分。S402: The decoder parses the code stream to obtain first identification information, where the first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block.
如果第一标识信息表示对当前图像块进行划分,则执行S403。If the first identification information indicates that the current image block is divided, S403 is executed.
如果第一标识信息表示不对当前图像块进行划分,则针对当前图像块的划分过程结束。If the first identification information indicates that the current image block is not divided, the division process for the current image block ends.
S403:解码器判断当前图像块的宽是否小于第二阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积。S403: The decoder determines whether the width of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block.
若否,则执行S404。若是,则执行S405。If not, S404 is executed. If yes, execute S405.
S404:解码器继续解析码流,以得到第二标识信息,第二标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分类型。并且:S404: The decoder continues to parse the code stream to obtain second identification information, where the second identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block. and:
如果第二标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行二叉树划分,则解码器继续解析码流,以得到第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方向。当第三标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行水平划分时,对当前图像块进行是水平二叉树划分。当第三标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行竖直划分时,对当前图像块进行竖直二叉树划分。If the second identification information is used to indicate the binary tree division of the current image block, the decoder continues to parse the code stream to obtain third identification information, and the third identification information is used to indicate the division direction of the current image block. When the third identification information is used to indicate that the current image block is divided horizontally, the current image block is divided into horizontal binary trees. When the third identification information is used to indicate that the current image block is vertically divided, the current image block is vertically divided into binary trees.
如果第二标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分,则对当前图像块进行竖直扩展四叉树划分。If the second identification information is used to indicate that the current image block is divided into extended quadtrees, then the current image block is vertically divided into quadtrees.
执行S404之后,针对当前图像块的划分过程结束。After executing S404, the division process for the current image block ends.
S405:解码器判断当前图像块的高是否小于第二阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积。S405: The decoder determines whether the height of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the width of the current image block.
若否,则执行S406。若是,则执行S407。If not, S406 is executed. If yes, execute S407.
S406:解码器继续解析码流,以得到第二标识信息,第二标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分类型。并且:S406: The decoder continues to parse the code stream to obtain second identification information, where the second identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block. and:
如果第二标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行二叉树划分,则解码器继续解析码流,以得到第三标识信息,第三标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方向。当第三标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行水平划分时,对当前图像块进行是水平二叉树划分。当第三标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行竖直划分时,对当前图像块进行竖直二叉树划分。If the second identification information is used to indicate the binary tree division of the current image block, the decoder continues to parse the code stream to obtain third identification information, and the third identification information is used to indicate the division direction of the current image block. When the third identification information is used to indicate that the current image block is divided horizontally, the current image block is divided into horizontal binary trees. When the third identification information is used to indicate that the current image block is vertically divided, the current image block is vertically divided into binary trees.
如果第二标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分,则对当前图像块进行水平扩展四叉树划分。If the second identification information is used to indicate that the current image block is extended quadtree division, then the current image block is horizontally extended quadtree division.
执行S406之后,针对当前图像块的划分过程结束。After performing S406, the division process for the current image block ends.
S407:可以参考上述S207。S407: Refer to the above S207.
执行S407之后,针对当前图像块的划分过程结束。After performing S407, the division process for the current image block ends.
需要说明的是,对于执行划分操作后得到的“划分后的图像块”来说,解码器可以将其作为当前图像块,从而执行S402~S407。It should be noted that, for the "divided image block" obtained after performing the division operation, the decoder may use it as the current image block, so as to execute S402 to S407.
需要说明的是,上述S403~S404和S405~S406的执行顺序可以不分先后。例如,解码器可以先执行S405,并在S405的判断结果为“是”时,执行上述S403,在S405的判断结果为“否”时,执行上述S406。并且,在S403的判断结果为“是”时,执行上述S407,在S403的判断结果为“否”时,执行上述S404。It should be noted that the execution order of the above S403 to S404 and S405 to S406 may be in no particular order. For example, the decoder may execute S405 first, and execute the above S403 when the judgment result of S405 is "Yes", and execute the above S406 when the judgment result of S405 is "No". In addition, when the judgment result of S403 is "Yes", the above S407 is executed, and when the judgment result of S403 is "No", the above S404 is executed.
另外,解码器还可以不执行上述S403~S404,或者,不执行上述S405~S406。例如,当不执行上述S405~S406时,解码器可以在S403的判断结果为“是”时,直接执行上述S407。可以理解的是,具体实现时,若编码器执行上述S301~S302,则解码器执行上述S403~S404;若编码器执行上述S303~S304,则解码器执行上述S405~S406。In addition, the decoder may not perform the above-mentioned S403 to S404, or may not perform the above-mentioned S405 to S406. For example, when the above S405 to S406 are not executed, the decoder may directly execute the above S407 when the judgment result of S403 is "Yes". It can be understood that, in a specific implementation, if the encoder performs the above S301 to S302, the decoder performs the above S403 to S404; if the encoder performs the above S303 to S304, the decoder performs the above S405 to S406.
本实施例提供的视频解码方法中,当当前图像块的宽大于或等于第二阈值与高的乘积,和/或当前图像块的高大于或等于第二阈值与宽的乘积时,解码器默认划分方向是垂直于当前图像块的短边的扩展四叉树划分方式不合法。这样,当划分类型是扩展四叉树划分时,编码器不需要在码流中编入表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方向的信息,因此可以节省传输比特开销。另外,本技术方案有助于将编码树中的叶节点的宽与高之比(或高与宽之比)限制在一定范围之内,有助于在编码过程中尽量不出现“细长”的节点,从而方便进行编码。In the video decoding method provided in this embodiment, when the width of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the second threshold and the height, and/or the height of the current image block is greater than or equal to the product of the second threshold and the width, the decoder defaults The division direction is perpendicular to the short side of the current image block, which is illegal. In this way, when the division type is extended quad-tree division, the encoder does not need to encode information indicating the division direction of the current image block into the code stream, so transmission bit overhead can be saved. In addition, this technical solution helps to limit the width-to-height ratio (or height-to-width ratio) of leaf nodes in the coding tree to a certain range, and helps to avoid "slenderness" in the coding process as much as possible Node, which facilitates coding.
如图13所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种视频编码方法的流程示意图。图13所示的方法包括如下步骤:As shown in FIG. 13, it is a schematic flowchart of a video encoding method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method shown in Figure 13 includes the following steps:
S501:编码器判断待编码图像中的当前图像块的长边长度是否是当前图像块的短边长度的二倍。S501: The encoder determines whether the length of the long side of the current image block in the image to be encoded is twice the length of the short side of the current image block.
若是,则执行S502。若否,则执行S503。If yes, execute S502. If not, S503 is executed.
S502:编码器确定第一候选集合。第一候选集合包括对当前图像块进行划分方向垂直于当前图像块的长边的二叉树划分。并根据第一候选集合确定是否对当前图像块进行划分。其中,如果确定对当前图像块进行划分,则当前图像块可以被称为是待划分图像块。S502: The encoder determines the first candidate set. The first candidate set includes performing a binary tree division on the current image block in a direction perpendicular to the long side of the current image block. And determine whether to divide the current image block according to the first candidate set. Wherein, if it is determined to divide the current image block, the current image block may be referred to as an image block to be divided.
如果确定对当前图像块进行划分,则执行S503。If it is determined to divide the current image block, S503 is performed.
如果确定不对当前图像块进行划分,则执行S506。If it is determined that the current image block is not divided, S506 is performed.
具体的:当当前图像块的宽是长边,高是短边时,第一候选集合包括竖直二叉树划分方式。当当前图像块的宽是短边,高是长边时,第一候选集合包括水平二叉树划分方式。Specifically: when the width of the current image block is the long side and the height is the short side, the first candidate set includes a vertical binary tree division manner. When the width of the current image block is the short side and the height is the long side, the first candidate set includes a horizontal binary tree division manner.
S503:编码器对当前图像块进行划分方向垂直于当前图像块的长边的二叉树划分。并且,将第一标识信息编入码流。第一标识信息用于表示是否对当前图像块进行划分(具体是划分)。S503: The encoder divides the current image block into a binary tree perpendicular to the long side of the current image block. And, the first identification information is encoded into the code stream. The first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block (specifically, division).
执行S503之后,执行S507。After executing S503, execute S507.
S504~S507:可以参考上述S104~S107。S504-S507: refer to the above-mentioned S104-S107.
需要说明的是,对于执行划分操作后得到的“划分后的图像块”来说,编码器可以将其作为当前图像块,从而返回执行S501~S507。It should be noted that, for the "divided image block" obtained after performing the division operation, the encoder may use it as the current image block, and thus return to execute S501 to S507.
本实施例提供的视频编码方法中,当当前图像块的长边长度是当前图像块的短边长度的二倍时,如果对当前图像块进行划分,则编码器默认进行划分方向垂直于当前图像块的长边的二叉树划分。这样,一方面,与现有EQT方案中针对第二级编码树中的节点的划分方法相比,本申请实施例提供的技术方案,能够减小划分复杂度,从而提高编码效率。另一方面,如果对当前图像块进行划分,则不需要在码流中编入表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方式(包括划分类型和划分方向)的信息,因此可以节省传输比特开销。另外,对当前图像块进行划分方向垂直于当前图像块的长边的二叉树划分,可以将当前图像块划分成两个正方形图像块,相比非正方形的矩形图像块来说,正方形图像后续块被划分的可能性更高,因此,有助于提高对视频图片的编码精确度。In the video encoding method provided in this embodiment, when the length of the long side of the current image block is twice the length of the short side of the current image block, if the current image block is divided, the encoder defaults to dividing the direction perpendicular to the current image Binary tree division on the long side of the block. In this way, on the one hand, compared with the method for dividing nodes in the second-level coding tree in the existing EQT scheme, the technical solution provided by the embodiments of the present application can reduce the division complexity, thereby improving coding efficiency. On the other hand, if the current image block is divided, there is no need to incorporate information indicating the division method (including the division type and division direction) of the current image block into the code stream, so transmission bit overhead can be saved. In addition, by dividing the current image block into a binary tree perpendicular to the long side of the current image block, the current image block can be divided into two square image blocks. Compared with the non-square rectangular image block, the subsequent blocks of the square image block are The possibility of division is higher, so it helps to improve the encoding accuracy of video pictures.
如图14所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种视频解码方法的流程示意图。图14所示的视频解码方法与图13所示的视频编码方法相对应。图14所示的方法包括如下步骤:As shown in FIG. 14, it is a schematic flowchart of a video decoding method according to an embodiment of the present application. The video decoding method shown in FIG. 14 corresponds to the video encoding method shown in FIG. 13. The method shown in Figure 14 includes the following steps:
S601:解码器接收来自编码器的码流。S601: The decoder receives the code stream from the encoder.
S602:解码器解析码流,以得到第一标识信息,第一标识信息用于表示是否对待解码图像中的当前图像块进行划分。S602: The decoder parses the code stream to obtain first identification information, where the first identification information is used to indicate whether to divide the current image block in the image to be decoded.
如果第一标识信息表示不对当前图像块进行划分,则针对当前图像块的划分过程结束。If the first identification information indicates that the current image block is not divided, the division process for the current image block ends.
如果第一标识信息表示对当前图像块进行划分,则执行S603。If the first identification information indicates that the current image block is divided, S603 is performed.
S603:解码器判断当前图像块的长边长度是否等于当前图像块的短边长度的二倍。S603: The decoder determines whether the length of the long side of the current image block is equal to twice the length of the short side of the current image block.
若是,则执行S604。若否,则执行S605。If yes, execute S604. If not, S605 is executed.
S604:解码器对当前图像块进行划分方向垂直于当前图像块的长边的二叉树划分。S604: The decoder divides the current image block into a binary tree perpendicular to the long side of the current image block.
执行S604之后,针对当前图像块的划分过程结束。After executing S604, the division process for the current image block ends.
S605:可以参考上述S205。S605: Refer to the above S205.
需要说明的是,对于执行划分操作后得到的“划分后的图像块”来说,解码器可以将其作为当前图像块,从而执行S602~S605。It should be noted that, for the "divided image block" obtained after performing the division operation, the decoder may use it as the current image block, so as to execute S602 to S605.
本实施例提供的视频解码方法中,当当前图像块的长边长度是当前图像块的短边长度的二倍时,如果对当前图像块进行划分,则解码器默认进行划分方向垂直于当前图像块的长边的二叉树划分。这样,编码器不需要在码流中编入表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分方式(包括划分类型和划分方向)的信息,因此可以节省传输比特开销。In the video decoding method provided in this embodiment, when the length of the long side of the current image block is twice the length of the short side of the current image block, if the current image block is divided, the decoder defaults to dividing the direction perpendicular to the current image Binary tree division on the long side of the block. In this way, the encoder does not need to incorporate information indicating the division method (including the division type and division direction) of the current image block into the code stream, so transmission bit overhead can be saved.
对于图13或图14所示的实施例,以下提供几种可选的是实现方式:For the embodiment shown in FIG. 13 or FIG. 14, the following provides several optional implementation methods:
可选的,当前图像块的长边长度为2a个像素长度,短边长度为a个像素长度。其中,a是整数,a通常是2的整数幂次方。例如,当前图像块的长边长度为128个像素长度,短边长度为64个像素长度。Optionally, the length of the long side of the current image block is 2a pixels long, and the length of the short side is a pixel length. Among them, a is an integer, a is usually an integer power of 2. For example, the long side of the current image block is 128 pixels long, and the short side is 64 pixels long.
可选的,当前图像块的短边长度等于最大变换单元(即TU)的边尺寸,或者,当前图像块的短边长度等于虚拟流水数据单元(即VPDU)的边尺寸。Optionally, the short side length of the current image block is equal to the side size of the largest transformation unit (ie, TU), or the short side length of the current image block is equal to the side size of the virtual pipeline data unit (ie, VPDU).
其中,VPDU,也可以称为硬件流水单元,定义为图像中的非重叠的单元,大小 可以为a*a,边尺寸为a个像素长度。在硬件解码器中,连续的VPDU由多个流水线同时并行处理。VPDU的大小与大多数流水线级中的缓冲区大小大致成比例,因此保持VPDU大小很小很重要。在大多数硬件解码器中,VPDU的大小可以设置为最大变换单元的大小。然而,在AVS3视频编码标准中,扩展四叉树(EQT)和二叉树(BT)分区可能导致VPDU大小的增加。为了将VPDU大小保持为a*a(如64x64)的亮度样本,不能出现同一个亮度样本跨不同的VPDU。Among them, VPDU, which can also be called a hardware pipeline unit, is defined as a non-overlapping unit in the image, the size can be a*a, and the side size is a pixel length. In the hardware decoder, consecutive VPDUs are processed in parallel by multiple pipelines simultaneously. The size of the VPDU is roughly proportional to the buffer size in most pipeline stages, so it is important to keep the VPDU size small. In most hardware decoders, the size of the VPDU can be set to the size of the largest transformation unit. However, in the AVS3 video coding standard, expanding the quadtree (EQT) and binary tree (BT) partitions may result in an increase in the size of the VPDU. In order to maintain the VPDU size as a*a (such as 64x64) brightness samples, the same brightness sample cannot span different VPDUs.
可选的,当前图像块是边界图像块。其中,如果当前节点中存在一个或者一个以上的像素超出了当前图像边界,则称当前节点超出图像边界,该情况下,当前节点为边界图像块。Optionally, the current image block is a boundary image block. Wherein, if one or more pixels in the current node exceed the current image boundary, the current node is said to exceed the image boundary. In this case, the current node is a boundary image block.
需要说明的是,对于上文中提供的任意一种视频译码(包括编码和解码)方法,如果对当前图像块进行划分,则译码器可以基于划分后的图像块对待译码图像块进行重构;如果不对当前图像块进行划分,则译码器可以基于当前图像块对待译码图像块进行重构等操作,具体实现过程可以参考现有技术。It should be noted that, for any of the video decoding (including encoding and decoding) methods provided above, if the current image block is divided, the decoder may recode the image block to be decoded based on the divided image block If the current image block is not divided, the decoder can perform operations such as reconstruction of the image block to be decoded based on the current image block, and the specific implementation process can refer to the prior art.
另外需要说明的是,在不冲突的情况下,上文中所描述的至少两种视频编码方法(如图9、图11或图13所描述的视频编码方法)中的部分特征可以结合,从而构成新的视频编码方法。相应的,该至少两种视频编码方法对应的视频解码方法中的相应特征可以结合,从而构成新的视频解码方法。In addition, it should be noted that, in the case of no conflict, some features of at least two video encoding methods described above (such as the video encoding methods described in FIG. 9, FIG. 11, or FIG. 13) can be combined to form New video encoding method. Correspondingly, the corresponding features in the video decoding methods corresponding to the at least two video encoding methods can be combined to form a new video decoding method.
例如,当第二阈值是第一阈值的二分之一时,在一个示例中,图9和图11结合后的视频编码方法可以包括:For example, when the second threshold is one-half of the first threshold, in one example, the video encoding method after combining FIG. 9 and FIG. 11 may include:
如果当前图像块的长边长度与短边长度之比大于或等于第一阈值,则针对当前图像块合法的划分方式不包括对当前图像块进行划分方向垂直于待划分图像块的短边的划分方式;If the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the current image block is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the legal division method for the current image block does not include the division of the current image block perpendicular to the short side of the image block to be divided the way;
如果当前图像块的长边长度与短边长度之比小于第一阈值,且大于或等于第二阈值,则针对当前图像块合法的划分方式不包括对当前图像块进行划分方向垂直于待划分图像块的短边的扩展四叉树划分方式。可以理解的是,由于当前图像块的宽和高通常是2的整数次幂,因此,当第二阈值和第一阈值均是2的整数次幂时,“当前图像块的长边长度与短边长度之比小于第一阈值,且大于或等于第二阈值”等价于“当前图像块的长边长度与短边长度之比等于第二阈值”。例如,假设第一阈值是8,第二阈值是4,则“长边长度与短边长度之比小于8,且大于或等于4”有且仅有一种可能,即长边长度与短边长度之比等于4。If the ratio of the long side length to the short side length of the current image block is less than the first threshold and greater than or equal to the second threshold, the legal division method for the current image block does not include dividing the current image block perpendicular to the image to be divided The extended quadtree partition of the short side of the block. It can be understood that since the width and height of the current image block are usually integer powers of 2, when both the second threshold and the first threshold are integer powers of 2, "the length and length of the long side of the current image block The ratio of side lengths is less than the first threshold and greater than or equal to the second threshold" is equivalent to "the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the current image block is equal to the second threshold". For example, assuming that the first threshold is 8, and the second threshold is 4, the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side is less than 8 and greater than or equal to 4. There is only one possibility, namely, the length of the long side and the length of the short side The ratio is equal to 4.
如果当前图像块的长边长度与短边长度之比小于第二阈值,则针对当前图像块合法的划分方式可以包括水平二叉树划分方式、竖直二叉树划分方式、水平扩展四叉树划分方式和竖直扩展四叉树划分方式。If the ratio of the long edge length to the short edge length of the current image block is less than the second threshold, the legal division method for the current image block may include a horizontal binary tree division method, a vertical binary tree division method, a horizontally extended quadtree division method, and a vertical Direct expansion of quadtree division.
其他示例不再一一列举。Other examples are not listed one by one.
基于上文提供的任意一种实施例,以下,说明第一标识信息、第二标识信息和第三标识信息的具体实现方式。Based on any one of the embodiments provided above, the following describes specific implementation manners of the first identification information, the second identification information, and the third identification information.
例如,如果不对当前图像块进行划分,则第一标识信息可以是二进制数“0”。如果对当前图像块进行划分,则第一标识信息可以是二进制数“1”。For example, if the current image block is not divided, the first identification information may be a binary number "0". If the current image block is divided, the first identification information may be a binary number "1".
例如,如果目标划分方式的划分类型是二叉树划分类型,则第二标识信息可以是 二进制数“0”。如果所确定的划分类型是扩展四叉树划分类型,则第二标识信息可以是二进制数“1”。For example, if the division type of the target division mode is a binary tree division type, the second identification information may be a binary number "0". If the determined division type is an extended quadtree division type, the second identification information may be a binary number "1".
例如,如果目标划分方式的划分方向是水平方向,则第三标识信息可以是二进制数“0”。如果所确定的划分方向是竖直方向,则第三标识信息可以是二进制数“1”。For example, if the division direction of the target division mode is the horizontal direction, the third identification information may be a binary number "0". If the determined division direction is the vertical direction, the third identification information may be a binary number "1".
例如,第一标识信息可以是码流中的“split_flag”字段所包含的信息。For example, the first identification information may be information contained in the "split_flag" field in the code stream.
例如,第二标识信息可以是码流中的“SplitMode”字段所包含的信息。当SplitMode为1,表示二叉树划分类型;当SplitMode为0,表示扩展四叉树划分类型。当然不限于此。For example, the second identification information may be information contained in the "SplitMode" field in the code stream. When SplitMode is 1, it indicates the binary tree division type; when SplitMode is 0, it indicates the extended quadtree division type. Of course not limited to this.
例如,第三标识信息可以是码流中的“SplitDir”字段所包含的信息。当SplitMode为1,表示竖直划分,SplitDir为0,表示水平划分。当然不限于此。For example, the third identification information may be information contained in the "SplitDir" field in the code stream. When SplitMode is 1, it means vertical division, and SplitDir is 0, which means horizontal division. Of course not limited to this.
上述主要从方法的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The above mainly introduces the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application from the perspective of a method. In order to realize the above-mentioned functions, it includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to performing each function. Those skilled in the art should be easily aware that, in conjunction with the exemplary units and algorithm steps described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driven hardware depends on the specific application of the technical solution and design constraints. Professional technicians can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对编码器/解码器进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。The embodiments of the present application may divide the encoder/decoder function modules according to the above method examples, for example, each function module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be noted that the division of the modules in the embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a division of logical functions. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner.
如图15所示,为本申请实施例提供的一种视频译码器140的示意性框图。视频译码器140具体可以是编码器或解码器。当视频译码器140是编码器时,视频译码器140可以用于执行本申请实施例提供的任意一种视频编码方法,如图9、图11或图13所示的视频编码方法。当视频译码器140是解码器时,视频译码器140可以用于执行本申请实施例提供的任意一种视频解码方法,如图10、图12或图14所示的视频解码方法。As shown in FIG. 15, it is a schematic block diagram of a video decoder 140 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The video decoder 140 may specifically be an encoder or a decoder. When the video decoder 140 is an encoder, the video decoder 140 may be used to execute any video encoding method provided by the embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG. 9, FIG. 11, or FIG. 13. When the video decoder 140 is a decoder, the video decoder 140 may be used to execute any one of the video decoding methods provided in the embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 12, or FIG. 14.
视频译码器140可以包括划分单元1401和重构单元1402。可选的,如图16所示,当视频译码器140具体是视频解码器时,该视频解码器还可以包括熵解码单元1403。The video decoder 140 may include a division unit 1401 and a reconstruction unit 1402. Optionally, as shown in FIG. 16, when the video decoder 140 is specifically a video decoder, the video decoder may further include an entropy decoding unit 1403.
例如,视频译码器140可以是图2中的编码器20,该情况下,划分单元1401可以是预测处理单元260中的一个子单元,或者可以是与预测处理单元260、重构单元214和熵编码单元270均连接的一个单元;重构单元1402可以是重构单元214。For example, the video decoder 140 may be the encoder 20 in FIG. 2. In this case, the dividing unit 1401 may be a sub-unit in the prediction processing unit 260, or may be in conjunction with the prediction processing unit 260, the reconstruction unit 214, and The entropy encoding units 270 are all connected to one unit; the reconstruction unit 1402 may be the reconstruction unit 214.
又如,视频译码器140可以是图3中的解码器30,该情况下,划分单元1401可以是预测处理单元360中的一个子单元,或者可以是与预测处理单元360、重构单元314和熵解码单元304均连接的一个单元;重构单元1402可以是重构单元314。For another example, the video decoder 140 may be the decoder 30 in FIG. 3. In this case, the division unit 1401 may be a subunit in the prediction processing unit 360, or may be the prediction processing unit 360 and the reconstruction unit 314. One unit connected to the entropy decoding unit 304; the reconstruction unit 1402 may be the reconstruction unit 314.
在一些实施例中,划分单元1401,用于根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略;以及,将所述块划分策略应用于所述当前图像块以得到编码块。重构单元1402,用于通过对得到的所述编码块进行重构以实现对所述当 前图像块的重构。In some embodiments, the dividing unit 1401 is configured to determine the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block; and apply the block division strategy to the current image block To get the coded block. The reconstruction unit 1402 is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
可选的,划分单元1401具体用于:确定当前图像块是否满足第一条件,第一条件包括:当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积;在当前图像块不满足第一条件时,确定该块划分策略为划分方向为竖直方向的划分,竖直方向垂直于当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。Optionally, the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to: determine whether the current image block satisfies the first condition. The first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block; the current image block does not satisfy In the first condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is division in the vertical direction, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located.
可选的,划分单元1401具体用于:确定当前图像块是否满足第二条件,第二条件包括:当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积;在当前图像块不满足第二条件时,确定该块划分策略为划分方向为水平方向的划分,水平方向垂直于当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。Optionally, the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to determine whether the current image block satisfies the second condition. The second condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block; In the second condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is a division in a horizontal direction, and the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located.
可选的,划分单元1401具体用于:确定当前图像块是否满足第一条件,第一条件包括:当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积;在当前图像块不满足第一条件时,确定当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为水平方向的划分,水平方向垂直于当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。例如,结合图9,划分单元1401可以用于执行S102和S105。又如,结合图10,划分单元1401可以用于执行S203和S204。Optionally, the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to: determine whether the current image block satisfies the first condition. The first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block; the current image block does not satisfy In the first condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the horizontal direction, and the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located. For example, in conjunction with FIG. 9, the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform S102 and S105. For another example, with reference to FIG. 10, the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform S203 and S204.
可选的,划分单元1401具体用于:确定当前图像块是否满足第二条件,第二条件包括:当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积;在当前图像块不满足第二条件时,确定当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为竖直方向的划分,竖直方向垂直于当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。例如,结合图9,划分单元1401可以用于执行S103和S104。又如,结合图10,划分单元1401可以用于执行S205和S207。Optionally, the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to determine whether the current image block satisfies the second condition. The second condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block; In the second condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the vertical direction, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located. For example, with reference to FIG. 9, the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform S103 and S104. For another example, with reference to FIG. 10, the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform S205 and S207.
可选的,熵解码单元1403可以用于解析码流,以得到标识信息,该标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分类型。相应的,划分单元1401具体用于:基于该块划分策略(具体是不满足第一条件时所确定的块划分策略),采用该标识信息所表示的划分类型,对当前图像块进行划分方向为竖直方向的划分,以得到编码块。例如,结合图10,熵解码单元1403可以用于执行S204中的解析步骤。划分单元1401可以用于执行S204中的划分步骤。Optionally, the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to parse the code stream to obtain identification information, and the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block. Correspondingly, the dividing unit 1401 is specifically used to divide the current image block based on the block division strategy (specifically, the block division strategy determined when the first condition is not met), using the division type indicated by the identification information, Vertical division to obtain coded blocks. For example, referring to FIG. 10, the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to perform the parsing step in S204. The dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the dividing step in S204.
可选的,熵解码单元1403可以用于解析码流,以得到标识信息,该标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分类型。相应的,划分单元1401具体用于:基于该块划分策略(具体是不满足第二条件时所确定的块划分策略),采用该标识信息所表示的划分类型,对当前图像块进行划分方向为水平方向的划分。例如,结合图10,熵解码单元1403可以用于执行S207中的解析步骤。划分单元1401可以用于执行S207中的划分步骤。Optionally, the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to parse the code stream to obtain identification information, and the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block. Correspondingly, the dividing unit 1401 is specifically used to divide the current image block based on the block division strategy (specifically, the block division strategy determined when the second condition is not met), using the division type indicated by the identification information, Horizontal division. For example, referring to FIG. 10, the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to perform the parsing step in S207. The dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the dividing step in S207.
可选的,第一阈值是允许的编码树中节点的长边长度与短边长度之比的最大值。Optionally, the first threshold is the maximum value of the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the allowed nodes in the coding tree.
可选的,第一阈值是大于1的值。可选的,第一阈值是2的整数次幂。Optionally, the first threshold is a value greater than 1. Optionally, the first threshold is an integer power of 2.
可选的,划分单元1401具体用于:确定当前图像块是否满足第三条件,第三条件包括:当前图像块的宽小于第二阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积;在当前图像块不满足第三条件时,确定该块划分策略为划分方向为竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分,竖直方向垂直于当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。Optionally, the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to: determine whether the current image block satisfies the third condition, the third condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block; In the third condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is an extended quadtree division with a vertical division direction, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located.
可选的,划分单元1401具体用于:确定当前图像块是否满足第四条件,第四条件包括:当前图像块的高小于第二阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积;在当前图像块不满足 第四条件时,确定该块划分策略为划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分,水平方向垂直于当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。Optionally, the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to determine whether the current image block satisfies the fourth condition. The fourth condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the width of the current image block; In the fourth condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is an extended quadtree division with a horizontal division direction, and the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located.
可选的,划分单元1401具体用于:确定当前图像块是否满足第三条件,第三条件包括:当前图像块的宽小于第二阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积;在当前图像块不满足第三条件时,确定当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分,水平方向垂直于当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。例如,结合图11,划分单元1401可以用于执行S301,以及S302中确定第一候选集合的步骤。又如,结合图12,划分单元1401可以用于执行S404中的当第二标识信息用于指示对当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时的划分步骤。Optionally, the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to: determine whether the current image block satisfies the third condition, the third condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block; In the third condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the expanded quadtree division in the horizontal direction, and the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located. For example, referring to FIG. 11, the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the steps of determining the first candidate set in S301 and S302. For another example, with reference to FIG. 12, the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the dividing step in S404 when the second identification information is used to instruct to perform an extended quadtree division on the current image block.
可选的,划分单元1401具体用于:确定当前图像块是否满足第四条件,第四条件包括:当前图像块的高小于第二阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积;在当前图像块不满足第四条件时,确定当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分,竖直方向垂直于当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。例如,结合图11,划分单元1401可以用于执行S303,以及S304中确定第二候选集合的步骤。又如,结合图12,划分单元1401可以用于执行S406中的当第二标识信息用于指示对当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时的划分步骤。Optionally, the dividing unit 1401 is specifically configured to: determine whether the current image block satisfies the fourth condition. The fourth condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the width of the current image block; In the fourth condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the extended quadtree division in the vertical direction, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located. For example, referring to FIG. 11, the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the steps of determining the second candidate set in S303 and S304. For another example, with reference to FIG. 12, the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the dividing step in S406 when the second identification information is used to instruct to perform an extended quadtree division on the current image block.
可选的,熵解码单元1403可以用于解析码流,以得到标识信息,该标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分类型。相应的,划分单元1401具体用于:基于块划分策略(具体是不满足第三条件时所确定的块划分策略),当该标识信息表示对当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时,对当前图像块进行划分方向为竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分。例如,结合图12,熵解码单元1403可以用于执行S404中的当第二标识信息用于指示对当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时的解析步骤,划分单元1401可以用于执行S404中的当第二标识信息用于指示对当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时的划分步骤。Optionally, the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to parse the code stream to obtain identification information, and the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block. Correspondingly, the dividing unit 1401 is specifically used to: based on the block division strategy (specifically, the block division strategy determined when the third condition is not satisfied), when the identification information indicates that the current image block is expanded by quadtree division, the current The image block is divided into extended quadtrees with the vertical division direction. For example, with reference to FIG. 12, the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to perform the parsing step in S404 when the second identification information is used to indicate the extended quadtree division of the current image block, and the division unit 1401 may be used to perform the When the second identification information is used to indicate the step of dividing the current image block into an extended quadtree.
可选的,熵解码单元1403可以用于解析码流,以得到标识信息,该标识信息用于表示对当前图像块进行划分的划分类型。相应的,划分单元1401具体用于:基于块划分策略(具体是不满足第四条件时所确定的块划分策略),当该标识信息表示对当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时,对当前图像块进行划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分。例如,结合图12,熵解码单元1403可以用于执行S406中的当第二标识信息用于指示对当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时的解析步骤。划分单元1401可以用于执行S406中的当第二标识信息用于指示对当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时的划分步骤。Optionally, the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to parse the code stream to obtain identification information, and the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block. Correspondingly, the dividing unit 1401 is specifically used for: based on the block division strategy (specifically, the block division strategy determined when the fourth condition is not satisfied), when the identification information indicates that the current image block is expanded by quadtree division, the current The image block is divided into horizontal quadtrees in the horizontal direction. For example, with reference to FIG. 12, the entropy decoding unit 1403 may be used to perform the parsing step in S406 when the second identification information is used to indicate the extended quadtree division of the current image block. The dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the dividing step in S406 when the second identification information is used to instruct to perform an extended quadtree division on the current image block.
可选的,第二阈值是允许的编码树中节点的长边长度与短边长度之比的最大值的二分之一。Optionally, the second threshold is one-half the maximum value of the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the node in the allowed coding tree.
可选的,第二阈值是大于1的值。可选的,第二阈值是2的整数次幂。Optionally, the second threshold is a value greater than 1. Optionally, the second threshold is an integer power of 2.
在另一些实施例中,划分单元1401,用于如果待译码图像中的待划分图像块的长边长度是待划分图像块的短边长度的二倍,则对待划分图像块进行划分方向垂直于待划分图像块的长边的二叉树划分,得到划分后的图像块。重构单元1402,用于根据划分后的图像块,对待译码图像进行重构。例如,结合图13,划分单元1401可以用于执行S503中的划分操作。又如,结合图14,划分单元1401可以用于执行S604。In other embodiments, the dividing unit 1401 is configured to divide the image block to be divided vertically if the length of the long side of the image block to be divided in the image to be decoded is twice the length of the short side of the image block to be divided Based on the binary tree division on the long side of the image block to be divided, the divided image block is obtained. The reconstruction unit 1402 is configured to reconstruct the image to be decoded according to the divided image blocks. For example, with reference to FIG. 13, the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform the dividing operation in S503. For another example, in conjunction with FIG. 14, the dividing unit 1401 may be used to perform S604.
可选的,待划分图像块的长边长度为128个像素长度,短边长度为64个像素长度。Optionally, the long side of the image block to be divided is 128 pixels long, and the short side is 64 pixels long.
可选的,待划分图像块的短边长度等于最大变换单元TU的边尺寸,或者,待划分图像块的短边长度等于虚拟流水数据单元VPDU的边尺寸。Optionally, the short side length of the image block to be divided is equal to the side size of the maximum transformation unit TU, or the short side length of the image block to be divided is equal to the side size of the virtual pipeline data unit VPDU.
可选的,待划分图像块是边界图像块。Optionally, the image block to be divided is a boundary image block.
在一些实施例中,划分单元1401,用于根据当前图像块是否满足第一条件,确定是否允许对当前图像块进行水平方向的二叉树划分,水平方向垂直于当前图像块的高所在的边的方向,第一条件包括:当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积,其中,在当前图像块满足第一条件的情况下,确定允许对当前图像块进行水平方向的二叉树划分;以及,在确定允许对当前图像块进行水平方向的二叉树划分的情况下,获取当前图像块的编码块。重构单元1402,用于通过对得到的编码块进行重构以实现对当前图像块的重构。In some embodiments, the dividing unit 1401 is configured to determine whether to allow a binary tree division of the current image block in the horizontal direction according to whether the current image block satisfies the first condition, the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side of the current image block where the height is located , The first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block satisfies the first condition, it is determined that the current image block is allowed to be divided in a horizontal direction by a binary tree And, in the case where it is determined that the current image block is allowed to be divided in a binary tree in the horizontal direction, the coding block of the current image block is acquired. The reconstruction unit 1402 is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
在一些实施例中,划分单元1401,用于根据当前图像块是否满足第二条件,确定是否允许对当前图像块进行竖直方向的二叉树划分,竖直方向垂直于当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向,第二条件包括:当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积,其中,在当前图像块满足第二条件的情况下,确定允许对当前图像块进行竖直方向的二叉树划分;以及,在确定允许对当前图像块进行竖直方向的二叉树划分的情况下,获取当前图像块的编码块。重构单元1402,用于通过对得到的编码块进行重构以实现对当前图像块的重构。In some embodiments, the dividing unit 1401 is configured to determine whether to allow the current image block to be divided into a binary tree in the vertical direction according to whether the current image block satisfies the second condition, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the side of the width of the current image block Direction, the second condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block satisfies the second condition, it is determined that vertical direction of the current image block is allowed The binary tree partition of; and, in the case where it is determined that the current image block is allowed to be vertically binary tree partitioned, the coding block of the current image block is obtained. The reconstruction unit 1402 is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
在一些实施例中,划分单元1401,用于根据当前图像块是否满足第一条件,确定是否允许对当前图像块进行水平方向的划分,水平方向垂直于当前图像块的高所在的边的方向,第一条件包括:当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与当前图像块的高的乘积,其中,在当前图像块不满足第一条件的情况下,确定不允许对当前图像块进行水平方向的划分;在确定不允许对当前图像块进行水平方向的划分的情况下,获取当前图像块的编码块。重构单元1402,用于通过对得到的编码块进行重构以实现对当前图像块的重构。In some embodiments, the dividing unit 1401 is configured to determine whether to allow the current image block to be divided in a horizontal direction according to whether the current image block satisfies the first condition, the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the current image block is high, The first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block does not satisfy the first condition, it is determined that horizontal division of the current image block is not allowed ; In the case where it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to be divided in the horizontal direction, the coding block of the current image block is obtained. The reconstruction unit 1402 is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
在一些实施例中,划分单元1401,用于根据当前图像块是否满足第二条件,确定是否允许对当前图像块进行竖直方向的划分,竖直方向垂直于当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向,第二条件包括:当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与当前图像块的宽的乘积,其中,在当前图像块不满足第二条件的情况下,确定不允许对当前图像块进行竖直方向的划分;在确定不允许对当前图像块进行竖直方向的划分的情况下,获取当前图像块的编码块。重构单元1402,用于通过对得到的编码块进行重构以实现对当前图像块的重构。In some embodiments, the dividing unit 1401 is configured to determine whether to allow the current image block to be divided in the vertical direction according to whether the current image block satisfies the second condition, the vertical direction is perpendicular to the side of the width of the current image block Direction, the second condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block does not meet the second condition, it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to be vertical The division of the direction; if it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to be divided in the vertical direction, the coding block of the current image block is obtained. The reconstruction unit 1402 is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
可以理解的,本申请实施例提供的视频译码器140中的各模块为实现上文提供的相应的方法中所包含的各种执行步骤的功能主体,即具备实现完整实现本申请实施例中的各个步骤以及这些步骤的扩展及变形的功能主体,具体请参见上文中相应方法的介绍,为简洁起见,本文将不再赘述。It is understandable that each module in the video decoder 140 provided by the embodiment of the present application is a functional body that implements various execution steps included in the corresponding method provided above, that is, it has the capability to implement the complete implementation of the embodiment of the present application. The various steps of these steps and the functional body of the expansion and deformation of these steps, please refer to the introduction of the corresponding methods above for details. For the sake of brevity, this article will not repeat them.
需要说明的是,对于EQT方案,由于第二级编码树的节点可使用BT和EQT划分,编码一个节点最多需要尝试四种划分,而且它的子节点也可最多尝试四种划分,编码复杂度较高。基于此,本发明提供一种新的CU划分方法和装置,以减少系统划分CU时的复杂度。It should be noted that for the EQT scheme, since the nodes of the second-level coding tree can be divided using BT and EQT, encoding a node needs to try up to four divisions, and its child nodes can also try up to four divisions, encoding complexity Higher. Based on this, the present invention provides a new CU division method and device to reduce the complexity of system division of CUs.
本发明应用于视频编解码器。视频通信系统如图17所示。该通信系统包括源装置12和接收装置14,以及二者之间的连接线15。其中,源装置包括视频存储器16、视频编码器18、发射器20和视频俘获装置23。接收装置14包括接收器22、视频解码器24和显示装置26。本发明应于视频编码器18和视频解码器24。The invention is applied to a video codec. The video communication system is shown in Figure 17. The communication system includes a source device 12 and a sink device 14, and a connection line 15 therebetween. Among them, the source device includes a video memory 16, a video encoder 18, a transmitter 20, and a video capture device 23. The receiving device 14 includes a receiver 22, a video decoder 24 and a display device 26. The present invention is applicable to the video encoder 18 and the video decoder 24.
实施例一涉及一种视频解码方法。 Embodiment 1 relates to a video decoding method.
根据压缩码流中至少一个CTU的编码信息对该CTU做解码操作,获得该CTU的重建图像块。在解码一个CTU时,会对其中每一个CU,执行CU解析处理(步骤1和步骤2)和CU解码处理(步骤3),最终得到CTU的全部重建像素。其中,步骤2是本发明的关键,步骤1和3为现有技术。流程图如图18所示。Perform decoding operation on the CTU according to the coding information of at least one CTU in the compressed code stream to obtain the reconstructed image block of the CTU. When decoding a CTU, CU parsing processing (steps 1 and 2) and CU decoding processing (step 3) will be performed on each of the CUs, and finally all the reconstructed pixels of the CTU will be obtained. Among them, step 2 is the key of the present invention, and steps 1 and 3 are prior art. The flowchart is shown in Figure 18.
CTU的大小可以是64×64、128×128或者256×256等等。一个CTU被划分成一组互不重叠的CU,这一组CU覆盖整个CTU;一组CU包括一个或多个CU。一个CU包含N行M列的亮度像素、或者包含N行M列的色度像素、或者包含N行M列的亮度像素以及N/2行M/2列的色度像素(如YUV420格式)、或者包含N行M列的亮度像素以及N行M列的色度像素(如YUV444格式)、或者包含N行M列的RGB像素(如RGB格式)。其中N和M为2的整数次幂。The size of the CTU can be 64×64, 128×128, 256×256, etc. A CTU is divided into a group of non-overlapping CUs. This group of CUs covers the entire CTU; a group of CUs includes one or more CUs. A CU contains luma pixels in N rows and M columns, or chroma pixels in N rows and M columns, or luma pixels in N rows and M columns, and chroma pixels in N/2 rows and M/2 columns (such as the YUV420 format), Either include luminance pixels in N rows and M columns and chrominance pixels in N rows and M columns (such as YUV444 format), or RGB pixels including N rows and M columns (such as RGB format). Where N and M are integer powers of 2.
步骤1:以CTU为第一级编码树的根节点,解析第一级编码树的划分信息,获取第一级编码树叶节点。其中,第一级编码树的划分方式为QT划分或不划分。Step 1: Using the CTU as the root node of the first-level coding tree, analyze the division information of the first-level coding tree to obtain the first-level coding leaf node. Among them, the division method of the first-level coding tree is QT division or no division.
此步骤为现有技术,例如AVS方案中CTU划分为QT叶节点的处理。更具体的,包括:将CTU作为根节点,解析码流获取语法元素SplitFlag,如果SplitFlag为0则节点为第一级编码树叶节点,否则将节点按照四叉树划分方式划分成四个第一级编码树上的子节点,每个子节点的宽和高为该节点的一半。依次对每个子节点,解析码流获取语法元素SplitFlag,确定此节点是否为第一级编码树叶节点;如果不是,则继续按照四叉树划分;依次类推,直到节点的宽等于阈值MinQTSize(例如4)时,此节点默认为第一级编码树叶节点,SplitFlag默认为0。This step is the prior art, for example, the process of dividing the CTU into QT leaf nodes in the AVS scheme. More specifically, including: using the CTU as the root node, parsing the code stream to obtain the syntax element SplitFlag, if SplitFlag is 0, the node is a first-level coding leaf node, otherwise the node is divided into four first-level nodes according to the quadtree division method For child nodes in the coding tree, the width and height of each child node is half of that node. For each child node, parse the code stream to obtain the syntax element SplitFlag to determine whether this node is a first-level coding leaf node; if not, continue to divide according to the quadtree; and so on, until the width of the node is equal to the threshold MinQTSize (for example, 4 ), this node defaults to the first-level coding leaf node, and SplitFlag defaults to 0.
步骤2:以第一级编码树的叶节点为第二级编码树的根节点,解析第二级编码树信息,获取第二级编码树叶节点,并解析第二级编码树叶节点对应的编码单元CU。其中,第二级编码树的划分方式包含2种二叉树划分(水平二分、竖直二分)和2种扩展四叉树划分(水平,竖直);解析节点的划分方式中,如果一个节点的大小是64×128或128×64,则该节点默认划分为两个64×64的子块或不划分。Step 2: Taking the leaf node of the first-level coding tree as the root node of the second-level coding tree, parse the second-level coding tree information, obtain the second-level coding leaf node, and parse the coding unit corresponding to the second-level coding leaf node CU. Among them, the division method of the second-level coding tree includes 2 binary tree divisions (horizontal bisection, vertical bisection) and 2 extended quadtree divisions (horizontal, vertical); in the resolution of the resolution node, if the size of a node If it is 64×128 or 128×64, the node is divided into two 64×64 sub-blocks or not divided by default.
第二级编码树的划分方式与第一级编码树的划分方式不同。例如本实施例中第二级编码树包含4种划分方式,而第一级编码树包含1种划分方式。The second-level coding tree is divided differently from the first-level coding tree. For example, in this embodiment, the second-level coding tree includes 4 divisions, and the first-level coding tree includes 1 division.
上述“解析第二级编码树叶节点对应的编码单元CU”为现有技术,可参考AVS标准中的编码单元解析,本发明不作限定。The above “analyzing the coding unit CU corresponding to the second-level coding leaf node” is the prior art, and reference may be made to the coding unit analysis in the AVS standard, which is not limited in the present invention.
“解析第二级编码树信息,获取第二级编码树叶节点”,包括:"Analyze the second-level coding tree information to obtain the second-level coding leaf node", including:
解析第二级编码树中每个节点的划分信息STSplitMode;Parse the split information STSplitMode of each node in the second-level coding tree;
如果划分信息指示节点不划分(如STSplitMode=0),则节点为第二级编码树叶节点;If the division information indicates that the node is not divided (for example, STSplitMode=0), the node is a second-level coding leaf node;
如果划分信息指示节点进行二叉树划分(如STSplitMode=1或2),则选择划分信息指示的一种划分方式将节点划分为2个子节点,并依次对每个子节点,解析它的 划分信息进而确定它的划分方式;例如,当STSplitMode=1时,划分信息指示节点进行水平二叉树划分,将节点划分为2个水平子节点;当STSplitMode=2时,划分信息指示节点进行竖直二叉树划分,将节点划分为2个竖直子节点。If the partition information instructs the node to perform a binary tree partition (such as STSplitMode=1 or 2), select a partition mode indicated by the partition information to divide the node into 2 child nodes, and for each child node, analyze its partition information to determine it For example, when STSplitMode=1, the partition information instructs the node to perform a horizontal binary tree division and divide the node into 2 horizontal child nodes; when STSplitMode=2, the partition information indicates that the node performs a vertical binary tree division and divides the node It is 2 vertical child nodes.
如果划分信息指示节点进行扩展四叉树划分(如STSplitMode=3或4),则选择划分信息指示的一种划分方式将节点划分为4个子节点,并依次对每个子节点,解析它的划分信息进而确定它的划分方式;当STSplitMode=3时,划分信息指示节点进行水平扩展四叉树划分;当STSplitMode=4时,划分信息指示节点进行竖直扩展四叉树划分。If the partition information instructs the node to perform an extended quadtree partition (such as STSplitMode=3 or 4), select a partition mode indicated by the partition information to divide the node into 4 child nodes, and parse its partition information for each child node in turn Then determine its division mode; when STSplitMode=3, the division information instructs the node to perform the horizontal expansion quadtree division; when STSplitMode=4, the division information instructs the node to perform the vertical expansion quadtree division.
应可理解,STSplitMode和其值只是用来表示不同的划分模式,使用其他的可以区分的表述方式(例如使用不同的码字来表示),也在本发明的保护范围之内。It should be understood that STSplitMode and its value are only used to indicate different division modes, and other distinguishable expressions (such as different codewords) are also within the protection scope of the present invention.
本发明中,确定节点的划分方式,也就是确定节点不划分还是继续划分,以及如果继续划分使用的是哪种划分方式。In the present invention, the division method of the node is determined, that is, whether the node is not divided or continues to be divided, and which division method is used if the division is continued.
本发明中,增加了一种针对扩展四叉树的节点的划分限定,即“如果节点有任何一个边长大于32时,则节点默认不进行扩展四叉树划分”。In the present invention, a division limitation for nodes of an extended quadtree is added, that is, "if any of the nodes has a side length greater than 32, the node does not divide the extended quadtree by default."
第二级编码树的叶节点对应一个编码单元CU,解析码流中的编码单元语法结构体(例如H.265中的coding_unit()语法结构体),得到CU的编码信息,包括CU的预测模式、变换系数等信息。The leaf node of the second-level coding tree corresponds to a coding unit CU, and the coding unit syntax structure in the code stream (for example, coding_unit() syntax structure in H.265) is parsed to obtain the coding information of the CU, including the prediction mode of the CU , Transform coefficients and other information.
优选的,上述步骤2中,第二级编码树叶节点的确定和编码单元的解析可交替进行,更具体的:获取一个第二级编码树叶节点后,解析此节点对应的编码单元信息;解析完编码单元信息后,继续获取下一个第二级编码树叶节点,并解析此叶节点的编码单元信息;依次类推,直到第一级编码树叶节点中最后一个第二级编码树叶节点。Preferably, in the above step 2, the determination of the second-level coded leaf node and the analysis of the coding unit may be performed alternately, more specifically: after obtaining a second-level coded leaf node, the information of the coding unit corresponding to this node is analyzed; After coding unit information, continue to obtain the next second-level coding leaf node and parse the coding unit information of this leaf node; and so on, until the last second-level coding leaf node among the first-level coding leaf nodes.
步骤3:根据由步骤2确定的各个CU的编码信息,对各CU进行解码重建,得到各CU的重建像素,从而获得CTU的重建图像。Step 3: Decode and reconstruct each CU according to the coding information of each CU determined in step 2, to obtain the reconstructed pixels of each CU, thereby obtaining the reconstructed image of the CTU.
CU的解码包括熵解码、反量化、反变换、预测、环路滤波等处理,其过程主要包括:CU decoding includes entropy decoding, inverse quantization, inverse transform, prediction, loop filtering and other processing. The process mainly includes:
通过熵解码获得CU的预测模式、量化参数、变换系数、变换模式等编码信息;Entropy decoding to obtain CU prediction information, quantization parameters, transform coefficients, transform mode and other coding information;
根据预测模式,选用帧内预测或帧间预测,得到CU的预测像素;According to the prediction mode, select intra prediction or inter prediction to obtain the predicted pixels of the CU;
如果CU存在变换系数,则根据量化参数、变换模式,对变换系数进行反量化和反变换处理,得到CU的重建残差。如果CU不存在变换系数,则CU的重建残差为0,即CU中各像素的重建残差值均为0。If there is a transform coefficient in the CU, the transform coefficient is subjected to inverse quantization and inverse transform processing according to the quantization parameter and the transform mode to obtain the reconstruction residual of the CU. If there is no transform coefficient in the CU, the reconstruction residual of the CU is 0, that is, the reconstruction residual value of each pixel in the CU is 0.
将预测像素和重建残差相加后进行环路滤波处理,得到CU的重建像素。The predicted pixels and the reconstruction residuals are added together to perform loop filter processing to obtain CU reconstruction pixels.
本发明对应的解码装置,可包括2个模块:The decoding device corresponding to the present invention may include 2 modules:
编码树节点解析模块,其完成步骤1和步骤2的处理,即解析码流,确定编码树上各节点的划分方式,得到CTU划分为CU的方式和各个CU的编码信息。其中,若节点的大小是64×32或32×64,则该节点默认划分为两个32×32的子块或不划分。The coding tree node analysis module, which completes the processing of steps 1 and 2, that is, parses the code stream, determines the division method of each node on the coding tree, and obtains the manner in which the CTU is divided into CUs and the coding information of each CU. Wherein, if the size of the node is 64×32 or 32×64, the node is divided into two 32×32 sub-blocks or not divided by default.
CU解码模块,其完成步骤3的处理,即对各个CU进行解码,得到CTU的重建图像。The CU decoding module, which completes the processing of step 3, that is, decodes each CU to obtain the reconstructed image of the CTU.
本发明实施例一的技术效果Technical effect of the first embodiment of the invention
本发明实施例一通过对特定块(64×32或32×64)限定特定的划分方式,可使得 CTU的划分更加细致,可以减少CTU划分的复杂度(多种划分方式变为一种划分方式),还增加了提升处理精度的可能性(32×32的块可进一步划分的可能性更高)。In the first embodiment of the present invention, by defining a specific division method for a specific block (64×32 or 32×64), CTU division can be made more detailed, and the complexity of CTU division can be reduced (multiple division methods become one division method) ), also increasing the possibility of improving the processing accuracy (32×32 blocks are more likely to be further divided).
本发明实施例二Embodiment 2 of the present invention
实施例二为实施例一的扩展。The second embodiment is an extension of the first embodiment.
在实施例二中,如果节点的宽、高、长边与短边比满足一定条件(即不合法条件)时,认为节点的划分方式不合法(即将此节点划分的划分方式实际上是不允许使用的)。In the second embodiment, if the width, height, long side to short side ratio of a node satisfies certain conditions (that is, illegal conditions), the division method of the node is considered illegal (that is, the division method of this node is actually not allowed in use).
例如,当以下几种不合法条件中至少一种满足时,节点默认为不合法。For example, when at least one of the following illegal conditions is met, the node defaults to illegal.
1)如果节点的长边与短边比大于阈值minRatio时,则认为节点不合法。此处阈值可为大于等于1的整数,例如4。1) If the ratio of the long side to the short side of the node is greater than the threshold minRatio, the node is considered invalid. Here, the threshold may be an integer greater than or equal to 1, such as 4.
2)如果节点的边长小于阈值minCUSize,则认为节点不划分。其中,minCUSize称为最小CU边长,例如等于4。2) If the side length of the node is less than the threshold minCUSize, it is considered that the node is not divided. Among them, minCUSize is called the minimum CU side length, for example equal to 4.
以上各个条件中的阈值均可在高层语法中指定,或者预设为默认值。The thresholds in each of the above conditions can be specified in high-level syntax, or preset as default values.
具体的,如果对当前节点采用了某种划分方式之后得到的子节点,满足了任意一项不合法条件,那么则不能对当前节点进行这种方式的划分。因此,基于不合法条件的限制,可以进一步减少需要解析的语法元素。Specifically, if a child node obtained after applying a certain division method to the current node satisfies any one of the illegal conditions, then the current node cannot be divided in this manner. Therefore, based on the restriction of illegal conditions, the syntax elements that need to be parsed can be further reduced.
具体地,如果父节点的长边与短边比等于阈值minRatio,则不可对短边继续划分子节点。在一个示例中,该阈值minRatio可以对应于上文中的第一阈值。例如,父节点的宽与高的比等于阈值4,则不可继续进行水平划分,因为若进行水平划分:那么在水平BT划分的情况下,子节点的宽与高的比将等于8,超过阈值4,是不合法的;在水平EQT划分的情况下,子节点的宽与高的比将等于16,超过阈值4,是不合法的。但只要子节点不符合其他不合法条件,仍可进行垂直划分,因此在这种情况下,在实施例一中,无需解析STSplitMode=1和STSplitMode=3的划分情况,只有可能是STSplitMode=2或STSplitMode=4;在实施例三中,只需解析出BTSplitMode或者EQTSplitMode的值,就可以推断出BtSplitDir和EqtSplitDir的值,无需额外解析出BtSplitDir和EqtSplitDir的值。具体地,若解析出BTSplitMode=1,则可以推断BtSplitDir=1;若解析出BTSplitMode=1,则可以推断EqtSplitDir=1。Specifically, if the ratio of the long side to the short side of the parent node is equal to the threshold minRatio, the short side cannot be further divided into child nodes. In one example, the threshold minRatio may correspond to the first threshold above. For example, if the width-to-height ratio of the parent node is equal to the threshold 4, horizontal division cannot be continued, because if horizontal division is performed: then in the case of horizontal BT division, the width-to-height ratio of the child node will be equal to 8, exceeding the threshold 4. It is illegal; in the case of horizontal EQT division, the width-to-height ratio of the child nodes will be equal to 16, which exceeds the threshold of 4, which is illegal. However, as long as the child nodes do not meet other illegal conditions, vertical division can still be performed. Therefore, in this case, in the first embodiment, there is no need to analyze the division of STSplitMode=1 and STSplitMode=3, and it is only possible that STSplitMode=2 or STSplitMode=4; In the third embodiment, the values of BtSplitDir and EqtSplitDir can be inferred only by parsing the values of BTSplitMode or EQTSplitMode, and the values of BtSplitDir and EqtSplitDir need not be parsed. Specifically, if BTSplitMode=1 is parsed, BtSplitDir=1 can be inferred; if BTSplitMode=1 is parsed, EqtSplitDir=1 can be inferred.
同样的,可以推理出,在要划分子节点的情况下:Similarly, it can be inferred that, in the case of sub-nodes to be divided:
如果一个父节点的短边长度等于阈值minCUSize,那么它只能在长边上进行BT划分;即当判断出当前节点的短边长度等于阈值minCUSize时,只用解析BTSplitMode的值,即可获得当前节点的划分方式。If the length of the short side of a parent node is equal to the threshold minCUSize, then it can only divide BT on the long side; that is, when it is determined that the length of the short side of the current node is equal to the threshold minCUSize, only the value of BTSplitMode can be analyzed to obtain the current The division of nodes.
如果一个父节点的的长边与短边比等于阈值minRatio的二倍,那么它无法在短边上进行EQT划分;即当判断出当前节点的长边与短边比等于阈值minRatio的二倍时,只要解析到EQTSplitMode的值为1,即可获得当前节点的划分方式是沿长边的EQT(即不用即系EqtSplitDir)。If the ratio of the long side to the short side of a parent node is equal to twice the threshold minRatio, then it cannot divide EQT on the short side; that is, when it is judged that the ratio of the long side to the short side of the current node is equal to twice the threshold minRatio As long as the value of EQTSplitMode is 1, it can be obtained that the current node is divided into EQT along the long side (that is, it is not EqtSplitDir).
如果一个父节点的短边长度是阈值minCUSize的二倍,那么它无法在短边上进行EQT划分;即当判断出当前节点的短边长度等于阈值minCUSize的二倍时,只要解析到EQTSplitMode的值为1,即可获得当前节点的划分方式是沿长边的EQT(即不用即系EqtSplitDir)。If the length of the short side of a parent node is twice the threshold minCUSize, then it cannot divide EQT on the short side; that is, when it is determined that the length of the short side of the current node is equal to twice the threshold minCUSize, as long as the value of EQTSplitMode is resolved Is 1, you can get the current node division method is the EQT along the long side (that is, it is EqtSplitDir if not used).
如果一个父节点的宽和高都是阈值minCUSize的二倍,那么它无法进行EQT划分; 即当判断出当前节点的宽和高都是阈值minCUSize的二倍时,只用解析BTSplitMode和BtSpliDir,不用解析EQTSplitMode。If the width and height of a parent node are twice the threshold minCUSize, then it cannot be divided by EQT; that is, when it is determined that the width and height of the current node are twice the threshold minCUSize, only BTSplitMode and BtSpliDir are used to resolve, not Analyze EQTSplitMode.
本发明实施例二的技术效果Technical effect of the second embodiment of the present invention
本发明实施例二通过比较当前节点的尺寸与阈值minCUSize和/或阈值minRatio的关系,排除了当前节点不可能的划分模式(实施例二的发明点),从而减少了整个解析过程的复杂度,提高了系统的效率。In the second embodiment of the present invention, by comparing the relationship between the size of the current node and the threshold minCUSize and/or the threshold minRatio, the impossible division mode of the current node (the invention point of the second embodiment) is eliminated, thereby reducing the complexity of the entire analysis process, Improve the efficiency of the system.
本发明实施例三Embodiment 3 of the present invention
实施例三为实施例一的扩展。本实施例对实施例一种的步骤二中的下述步骤的变形:The third embodiment is an extension of the first embodiment. This embodiment modifies the following steps in step two of the first embodiment:
步骤二中“解析第二级编码树信息,获取第二级编码树叶节点”,还可以包括:In step two, "parse the second-level coding tree information to obtain the second-level coding leaf node" may also include:
解析第二级编码树中每个节点的划分信息BTSplitMode和EQTSplitMode;Parsing the split information BTSplitMode and EQTSplitMode of each node in the second-level coding tree;
如果划分信息指示节点不划分(如BTSplitMode=0并且EQTSplitMode=0),则节点为第二级编码树叶节点;If the split information indicates that the node is not split (eg, BTSplitMode=0 and EQTSplitMode=0), the node is a second-level coded leaf node;
如果划分信息指示节点进行二叉树划分(如BtSplitMode=1),则选择划分信息指示的一种划分方式将节点划分为2个子节点,并依次对每个子节点,解析它的划分信息进而确定它的划分方式;例如,当BtSplitDir=0时,划分信息指示节点进行水平二叉树划分,将节点划分为2个水平子节点;当BtSplitDir=1时,划分信息指示节点进行竖直二叉树划分,将节点划分为2个竖直子节点。If the partition information instructs the node to perform a binary tree partition (such as BtSplitMode=1), then select a partition mode indicated by the partition information to divide the node into two child nodes, and for each child node, analyze its partition information to determine its partition Way; for example, when BtSplitDir=0, the partition information instructs the node to divide the horizontal binary tree, dividing the node into 2 horizontal child nodes; when BtSplitDir=1, the partition information instructs the node to divide the vertical binary tree, dividing the node into 2 Vertical child nodes.
如果划分信息指示节点进行扩展四叉树划分(如EQTSplitMode=1),则选择划分信息指示的一种划分方式将节点划分为4个子节点,并依次对每个子节点,解析它的划分信息进而确定它的划分方式;当EqtSplitDir=0时,划分信息指示节点进行水平扩展四叉树划分;当EqtSplitDir=1时,划分信息指示节点进行竖直四叉树划分。If the partition information instructs the node to perform an extended quadtree partition (such as EQTSplitMode=1), then select a partition mode indicated by the partition information to divide the node into 4 child nodes, and for each child node in turn, analyze its partition information to determine Its division method; when EqtSplitDir=0, the division information instructs the node to perform the horizontal expansion quadtree division; when EqtSplitDir=1, the division information instructs the node to perform the vertical quadtree division.
一个示例的流程图如图19所示。应可理解,图中对于BTSplitMode和EQTSplitMode的判断为示意,其可为任意顺序,或者同时进行,并不是对本实施例的限定。An example flowchart is shown in Figure 19. It should be understood that the judgments of BTSplitMode and EQTSplitMode in the figure are schematic, and they may be in any order or may be performed at the same time, which is not a limitation of this embodiment.
本发明实施例三的技术效果Technical effect of Embodiment 3 of the present invention
本发明实施例三通过引入独立的参数判断对节点进行二叉树或扩展四叉树划分种类,可以更快速的定位划分方法和方式,提高了并行处理能力,从而提升系统的效率。In the third embodiment of the present invention, by introducing independent parameter judgment to classify the nodes by binary tree or extended quadtree, the method and method of positioning division can be positioned more quickly, the parallel processing capacity is improved, and the efficiency of the system is improved.
本发明实施例对特定块(64×32或32×64的块)限定特定的划分方式(划分成32×32);The embodiment of the present invention defines a specific division mode (divided into 32×32) for a specific block (64×32 or 32×64 block);
本发明实施例针对扩展四叉树的节点的划分限定,即“如果节点有任何一个边长大于32时,则节点默认不进行扩展四叉树划分”;The embodiment of the present invention limits the division of the nodes of the extended quadtree, that is, "if any of the nodes has a side length greater than 32, the node does not divide the extended quadtree by default";
本发明实施例比较当前节点的尺寸与阈值minCUSize和/或阈值minRatio的关系,排除当前节点不可能的划分模式(实施例二),从而减少了整个解析过程的复杂度。The embodiment of the present invention compares the relationship between the size of the current node and the threshold minCUSize and/or the threshold minRatio to exclude the impossible division mode of the current node (Embodiment 2), thereby reducing the complexity of the entire parsing process.
有益效果是,减少CTU划分的复杂度(多种划分方式变为一种划分方式、或者不划分),从而提升整个系统的效率。The beneficial effect is to reduce the complexity of CTU division (multiple divisions become one division or no division), thereby improving the efficiency of the entire system.
本领域技术人员能够领会,结合本文公开描述的各种说明性逻辑框、模块和算法步骤所描述的功能可以硬件、软件、固件或其任何组合来实施。如果以软件来实施,那么各种说明性逻辑框、模块、和步骤描述的功能可作为一或多个指令或代码在计算 机可读媒体上存储或传输,且由基于硬件的处理单元执行。计算机可读媒体可包含计算机可读存储媒体,其对应于有形媒体,例如数据存储媒体,或包括任何促进将计算机程序从一处传送到另一处的媒体(例如,根据通信协议)的通信媒体。以此方式,计算机可读媒体大体上可对应于(1)非暂时性的有形计算机可读存储媒体,或(2)通信媒体,例如信号或载波。数据存储媒体可为可由一或多个计算机或一或多个处理器存取以检索用于实施本申请中描述的技术的指令、代码和/或数据结构的任何可用媒体。计算机程序产品可包含计算机可读媒体。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the functions described in conjunction with the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and algorithm steps described in this disclosure may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. If implemented in software, the functions described by the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and steps may be stored or transmitted as one or more instructions or codes on the computer-readable medium and executed by the hardware-based processing unit. Computer-readable media may include computer-readable storage media, which corresponds to tangible media, such as data storage media, or communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one place to another (eg, according to a communication protocol). . In this manner, computer-readable media may generally correspond to (1) non-transitory tangible computer-readable storage media, or (2) communication media, such as signals or carrier waves. Data storage media may be any available media that can be accessed by one or more computers or one or more processors to retrieve instructions, code and/or data structures for implementation of the techniques described in this application. The computer program product may include a computer-readable medium.
作为实例而非限制,此类计算机可读存储媒体可包括RAM、ROM、EEPROM、CD-ROM或其它光盘存储装置、磁盘存储装置或其它磁性存储装置、快闪存储器或可用来存储指令或数据结构的形式的所要程序代码并且可由计算机存取的任何其它媒体。并且,任何连接被恰当地称作计算机可读媒体。举例来说,如果使用同轴缆线、光纤缆线、双绞线、数字订户线(DSL)或例如红外线、无线电和微波等无线技术从网站、服务器或其它远程源传输指令,那么同轴缆线、光纤缆线、双绞线、DSL或例如红外线、无线电和微波等无线技术包含在媒体的定义中。但是,应理解,所述计算机可读存储媒体和数据存储媒体并不包括连接、载波、信号或其它暂时媒体,而是实际上针对于非暂时性有形存储媒体。如本文中所使用,磁盘和光盘包含压缩光盘(CD)、激光光盘、光学光盘、数字多功能光盘(DVD)和蓝光光盘,其中磁盘通常以磁性方式再现数据,而光盘利用激光以光学方式再现数据。以上各项的组合也应包含在计算机可读媒体的范围内。By way of example, and not limitation, such computer-readable storage media may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM, or other optical disk storage devices, magnetic disk storage devices, or other magnetic storage devices, flash memory, or may be used to store instructions or data structures The desired program code in the form of and any other medium that can be accessed by the computer. And, any connection is properly called a computer-readable medium. For example, if a coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technology such as infrared, radio, and microwave is used to transmit instructions from a website, server, or other remote source, then the coaxial cable Wire, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of media. However, it should be understood that the computer-readable storage media and data storage media do not include connections, carrier waves, signals, or other temporary media, but are actually directed to non-transitory tangible storage media. As used herein, magnetic disks and optical discs include compact discs (CDs), laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs (DVDs), and Blu-ray discs, where magnetic discs typically reproduce data magnetically, while optical discs reproduce optically using lasers data. Combinations of the above should also be included in the scope of computer-readable media.
可通过例如一或多个数字信号处理器(DSP)、通用微处理器、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程逻辑阵列(FPGA)或其它等效集成或离散逻辑电路等一或多个处理器来执行指令。因此,如本文中所使用的术语“处理器”可指前述结构或适合于实施本文中所描述的技术的任一其它结构中的任一者。另外,在一些方面中,本文中所描述的各种说明性逻辑框、模块、和步骤所描述的功能可以提供于经配置以用于编码和解码的专用硬件和/或软件模块内,或者并入在组合编解码器中。而且,所述技术可完全实施于一或多个电路或逻辑元件中。One or more processes such as one or more digital signal processors (DSPs), general purpose microprocessors, application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable logic arrays (FPGAs), or other equivalent integrated or discrete logic circuits To execute instructions. Accordingly, the term "processor" as used herein may refer to any of the foregoing structure or any other structure suitable for implementation of the techniques described herein. In addition, in some aspects, the functions described in the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and steps described herein may be provided within dedicated hardware and/or software modules configured for encoding and decoding, or in combination Into the combined codec. Moreover, the techniques can be fully implemented in one or more circuits or logic elements.
本申请的技术可在各种各样的装置或设备中实施,包含无线手持机、集成电路(IC)或一组IC(例如,芯片组)。本申请中描述各种组件、模块或单元是为了强调用于执行所揭示的技术的装置的功能方面,但未必需要由不同硬件单元实现。实际上,如上文所描述,各种单元可结合合适的软件和/或固件组合在编码解码器硬件单元中,或者通过互操作硬件单元(包含如上文所描述的一或多个处理器)来提供。The technology of the present application may be implemented in a variety of devices or equipment, including wireless handsets, integrated circuits (ICs), or a set of ICs (eg, chipsets). Various components, modules or units are described in this application to emphasize the functional aspects of the device for performing the disclosed technology, but do not necessarily need to be implemented by different hardware units. In fact, as described above, various units may be combined in a codec hardware unit in combination with suitable software and/or firmware, or by interoperating hardware units (including one or more processors as described above) provide.
在上述实施例中,对各个实施例的描述各有侧重,某个实施例中没有详述的部分,可以参见其他实施例的相关描述。In the above embodiments, the description of each embodiment has its own emphasis. For a part that is not detailed in an embodiment, you can refer to the related descriptions of other embodiments.
以上所述,仅为本申请示例性的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应该以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only exemplary specific implementations of the present application, but the scope of protection of the present application is not limited to this, and any person skilled in the art may easily think of changes or changes within the technical scope disclosed in the present application. Replacement should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (52)

  1. 一种视频译码方法,其特征在于,包括:A video decoding method, characterized in that it includes:
    根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略;Determine the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block;
    将所述块划分策略应用于所述当前图像块以得到编码块;Applying the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain an encoding block;
    通过对得到的所述编码块进行重构以实现对所述当前图像块的重构。Reconstructing the obtained coding block to achieve reconstruction of the current image block.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第一条件,所述第一条件包括:所述当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的高的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a first condition, where the first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than a product of a first threshold and a height of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第一条件时,确定所述块划分策略为划分方向为竖直方向的划分,所述竖直方向垂直于所述当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the first condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is division in a vertical direction, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located .
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第二条件,所述第二条件包括:所述当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的宽的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a second condition, where the second condition includes: a height of the current image block is less than a product of a first threshold and a width of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第二条件时,确定所述块划分策略为划分方向为水平方向的划分,所述水平方向垂直于所述当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the second condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is division in a horizontal direction, and the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第一条件,所述第一条件包括:所述当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的高的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a first condition, where the first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than a product of a first threshold and a height of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第一条件时,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为水平方向的划分,所述水平方向垂直于所述当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the first condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the horizontal direction, the horizontal direction being perpendicular to the height of the current image block The direction of the side.
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第二条件,所述第二条件包括:所述当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的宽的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a second condition, where the second condition includes: a height of the current image block is less than a product of a first threshold and a width of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第二条件时,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为竖直方向的划分,所述竖直方向垂直于所述当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the second condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the vertical direction, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the width of the current image block The direction of the edge.
  6. 根据权利要求2至5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一阈值是允许的编码树中节点的长边长度与短边长度之比的最大值。The method according to any one of claims 2 to 5, wherein the first threshold is the maximum value of the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the allowed nodes in the coding tree.
  7. 根据权利要求2或4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 2 or 4, wherein the method further comprises:
    解析码流,以得到标识信息,所述标识信息用于表示对所述当前图像块进行划分的划分类型;Parsing the code stream to obtain identification information, where the identification information is used to indicate a division type for dividing the current image block;
    相应的,所述将所述块划分策略应用于所述当前图像块以得到编码块,包括:Correspondingly, the applying of the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain a coding block includes:
    基于所述块划分策略,采用所述标识信息所表示的划分类型,对所述当前图像块进行划分方向为竖直方向的划分,以得到编码块。Based on the block division strategy, the division type indicated by the identification information is used to divide the current image block into a vertical direction to obtain a coding block.
  8. 根据权利要求3或5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 3 or 5, wherein the method further comprises:
    解析码流,以得到标识信息,所述标识信息用于表示对所述当前图像块进行划分的划分类型;Parsing the code stream to obtain identification information, where the identification information is used to indicate a division type for dividing the current image block;
    相应的,所述将所述块划分策略应用于所述当前图像块以得到编码块,包括:Correspondingly, the applying of the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain a coding block includes:
    基于所述块划分策略,采用所述标识信息所表示的划分类型,对所述当前图像块进行划分方向为水平方向的划分。Based on the block division strategy, the division type indicated by the identification information is used to divide the current image block into a horizontal direction.
  9. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第三条件,所述第三条件包括:所述当前图像块的宽小于第二阈值与所述当前图像块的高的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a third condition, where the third condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第三条件时,确定所述块划分策略为划分方向为竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分,所述竖直方向垂直于所述当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the third condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is an extended quadtree division with the division direction in the vertical direction, where the vertical direction is perpendicular to the width of the current image block The direction of the side.
  10. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第四条件,所述第四条件包括:所述当前图像块的高小于第二阈值与所述当前图像块的宽的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a fourth condition, where the fourth condition includes: a height of the current image block is less than a product of a second threshold and a width of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第四条件时,确定所述块划分策略为划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分,所述水平方向垂直于所述当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the fourth condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is an extended quadtree division with the division direction being a horizontal direction, the horizontal direction being perpendicular to the side where the height of the current image block is located Direction.
  11. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第三条件,所述第三条件包括:所述当前图像块的宽小于第二阈值与所述当前图像块的高的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a third condition, where the third condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第三条件时,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分,所述水平方向垂直于所述当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the third condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include an extended quadtree division with the division direction being a horizontal direction, the horizontal direction being perpendicular to the current image block The direction of the side where the height is.
  12. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the determining the block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block includes:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第四条件,所述第四条件包括:所述当前图像块的高小于第二阈值与所述当前图像块的宽的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a fourth condition, where the fourth condition includes: a height of the current image block is less than a product of a second threshold and a width of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第四条件时,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分,所述竖直方向垂直于所述当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the fourth condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include an extended quadtree division with a vertical division direction, the vertical direction being perpendicular to the current The direction of the side where the width of the image block lies.
  13. 根据权利要求9至12任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二阈值是允许的编码树中节点的长边长度与短边长度之比的最大值的二分之一。The method according to any one of claims 9 to 12, wherein the second threshold is one-half the maximum value of the ratio of the length of the long side to the length of the short side of the node in the allowed coding tree.
  14. 根据权利要求9或11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 9 or 11, wherein the method further comprises:
    解析码流,以得到标识信息,所述标识信息用于表示对所述当前图像块进行划分的划分类型;Parsing the code stream to obtain identification information, where the identification information is used to indicate a division type for dividing the current image block;
    相应的,所述将所述块划分策略应用于所述当前图像块以得到编码块,包括:Correspondingly, the applying of the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain a coding block includes:
    基于所述块划分策略,当所述标识信息表示对所述当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划 分时,对所述当前图像块进行划分方向为竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分。Based on the block division strategy, when the identification information indicates that the current image block is to be divided into an extended quadtree, the current image block is divided into an extended quadtree in a vertical direction.
  15. 根据权利要求10或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 10 or 12, wherein the method further comprises:
    解析码流,以得到标识信息,所述标识信息用于表示对所述当前图像块进行划分的划分类型;Parsing the code stream to obtain identification information, where the identification information is used to indicate a division type for dividing the current image block;
    相应的,所述将所述块划分策略应用于所述当前图像块以得到编码块,包括:Correspondingly, the applying of the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain a coding block includes:
    基于所述块划分策略,当所述标识信息表示对所述当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时,对所述当前图像块进行划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分。Based on the block division strategy, when the identification information indicates that the current image block is to be divided into extended quadtrees, the current image block is divided into horizontally extended quadtrees.
  16. 一种视频译码器,其特征在于,包括:A video decoder is characterized by comprising:
    划分单元,用于根据当前图像块的宽与高的大小关系,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略;以及,将所述块划分策略应用于所述当前图像块以得到编码块;A dividing unit, configured to determine a block division strategy of the current image block according to the relationship between the width and height of the current image block; and, apply the block division strategy to the current image block to obtain an encoding block;
    重构单元,用于通过对得到的所述编码块进行重构以实现对所述当前图像块的重构。The reconstruction unit is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述划分单元具体用于:The video decoder according to claim 16, wherein the dividing unit is specifically configured to:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第一条件,所述第一条件包括:所述当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的高的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a first condition, where the first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than a product of a first threshold and a height of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第一条件时,确定所述块划分策略为划分方向为竖直方向的划分,所述竖直方向垂直于所述当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the first condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is division in a vertical direction, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located .
  18. 根据权利要求16所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述划分单元具体用于:The video decoder according to claim 16, wherein the dividing unit is specifically configured to:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第二条件,所述第二条件包括:所述当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的宽的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a second condition, where the second condition includes: a height of the current image block is less than a product of a first threshold and a width of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第二条件时,确定所述块划分策略为划分方向为水平方向的划分,所述水平方向垂直于所述当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the second condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is division in a horizontal direction, and the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the height of the current image block is located.
  19. 根据权利要求16所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述划分单元具体用于:The video decoder according to claim 16, wherein the dividing unit is specifically configured to:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第一条件,所述第一条件包括:所述当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的高的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a first condition, where the first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than a product of a first threshold and a height of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第一条件时,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为水平方向的划分,所述水平方向垂直于所述当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the first condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the horizontal direction, the horizontal direction being perpendicular to the height of the current image block The direction of the side.
  20. 根据权利要求16所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述划分单元具体用于:The video decoder according to claim 16, wherein the dividing unit is specifically configured to:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第二条件,所述第二条件包括:所述当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的宽的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a second condition, where the second condition includes: a height of the current image block is less than a product of a first threshold and a width of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第二条件时,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为竖直方向的划分,所述竖直方向垂直于所述当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the second condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include the division in the vertical direction, and the vertical direction is perpendicular to the width of the current image block The direction of the edge.
  21. 根据权利要求17至20任一项所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述第一阈值是允许的编码树中节点的长边长度与短边长度之比的最大值。The video decoder according to any one of claims 17 to 20, wherein the first threshold is the maximum value of the ratio of the long side length to the short side length of the allowed nodes in the coding tree.
  22. 根据权利要求17或19所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述视频译码器还包括:The video decoder according to claim 17 or 19, wherein the video decoder further comprises:
    熵解码单元,用于解析码流,以得到标识信息,所述标识信息用于表示对所述当 前图像块进行划分的划分类型;The entropy decoding unit is used to parse the code stream to obtain identification information, and the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block;
    相应的,所述划分单元具体用于:基于所述块划分策略,采用所述标识信息所表示的划分类型,对所述当前图像块进行划分方向为竖直方向的划分,以得到编码块。Correspondingly, the dividing unit is specifically used to divide the current image block into a vertical direction based on the block division strategy and using the division type indicated by the identification information, to obtain an encoding block.
  23. 根据权利要求18或20所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述视频译码器还包括:The video decoder according to claim 18 or 20, wherein the video decoder further comprises:
    熵解码单元,用于解析码流,以得到标识信息,所述标识信息用于表示对所述当前图像块进行划分的划分类型;An entropy decoding unit is used to parse the code stream to obtain identification information, and the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block;
    相应的,所述划分单元具体用于:基于所述块划分策略,采用所述标识信息所表示的划分类型,对所述当前图像块进行划分方向为水平方向的划分。Correspondingly, the dividing unit is specifically configured to divide the current image block into a horizontal direction based on the block division strategy and using the type of division indicated by the identification information.
  24. 根据权利要求16所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述划分单元具体用于:The video decoder according to claim 16, wherein the dividing unit is specifically used for:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第三条件,所述第三条件包括:所述当前图像块的宽小于第二阈值与所述当前图像块的高的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a third condition, where the third condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第三条件时,确定所述块划分策略为划分方向为竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分,所述竖直方向垂直于所述当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the third condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is an extended quadtree division with the division direction in the vertical direction, where the vertical direction is perpendicular to the width of the current image block The direction of the side.
  25. 根据权利要求16所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述划分单元具体用于:The video decoder according to claim 16, wherein the dividing unit is specifically configured to:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第四条件,所述第四条件包括:所述当前图像块的高小于第二阈值与所述当前图像块的宽的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a fourth condition, where the fourth condition includes: a height of the current image block is less than a product of a second threshold and a width of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第四条件时,确定所述块划分策略为划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分,所述水平方向垂直于所述当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the fourth condition, it is determined that the block division strategy is an extended quadtree division with the division direction being a horizontal direction, the horizontal direction being perpendicular to the side where the height of the current image block lies Direction.
  26. 根据权利要求16所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述划分单元具体用于:The video decoder according to claim 16, wherein the dividing unit is specifically used for:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第三条件,所述第三条件包括:所述当前图像块的宽小于第二阈值与所述当前图像块的高的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a third condition, where the third condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than the product of the second threshold and the height of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第三条件时,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分,所述水平方向垂直于所述当前图像块的高所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the third condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include an extended quadtree division with the division direction being a horizontal direction, the horizontal direction being perpendicular to the current image block The direction of the side where the height is.
  27. 根据权利要求16所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述划分单元具体用于:The video decoder according to claim 16, wherein the dividing unit is specifically configured to:
    确定所述当前图像块是否满足第四条件,所述第四条件包括:所述当前图像块的高小于第二阈值与所述当前图像块的宽的乘积;Determining whether the current image block satisfies a fourth condition, where the fourth condition includes: a height of the current image block is less than a product of a second threshold and a width of the current image block;
    在所述当前图像块不满足所述第四条件时,确定所述当前图像块的块划分策略不包括划分方向为竖直方向的扩展四叉树划分,所述竖直方向垂直于所述当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向。When the current image block does not satisfy the fourth condition, it is determined that the block division strategy of the current image block does not include an extended quadtree division with a vertical division direction, the vertical direction being perpendicular to the current The direction of the side where the width of the image block lies.
  28. 根据权利要求24至27任一项所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述第二阈值是允许的编码树中节点的长边长度与短边长度之比的最大值的二分之一。The video decoder according to any one of claims 24 to 27, wherein the second threshold is half of the maximum value of the ratio of the long side length to the short side length of the allowed nodes in the coding tree One.
  29. 根据权利要求24或26所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述视频译码器还包括:The video decoder according to claim 24 or 26, wherein the video decoder further comprises:
    熵解码单元,用于解析码流,以得到标识信息,所述标识信息用于表示对所述当前图像块进行划分的划分类型;An entropy decoding unit is used to parse the code stream to obtain identification information, and the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block;
    相应的,所述划分单元具体用于:基于所述块划分策略,当所述标识信息表示对所述当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时,对所述当前图像块进行划分方向为竖直方向 的扩展四叉树划分。Correspondingly, the dividing unit is specifically configured to: based on the block dividing strategy, when the identification information indicates that the current image block is divided into an extended quadtree, the direction of dividing the current image block is vertical Directional quadtree division.
  30. 根据权利要求25或27所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述视频译码器还包括:The video decoder according to claim 25 or 27, wherein the video decoder further comprises:
    熵解码单元,用于解析码流,以得到标识信息,所述标识信息用于表示对所述当前图像块进行划分的划分类型;An entropy decoding unit is used to parse the code stream to obtain identification information, and the identification information is used to indicate the division type of the current image block;
    相应的,所述划分单元具体用于:基于所述块划分策略,当所述标识信息表示对所述当前图像块进行扩展四叉树划分时,对所述当前图像块进行划分方向为水平方向的扩展四叉树划分。Correspondingly, the dividing unit is specifically configured to: based on the block dividing strategy, when the identification information indicates that the current image block is divided into an extended quadtree, the direction of dividing the current image block is a horizontal direction The division of the extended quadtree.
  31. 一种视频译码方法,其特征在于,包括:A video decoding method, characterized in that it includes:
    如果待译码图像中的待划分图像块的长边长度是所述待划分图像块的短边长度的二倍,则对所述待划分图像块进行划分方向垂直于所述待划分图像块的长边的二叉树划分,得到划分后的图像块;If the length of the long side of the image block to be divided in the image to be decoded is twice the length of the short side of the image block to be divided, the dividing direction of the image block to be divided is perpendicular to that of the image block to be divided Binary tree division on the long side to obtain the divided image blocks;
    根据所述划分后的图像块,对所述待译码图像进行重构。Reconstruct the image to be decoded according to the divided image blocks.
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法,其特征在于,所述待划分图像块的长边长度为128个像素长度,短边长度为64个像素长度。The method according to claim 31, wherein the length of the long side of the image block to be divided is 128 pixels, and the length of the short side is 64 pixels.
  33. 根据权利要求31或32所述的方法,其特征在于,所述待划分图像块的短边长度等于最大变换单元TU的边尺寸,或者,所述待划分图像块的短边长度等于虚拟流水数据单元VPDU的边尺寸。The method according to claim 31 or 32, wherein the short side length of the image block to be divided is equal to the side size of the maximum transform unit TU, or the short side length of the image block to be divided is equal to virtual pipeline data The side dimensions of the unit VPDU.
  34. 根据权利要求31至33任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述待划分图像块是边界图像块。The method according to any one of claims 31 to 33, wherein the image block to be divided is a boundary image block.
  35. 一种视频译码器,其特征在于,包括:A video decoder is characterized by comprising:
    划分单元,用于如果待译码图像中的待划分图像块的长边长度是所述待划分图像块的短边长度的二倍,则对所述待划分图像块进行划分方向垂直于所述待划分图像块的长边的二叉树划分,得到划分后的图像块;A dividing unit, configured to divide the image block to be divided if the length of the long side of the image block to be divided in the image to be decoded is twice the length of the short side of the image block to be divided Binary tree division on the long side of the image block to be divided to obtain the divided image block;
    重构单元,用于根据所述划分后的图像块,对所述待译码图像进行重构。The reconstruction unit is configured to reconstruct the image to be decoded according to the divided image blocks.
  36. 根据权利要求35所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述待划分图像块的长边长度为128个像素长度,短边长度为64个像素长度。The video decoder according to claim 35, wherein the long side of the image block to be divided is 128 pixels long, and the short side is 64 pixels long.
  37. 根据权利要求35或36所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述待划分图像块的短边长度等于最大变换单元TU的边尺寸,或者,所述待划分图像块的短边长度等于虚拟流水数据单元VPDU的边尺寸。The video decoder according to claim 35 or 36, wherein the length of the short side of the image block to be divided is equal to the side size of the maximum transform unit TU, or the length of the short side of the image block to be divided is equal to The side size of the virtual pipeline data unit VPDU.
  38. 根据权利要求35至37任一项所述的视频译码器,其特征在于,所述待划分图像块是边界图像块。The video decoder according to any one of claims 35 to 37, wherein the image block to be divided is a boundary image block.
  39. 一种视频译码装置,其特征在于,包括存储器和处理器;所述存储器用于存储程序代码;所述处理器用于调用所述程序代码,以执行如权利要求1至15任一项所述的方法。A video decoding device, comprising a memory and a processor; the memory is used to store program code; the processor is used to call the program code to execute any one of claims 1 to 15. Methods.
  40. 一种视频译码装置,其特征在于,包括存储器和处理器;所述存储器用于存储程序代码;所述处理器用于调用所述程序代码,以执行如权利要求31至34任一项所述的方法。A video decoding device, comprising a memory and a processor; the memory is used to store program code; the processor is used to call the program code to execute any one of claims 31 to 34 Methods.
  41. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括程序代码,所述程序代码在计 算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至15任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising program code, which when run on a computer causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 15.
  42. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括程序代码,所述程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求31至34任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, comprising program code, which when run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 31 to 34.
  43. 一种视频译码方法,其特征在于,包括:A video decoding method, characterized in that it includes:
    根据当前图像块是否满足第一条件,确定是否允许对所述当前图像块进行水平方向的二叉树划分,所述水平方向垂直于所述当前图像块的高所在的边的方向,所述第一条件包括:所述当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的高的乘积,其中,在所述当前图像块满足所述第一条件的情况下,确定允许对所述当前图像块进行水平方向的二叉树划分;According to whether the current image block satisfies the first condition, determine whether to allow a binary tree division of the current image block in a horizontal direction, the horizontal direction being perpendicular to the direction of the side of the current image block where the height is located, the first condition The method includes: the width of the current image block is smaller than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block, wherein, in the case where the current image block satisfies the first condition, it is determined that the current image block is allowed Divide the binary tree in the horizontal direction;
    在确定允许对所述当前图像块进行水平方向的二叉树划分的情况下,获取所述当前图像块的编码块;Acquiring a coding block of the current image block when it is determined that horizontal tree binary division is allowed for the current image block;
    通过对得到的所述编码块进行重构以实现对所述当前图像块的重构。Reconstructing the obtained coding block to achieve reconstruction of the current image block.
  44. 一种视频译码方法,其特征在于,包括:A video decoding method, characterized in that it includes:
    根据当前图像块是否满足第二条件,确定是否允许对所述当前图像块进行竖直方向的二叉树划分,所述竖直方向垂直于所述当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向,所述第二条件包括:所述当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的宽的乘积,其中,在所述当前图像块满足所述第二条件的情况下,确定允许对所述当前图像块进行竖直方向的二叉树划分;According to whether the current image block satisfies the second condition, it is determined whether the current image block is allowed to be divided into a binary tree in the vertical direction, the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located, the first The second condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block, wherein, in the case where the current image block satisfies the second condition, it is determined that the current The image block is divided into two binary trees in the vertical direction;
    在确定允许对所述当前图像块进行竖直方向的二叉树划分的情况下,获取所述当前图像块的编码块;Acquiring a coding block of the current image block if it is determined that vertical binary tree division is allowed for the current image block;
    通过对得到的所述编码块进行重构以实现对所述当前图像块的重构。Reconstructing the obtained coding block to achieve reconstruction of the current image block.
  45. 一种视频译码方法,其特征在于,包括:A video decoding method, characterized in that it includes:
    根据当前图像块是否满足第一条件,确定是否允许对所述当前图像块进行水平方向的划分,所述水平方向垂直于所述当前图像块的高所在的边的方向,所述第一条件包括:所述当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的高的乘积,其中,在所述当前图像块不满足所述第一条件的情况下,确定不允许对所述当前图像块进行水平方向的划分;According to whether the current image block satisfies the first condition, determine whether to allow the current image block to be divided in a horizontal direction, the horizontal direction being perpendicular to the direction of the side where the current image block is high, the first condition includes : The width of the current image block is smaller than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block, wherein, in the case where the current image block does not satisfy the first condition, it is determined that the current image is not allowed The blocks are divided horizontally;
    在确定不允许对所述当前图像块进行水平方向的划分的情况下,获取所述当前图像块的编码块;Acquiring a coding block of the current image block if it is determined that horizontal division of the current image block is not allowed;
    通过对得到的所述编码块进行重构以实现对所述当前图像块的重构。Reconstructing the obtained coding block to achieve reconstruction of the current image block.
  46. 一种视频译码方法,其特征在于,包括:A video decoding method, characterized in that it includes:
    根据当前图像块是否满足第二条件,确定是否允许对所述当前图像块进行竖直方向的划分,所述竖直方向垂直于所述当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向,所述第二条件包括:所述当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的宽的乘积,其中,在所述当前图像块不满足所述第二条件的情况下,确定不允许对所述当前图像块进行竖直方向的划分;According to whether the current image block satisfies the second condition, it is determined whether the current image block is allowed to be divided in a vertical direction, the vertical direction is perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located, the second The condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block, wherein, in the case where the current image block does not satisfy the second condition, it is determined that the The current image block is divided in the vertical direction;
    在确定不允许对所述当前图像块进行竖直方向的划分的情况下,获取所述当前图像块的编码块;Acquiring a coding block of the current image block if it is determined that vertical division of the current image block is not allowed;
    通过对得到的所述编码块进行重构以实现对所述当前图像块的重构。Reconstructing the obtained coding block to achieve reconstruction of the current image block.
  47. 一种视频译码装置,其特征在于,包括:A video decoding device is characterized by comprising:
    划分单元,用于根据当前图像块是否满足第一条件,确定是否允许对所述当前图像块进行水平方向的二叉树划分,所述水平方向垂直于所述当前图像块的高所在的边的方向,所述第一条件包括:所述当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的高的乘积,其中,在所述当前图像块满足所述第一条件的情况下,确定允许对所述当前图像块进行水平方向的二叉树划分;以及,在确定允许对所述当前图像块进行水平方向的二叉树划分的情况下,获取所述当前图像块的编码块;A dividing unit, configured to determine whether to allow the current image block to be divided into a binary tree in a horizontal direction according to whether the current image block satisfies the first condition, the horizontal direction being perpendicular to the direction of the side where the current image block is high, The first condition includes: the width of the current image block is less than a product of a first threshold and a height of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block satisfies the first condition, it is determined that Dividing the current image block into a binary tree in the horizontal direction; and, in a case where it is determined that the current image block is allowed to be divided into a binary tree in the horizontal direction, acquiring the coding block of the current image block;
    重构单元,用于通过对得到的所述编码块进行重构以实现对所述当前图像块的重构。The reconstruction unit is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
  48. 一种视频译码装置,其特征在于,包括:A video decoding device is characterized by comprising:
    划分单元,用于根据当前图像块是否满足第二条件,确定是否允许对所述当前图像块进行竖直方向的二叉树划分,所述竖直方向垂直于所述当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向,所述第二条件包括:所述当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的宽的乘积,其中,在所述当前图像块满足所述第二条件的情况下,确定允许对所述当前图像块进行竖直方向的二叉树划分;以及,在确定允许对所述当前图像块进行竖直方向的二叉树划分的情况下,获取所述当前图像块的编码块;A dividing unit, configured to determine whether to allow a binary tree division of the current image block in a vertical direction according to whether the current image block satisfies the second condition, the vertical direction being perpendicular to the side of the width of the current image block Direction, the second condition includes: a height of the current image block is less than a product of a first threshold and a width of the current image block, wherein, if the current image block satisfies the second condition, it is determined Allowing a vertical binary tree division of the current image block; and, if it is determined that a vertical binary tree division is allowed for the current image block, acquiring a coding block of the current image block;
    重构单元,用于通过对得到的所述编码块进行重构以实现对所述当前图像块的重构。The reconstruction unit is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
  49. 一种视频译码装置,其特征在于,包括:A video decoding device is characterized by comprising:
    划分单元,用于根据当前图像块是否满足第一条件,确定是否允许对所述当前图像块进行水平方向的划分,所述水平方向垂直于所述当前图像块的高所在的边的方向,所述第一条件包括:所述当前图像块的宽小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的高的乘积,其中,在所述当前图像块不满足所述第一条件的情况下,确定不允许对所述当前图像块进行水平方向的划分;在确定不允许对所述当前图像块进行水平方向的划分的情况下,获取所述当前图像块的编码块;The dividing unit is configured to determine whether to allow the current image block to be divided in a horizontal direction according to whether the current image block satisfies the first condition, the horizontal direction being perpendicular to the direction of the side where the current image block is high, so The first condition includes: the width of the current image block is smaller than the product of the first threshold and the height of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block does not satisfy the first condition, it is determined that it is not allowed Dividing the current image block in the horizontal direction; when it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to be divided in the horizontal direction, acquiring the coding block of the current image block;
    重构单元,用于通过对得到的所述编码块进行重构以实现对所述当前图像块的重构。The reconstruction unit is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
  50. 一种视频译码装置,其特征在于,包括:A video decoding device is characterized by comprising:
    划分单元,用于根据当前图像块是否满足第二条件,确定是否允许对所述当前图像块进行竖直方向的划分,所述竖直方向垂直于所述当前图像块的宽所在的边的方向,所述第二条件包括:所述当前图像块的高小于第一阈值与所述当前图像块的宽的乘积,其中,在所述当前图像块不满足所述第二条件的情况下,确定不允许对所述当前图像块进行竖直方向的划分;在确定不允许对所述当前图像块进行竖直方向的划分的情况下,获取所述当前图像块的编码块;A dividing unit, configured to determine whether to allow the current image block to be divided in a vertical direction according to whether the current image block satisfies the second condition, the vertical direction being perpendicular to the direction of the side where the width of the current image block is located , The second condition includes: the height of the current image block is less than the product of the first threshold and the width of the current image block, where, in the case where the current image block does not satisfy the second condition, it is determined It is not allowed to divide the current image block in the vertical direction; if it is determined that the current image block is not allowed to be divided in the vertical direction, obtain the coding block of the current image block;
    重构单元,用于通过对得到的所述编码块进行重构以实现对所述当前图像块的重构。The reconstruction unit is configured to reconstruct the current image block by reconstructing the obtained coding block.
  51. 一种视频译码装置,其特征在于,包括存储器和处理器;所述存储器用于存储程序代码;所述处理器用于调用所述程序代码,以执行如权利要求43至46任一项所述的方法。A video decoding device, comprising a memory and a processor; the memory is used to store program code; the processor is used to call the program code to execute any one of claims 43 to 46 Methods.
  52. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括程序代码,所述程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求43至46任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, comprising program code, which when run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 43 to 46.
PCT/CN2019/125740 2018-12-16 2019-12-16 Video coder-decoder and corresponding method WO2020125595A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP19898034.4A EP3890322A4 (en) 2018-12-16 2019-12-16 Video coder-decoder and corresponding method
US17/345,286 US11516470B2 (en) 2018-12-16 2021-06-11 Video coder and corresponding method

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201811546224.7 2018-12-16
CN201811546224 2018-12-16
CN201910372891.6A CN111327899A (en) 2018-12-16 2019-05-06 Video decoder and corresponding method
CN201910372891.6 2019-05-06

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/345,286 Continuation US11516470B2 (en) 2018-12-16 2021-06-11 Video coder and corresponding method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020125595A1 true WO2020125595A1 (en) 2020-06-25

Family

ID=71101078

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/125740 WO2020125595A1 (en) 2018-12-16 2019-12-16 Video coder-decoder and corresponding method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2020125595A1 (en)

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200304815A1 (en) * 2019-03-22 2020-09-24 Tencent America LLC Method and apparatus for video coding
CN112954321A (en) * 2021-02-01 2021-06-11 中山大学 Image feature intra-frame division method, device, equipment and medium
CN113194311A (en) * 2021-04-27 2021-07-30 北京京东方技术开发有限公司 Image processing method, image processor and storage medium
CN113286150A (en) * 2021-05-17 2021-08-20 北京大学深圳研究生院 Transform coding hardware implementation method, device and equipment for video coding and decoding
CN113489994A (en) * 2021-05-28 2021-10-08 杭州博雅鸿图视频技术有限公司 Motion estimation method, motion estimation device, electronic equipment and medium
CN114630128A (en) * 2022-05-17 2022-06-14 苇创微电子(上海)有限公司 Image compression and decompression method and system based on line data blocking rearrangement
CN116389763A (en) * 2023-06-05 2023-07-04 瀚博半导体(上海)有限公司 Video coding method and device based on multiple encoders

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102957907A (en) * 2011-08-31 2013-03-06 华为技术有限公司 Method and module for acquiring position information of transforming block
CN102970526A (en) * 2011-08-31 2013-03-13 华为技术有限公司 Method and module for acquiring transformation block size
CN104284188A (en) * 2014-10-11 2015-01-14 华为技术有限公司 Partitioning method for prediction block, encoding device and decoding device
WO2018130473A1 (en) * 2017-01-11 2018-07-19 Thomson Licensing Block size based transform restrictions
CN108713320A (en) * 2016-03-16 2018-10-26 联发科技股份有限公司 The video data handling procedure and device of block size are limited in Video coding

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102957907A (en) * 2011-08-31 2013-03-06 华为技术有限公司 Method and module for acquiring position information of transforming block
CN102970526A (en) * 2011-08-31 2013-03-13 华为技术有限公司 Method and module for acquiring transformation block size
CN104284188A (en) * 2014-10-11 2015-01-14 华为技术有限公司 Partitioning method for prediction block, encoding device and decoding device
CN108713320A (en) * 2016-03-16 2018-10-26 联发科技股份有限公司 The video data handling procedure and device of block size are limited in Video coding
WO2018130473A1 (en) * 2017-01-11 2018-07-19 Thomson Licensing Block size based transform restrictions

Cited By (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200304815A1 (en) * 2019-03-22 2020-09-24 Tencent America LLC Method and apparatus for video coding
US11677969B2 (en) * 2019-03-22 2023-06-13 Tencent America LLC Method and apparatus for video coding
CN112954321A (en) * 2021-02-01 2021-06-11 中山大学 Image feature intra-frame division method, device, equipment and medium
CN113194311A (en) * 2021-04-27 2021-07-30 北京京东方技术开发有限公司 Image processing method, image processor and storage medium
CN113194311B (en) * 2021-04-27 2022-12-27 北京京东方技术开发有限公司 Image processing method, image processor, and storage medium
CN113286150A (en) * 2021-05-17 2021-08-20 北京大学深圳研究生院 Transform coding hardware implementation method, device and equipment for video coding and decoding
CN113489994A (en) * 2021-05-28 2021-10-08 杭州博雅鸿图视频技术有限公司 Motion estimation method, motion estimation device, electronic equipment and medium
CN114630128A (en) * 2022-05-17 2022-06-14 苇创微电子(上海)有限公司 Image compression and decompression method and system based on line data blocking rearrangement
CN114630128B (en) * 2022-05-17 2022-07-22 苇创微电子(上海)有限公司 Image compression and decompression method and system based on line data blocking rearrangement
CN116389763A (en) * 2023-06-05 2023-07-04 瀚博半导体(上海)有限公司 Video coding method and device based on multiple encoders
CN116389763B (en) * 2023-06-05 2023-08-11 瀚博半导体(上海)有限公司 Video coding method and device based on multiple encoders

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020125595A1 (en) Video coder-decoder and corresponding method
CN111355951B (en) Video decoding method, device and decoding equipment
US11388399B2 (en) Image prediction method, apparatus, and system, device, and storage medium
US11924438B2 (en) Picture reconstruction method and apparatus
WO2020114394A1 (en) Video encoding/decoding method, video encoder, and video decoder
CN111385572B (en) Prediction mode determining method and device, encoding device and decoding device
CN112055200A (en) MPM list construction method, and chroma block intra-frame prediction mode acquisition method and device
WO2020143585A1 (en) Video encoder, video decoder, and corresponding method
WO2020143589A1 (en) Video image decoding method and apparatus, and video image encoding method and apparatus
WO2020135467A1 (en) Inter frame prediction method, device and corresponding encoder and decoder
US11516470B2 (en) Video coder and corresponding method
WO2020253681A1 (en) Method and device for constructing merge candidate motion information list, and codec
US11902506B2 (en) Video encoder, video decoder, and corresponding methods
WO2020259353A1 (en) Entropy coding/decoding method for syntactic element, device, and codec
WO2020224476A1 (en) Image division method, apparatus and device
CN111277840B (en) Transform method, inverse transform method, video encoder and video decoder
WO2020259330A1 (en) Non-separable transformation method and device
CN111294603B (en) Video encoding and decoding method and device
WO2020187062A1 (en) Method and apparatus for optimization for use in merge with motion vector difference technology, and encoder-decoder
WO2020125761A1 (en) Image block division method and device
WO2020108168A1 (en) Video image prediction method and device
WO2020119742A1 (en) Block division method, video encoding and decoding method, and video codec
WO2020186882A1 (en) Triangle prediction unit mode-based processing method and device
WO2020135409A1 (en) Video decoding method and apparatus, and decoding device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19898034

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019898034

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20210629